Reference - Invera

2613

eSTELPLAN

Reference

Release 4.0a

February 15, 2016

Copyright 2016 Invera Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Invera Inc. (hereinafter referred to as Invera) has prepared this document for use by its personnel, licensees and

customers. The information contained herein is the property of Invera and shall not be reproduced in whole or in

part without prior written approval from Invera.

Invera reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document without

prior notice, and the reader should in all cases consult Invera to determine whether any such changes have been

made.

The terms and conditions governing the licensing of Invera software consist solely of those set forth in the

written contracts between Invera and its customers. No representation or other affirmation of fact contained

in this document, including but not limited to statements regarding capacity, response-time performance,

suitability for use, or performance of products described herein shall be deemed to be a warranty by Invera

for any purpose or give rise to any liability of Invera whatsoever.

eSTELPLAN is a Trademark of Invera Inc.

Web: www.invera.com

Email: [email protected]

Phone: (514) 935-3535

Fax: (514) 935-3850

Invera Corp. 6125 Luther Lane, #425

Dallas, TX 75225

U.S.A.

Invera Inc. 4333 St. Catherine Street West,

Westmount, Quebec H3Z 1P9

Canada

Table of Contents

1. GENERAL LEDGER AND GENERAL COMPANY INFORMATION .......................................... 1 CHART OF ACCOUNTS ......................................................................................................................... 1

Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 1 General Ledger Account Number Structure .......................................................................................... 1 Basic General Ledger Account .............................................................................................................. 2

Example 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 2 Example 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 2

General Ledger Branch .......................................................................................................................... 3 Example 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 3 Example 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 3

Cost Center ............................................................................................................................................ 3 Example 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 4 Example 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 4

General Ledger Account Numbers ........................................................................................................ 4 Example ............................................................................................................................................. 4

Prerequisites for Basic General Ledger Account Code Entry ............................................................... 5 GL Accounts Setup List ........................................................................................................................ 5

COUNTRIES ............................................................................................................................................ 8 STATE/PROVINCE ................................................................................................................................. 9 BRANCHES ........................................................................................................................................... 10

eSTELoemtoll Requirements .............................................................................................................. 10 PRINTER TYPES ................................................................................................................................... 13

Tag Printer Types ................................................................................................................................ 14 PRINTERS .............................................................................................................................................. 15 BRANCH OPTIONS .............................................................................................................................. 16

External Certificate Printer (scablp) .................................................................................................... 19 ACCOUNT CLASS ................................................................................................................................ 20 COST CENTER TYPES ......................................................................................................................... 21 COST CENTERS .................................................................................................................................... 23 BASIC GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNTS .......................................................................................... 25 GENERAL COMPANY INFORMATION ............................................................................................ 27 FISCAL CALENDAR ............................................................................................................................ 29 BUSINESS CALENDAR ....................................................................................................................... 31 BOOKINGS CALENDAR ..................................................................................................................... 32 HOLIDAY SCHEDULE ......................................................................................................................... 33 GENERAL LEDGER COMPANY INFORMATION ............................................................................ 34 ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE COMPANY............................................................................................. 36

Field Modifications ............................................................................................................................. 36 eSTELPLAN COMPANY ...................................................................................................................... 39 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE COMPANY ................................................................................................... 46 CONTROLLED REFERENCE NUMBERS .......................................................................................... 49

Reference Prefixes ............................................................................................................................... 49 Source Journal Codes .......................................................................................................................... 52

WAREHOUSES ..................................................................................................................................... 53

Table of Contents Page ii

REGIONS ................................................................................................................................................ 55 ELECTRONIC SCALES ........................................................................................................................ 56 PRODUCT INSTALLATION OPTIONS ............................................................................................... 58

Product Installation Option Routine .................................................................................................... 60 BRANCH TIME ZONE .......................................................................................................................... 61

2. CUSTOMER & VENDOR INFORMATION .................................................................................... 63 CURRENCIES ........................................................................................................................................ 63 TERMS OF PAYMENT ......................................................................................................................... 65 CREDIT AUTHORITIES ....................................................................................................................... 69 CREDIT CONTROL CODES ................................................................................................................. 70 STANDARD INDUSTRIAL CLASSIFICATIONS ............................................................................... 71 CUSTOMER/VENDOR CATEGORIES ................................................................................................ 72 TAX REGIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 73 SALES TERRITORIES .......................................................................................................................... 75 SALESPERSONS ................................................................................................................................... 76 FREIGHT RESPONSIBILITY ............................................................................................................... 77 BANKS ................................................................................................................................................... 78 CUSTOMER BANKS ............................................................................................................................. 80 CREDIT STATUS................................................................................................................................... 81 CREDIT HOLD REASONS ................................................................................................................... 82 1099 CATEGORIES ............................................................................................................................... 84 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION STANDARDS ..................................................................................... 85

Purchase Orders ................................................................................................................................... 85 Requirements .................................................................................................................................... 85

Sales Order Cycle ................................................................................................................................ 86 Rules and Restrictions ...................................................................................................................... 86

CUSTOMER TAG INFORMATION ..................................................................................................... 87 Tag Numbers – Automatic Assignment ............................................................................................... 93 Defaulting the Charge Quantity Type .................................................................................................. 93 Automatic Customer Tag Information Table Generation .................................................................... 93

Restriction ........................................................................................................................................ 93 Customer Tag Information Record Creation .................................................................................... 93

STATE/PROVINCE................................................................................................................................ 94 USER DEFINED TABLE ....................................................................................................................... 95

3. INVENTORY INFORMATION .......................................................................................................... 97 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................ 97 INVENTORY CODING ......................................................................................................................... 98

Three-Tiered Structure ......................................................................................................................... 98 Product Dimension .............................................................................................................................. 98 Inventory Tagging................................................................................................................................ 99 Gauge Required ................................................................................................................................. 100 TMW Factor/Theoretical Weight ...................................................................................................... 100 Changing the TMW Factor ................................................................................................................ 101

Procedure........................................................................................................................................ 101 Piece Control ..................................................................................................................................... 101 Product Group/Product Master Sequence Number ............................................................................ 101 Management Summary Group/Product Category .............................................................................. 102 Company/Branch Standard Dimension .............................................................................................. 102 Pre-Defined eSTELPLAN Tables...................................................................................................... 103

Price Per Check Codes ................................................................................................................... 103 Units of Measure ............................................................................................................................ 104

List of standard Units of Measure ...................................................................................................... 105 Inventory Logic Control Table ....................................................................................................... 106 Installation Options ........................................................................................................................ 109

Table of Contents Page iii

CODING CONVENTIONS .................................................................................................................. 115 Carbon Steel Products ....................................................................................................................... 115

Structural Shapes ........................................................................................................................... 115 Flat Products .................................................................................................................................. 115 Pipe and Tubing ............................................................................................................................. 116

Alloy Metals (Aluminum, Brass, Copper Stainless Steel) ................................................................ 116 Structural Shapes ........................................................................................................................... 116 Flat Products .................................................................................................................................. 116 Pipe and Tubing ............................................................................................................................. 117

Perforated Metal Products ................................................................................................................. 117 Expanded Metal ............................................................................................................................. 117

Non-Dimensional Products................................................................................................................ 117 Products Stored in Rolls .................................................................................................................... 117

INVENTORY CODING TABLES ....................................................................................................... 118 System Common Inventory Related Tables ...................................................................................... 118 Inventory Control Reference Tables .................................................................................................. 118 Optional Inventory Control Reference Tables ................................................................................... 118

MILLS ................................................................................................................................................... 119 INVENTORY ADJUSTMENT REASONS ......................................................................................... 121

Field Modifications ........................................................................................................................... 121 CONDITION CODES .......................................................................................................................... 122 COLOR CODES ................................................................................................................................... 123 CHEMICAL ELEMENTS .................................................................................................................... 124 DEFAULT CHEMICAL ELEMENTS TABLE ................................................................................... 126 JOMINY TABLE REFERENCE TABLE ............................................................................................ 127 GROUP/JOMINY REFERENCE TABLE ........................................................................................... 128 PRODUCT CATEGORY ..................................................................................................................... 129 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................................... 130 SPECIFICATION TEMPLATES ......................................................................................................... 131 MANAGEMENT SUMMARY GROUPS ............................................................................................ 132 REASONS............................................................................................................................................. 133 EQUIVALENT PRODUCT .................................................................................................................. 135 PRODUCT GROUPS ........................................................................................................................... 137

Coding Product Groups ..................................................................................................................... 137 Creating Group Standard Dimensions ............................................................................................... 140 Product Group Setup for Late Payment Charges ............................................................................... 142 Scrap Product Groups ........................................................................................................................ 143

PRODUCT GRADES ........................................................................................................................... 145 PRODUCT GROUP/GRADE ............................................................................................................... 147 PRODUCT MASTERS ......................................................................................................................... 151

Extended Description ..................................................................................................................... 155 Miscellaneous Product Billing ........................................................................................................... 155 Scrap Product Masters ....................................................................................................................... 155 Requirements for Late Payment Charges .......................................................................................... 155 Company Standard Dimensions ........................................................................................................ 157

PRODUCT GAUGES ........................................................................................................................... 158 COMPANY STANDARD DIMENSIONS........................................................................................... 161 BRANCH STANDARD DIMENSIONS .............................................................................................. 166 STANDARD PHYSICAL PROPERTIES ............................................................................................ 170 STANDARD LOCATIONS ................................................................................................................. 171 PRODUCT TAX STATUS ................................................................................................................... 172 ALTERNATE LANGUAGE DESCRIPTIONS ................................................................................... 173 MARKUP PERCENTAGE ................................................................................................................... 176

Restriction .......................................................................................................................................... 176

Table of Contents Page iv

Corporate Branch Installation Options Settings ................................................................................ 176 PRODUCT LINE REMARK ................................................................................................................ 177

4. SALES AND COSTING INFORMATION ...................................................................................... 179 SALES CATEGORIES ......................................................................................................................... 179 SALES ALLOCATIONS ...................................................................................................................... 181

Coding Requirements for Sales Orders and Invoices Entries ............................................................ 184 Inventory or Customer-Owned Sale ............................................................................................... 185

Coding Requirements for Sales Returns Allocations ......................................................................... 187 Coding Requirements for Transfer Orders ........................................................................................ 187 Coding Requirements for Late Payment Charges .............................................................................. 189 Coding Requirements for Direct Shipments ...................................................................................... 189 Sales Allocations for ABC Metals Inc. .............................................................................................. 191 Allocation Code WS – Warehouse Sales ........................................................................................... 193 Allocation Code DS – Direct Shipment ............................................................................................. 194 Allocation Code RA – Returns and Allowances ................................................................................ 195 Allocation Code LC – Late Payment Income .................................................................................... 197

OUTBOUND FREIGHT RATES ......................................................................................................... 198 PROCESSING WORK CENTERS ....................................................................................................... 199

eSTELman Usage .............................................................................................................................. 203 WORK CENTERS PROCESSES ......................................................................................................... 204

eSTELpro ....................................................................................................................................... 204 SCHEDULING OPTIONS .................................................................................................................... 205 SCHEDULING OPTIONS – BY PWC ................................................................................................ 209 BRANCH ADMINISTRATIVE COST ................................................................................................ 210

How the Quotation, Order and Invoice Costing Programs Use This Table ....................................... 211 Restriction ...................................................................................................................................... 211

INVOICING COMMODITY ................................................................................................................ 212

5. ORDER PROCESSING INFORMATION ....................................................................................... 213 ORDER STATUS ................................................................................................................................. 213 STANDARD MESSAGES ................................................................................................................... 215

Standard Forms Printing Messages .................................................................................................... 215 Corporate and Branch Standard Messages ..................................................................................... 216 General Rules ................................................................................................................................. 216 Exceptions ...................................................................................................................................... 217

REMARKS TEMPLATES .................................................................................................................... 218 Special Prompting Characters ............................................................................................................ 219

SKID TYPES ........................................................................................................................................ 220 PACKAGING COSTS .......................................................................................................................... 221 PROCESS CODES ................................................................................................................................ 222 PRODUCTION SEQUENCE ............................................................................................................... 225 SOURCE ............................................................................................................................................... 227

Source Code Look-Up ....................................................................................................................... 228 PRODUCT END USE ........................................................................................................................... 229

Field Restrictions ............................................................................................................................... 229 CASH PAYMENT METHOD TYPE ................................................................................................... 230 LOCATION/DELIVERY PRINTER .................................................................................................... 231 PRODUCT PICKING TICKET ............................................................................................................ 232 SALES CATEGORY WORK ORDER PRINTING ............................................................................. 233 MANAGER OPTIONS ......................................................................................................................... 234

6. PURCHASING INFORMATION ..................................................................................................... 237 BUYERS ............................................................................................................................................... 237 PURCHASE ORDER CATEGORIES .................................................................................................. 238 ORDER STATUS ................................................................................................................................. 239

Table of Contents Page v

CONDITION CODES .......................................................................................................................... 240 STANDARD MESSAGES ................................................................................................................... 242 REMARK TEMPLATES ...................................................................................................................... 244

Special Prompting Characters ........................................................................................................... 245

7. CUSTOMER ACCOUNT MAINTENANCE ................................................................................... 247 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................................... 247 CUSTOMER ACCOUNTS................................................................................................................... 248

Adding Customer Accounts............................................................................................................... 248 Manual Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 248

Restrictions ........................................................................................................................................ 256 Others Action Bar Option .................................................................................................................. 256 Telephone Numbers ........................................................................................................................... 256 Fax Numbers ..................................................................................................................................... 257 Physical Tests .................................................................................................................................... 257 Temporary Accounts ......................................................................................................................... 257

Recommendations .......................................................................................................................... 257 Changing Customer Information ....................................................................................................... 257

Manual Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 258 Changes to Credit Information – Workflow Interface ................................................................... 259

Product Installation Options .............................................................................................................. 259 Credit Limit Password ................................................................................................................... 259 Field Access ................................................................................................................................... 259

CUSTOMER EXTENDED INFORMATION TABLE ........................................................................ 260 CUSTOMER BL BARCODE SETUP .................................................................................................. 261 CUSTOMER SHIP-TO INFORMATION ............................................................................................ 263

Adding Ship-To Information ............................................................................................................. 263 Manual Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 263

Others Action Bar Option .................................................................................................................. 265 Restrictions ........................................................................................................................................ 265 Telephone Numbers ........................................................................................................................... 266

Same Country Customers .............................................................................................................. 266 Overseas Customers ....................................................................................................................... 266

Fax Numbers ..................................................................................................................................... 266 Same Country Customers .............................................................................................................. 266 Overseas Customers ....................................................................................................................... 266

Changing Ship-To Information ......................................................................................................... 266 Manual Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 266

CUSTOMER SHIP-TO OVERRIDE NAME/ADDRESS .................................................................... 267 ALTERNATE COMPANY NAME AND ADDRESS ......................................................................... 268 CUSTOMER CREDIT REFERENCE .................................................................................................. 269 CUSTOMER REMARKS ..................................................................................................................... 270

Relative Printing Sequence of the Different Remarks Types ............................................................ 272 Quotation ........................................................................................................................................... 273 Sales Acknowledgments .................................................................................................................... 274 Sales Order Forms ............................................................................................................................. 274 Production Work Order Forms .......................................................................................................... 274 Bill of Lading Forms ......................................................................................................................... 275 Invoice Form ..................................................................................................................................... 275

CUSTOMER LOOK-UP....................................................................................................................... 276

8. VENDOR MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................. 279 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................................... 279 VENDOR ACCOUNTS ........................................................................................................................ 280

Add Vendor Accounts ....................................................................................................................... 280 Manual Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 280

Table of Contents Page vi

Address ........................................................................................................................................... 280 Telephone Numbers ....................................................................................................................... 280 Fax Numbers .................................................................................................................................. 281 Notes/Restrictions .......................................................................................................................... 283

Action Bar Options ............................................................................................................................ 283 Others Information Window .......................................................................................................... 283

Change Vendor Information .............................................................................................................. 284 Field Restrictions ........................................................................................................................... 284

SHIP-FROM INFORMATION ............................................................................................................. 285 Telephone Numbers ........................................................................................................................... 285

Same Country Customers ............................................................................................................... 285 Overseas Vendors ........................................................................................................................... 285

Fax Numbers ...................................................................................................................................... 286 Same Country Customers ............................................................................................................... 286 Overseas Customers ....................................................................................................................... 286

Others Action Bar Option .................................................................................................................. 286 VENDOR REMARKS .......................................................................................................................... 288

9. PRODUCT ENTERPRISE PARAMETERS.................................................................................... 291 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................................... 291 SAMPLES OF PEP CODE USE ........................................................................................................... 293

Product Division ................................................................................................................................ 293 Product Line ....................................................................................................................................... 293 Product Group .................................................................................................................................... 293 Product Category ............................................................................................................................... 294 Product Type ...................................................................................................................................... 294

Sample PEP Structure .................................................................................................................... 294 Use of PEPs in Product Setup ............................................................................................................ 295

PEP LEVELS USED IN INVEX .......................................................................................................... 296 REFERENCE TABLE ENTRY ............................................................................................................ 297

Product Master – Enterprise Parameters (inamep) ............................................................................ 297 Product Enterprise Parameters (inapep) ............................................................................................. 298 Product Type (inapti) ......................................................................................................................... 299 Product Enterprise Category Parameters (inadct) .............................................................................. 300 Product Enterprise Group Parameters (inapgr) .................................................................................. 301 Product Group (inapgp) ..................................................................................................................... 302 Product Enterprise Line Parameters (inaplp) ..................................................................................... 303 Product Division (inapdv) .................................................................................................................. 304 Product Line (inaprl) .......................................................................................................................... 305

APPENDIX A .......................................................................................................................................... 307 USER MENU OPTIONS ...................................................................................................................... 307

Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 309

Reference – 4.0a eSTELPLAN Licensed Material, February 15, 2016 Integrated Systems for the Metal Industry

1. GENERAL LEDGER AND GENERAL COMPANY

INFORMATION

CHART OF ACCOUNTS

Overview

The Chart of Accounts is composed of all the General Ledger Account numbers to which financial

transactions are posted. Each Account number is made up of three sections: the Basic General Ledger

Account code, a General Ledger Branch code and a Cost Center code. Each section of the number is

defined in a separate Reference table as they are used in a variety of ways within eSTELPLAN. Both the

General Ledger Branch code and the Cost Center code are optional. They are explained in greater detail

below.

The Chart of Accounts is shared by all accounting applications in eSTELPLAN. All accounting functions

that generate financial transactions to the General Ledger have the ability to validate account numbers

against the chart. This validation helps to ensure accuracy when financial entries are distributed to the

General Ledger.

General Ledger Account Number Structure

The make-up of the General Ledger Account number is as shown below:

Section Max Field Program where it is defined

Size

Basic GL Account code X(8) Basic GL Accounts

GL Branch X(3) eSTELPLAN Branches

Cost Center X(10) Cost Centers

Refer to the General Ledger Interface section for details on how the account is created from eSTELPLAN

transactions.

In programs that provide a Debit/Credit posting to a General Ledger account, the Account number is

entered in three sections, the total of which identifies a unique General Ledger Account number.

It is entered in the following format: Basic GL Brh Cost Center

XXXXXXXX XXX XXXXXXXXXX

1. General Ledger and General Company Information Page 2


Basic General Ledger Account

The Basic General Ledger Account code should be used to identify the Account Type (Asset, Liability,

Revenue or Expense etc.), the Account Class (Current Asset, Warehouse Sales, Delivery Expense) and/or

the Department (such as Production, Sales, Administration).

The Basic General Ledger Account code should contain the same number of characters and the same

placement of characters throughout the chart so they are easier to work with and can be interpreted easily.

The following examples illustrate some possible combinations of the Basic General Ledger code:

Example 1

A company uses the maximum length, 8 character, Basic General Ledger Account code, with a

Departmental breakdown.

XXXXXXXX Maximum Basic General Ledger Account size

XXXXXXXX Type X(3)

Class X(3)

Department X(2)

200055PD This may represent Type 200 ‘Liabilities’, Account class 055 is ‘Direct

Wages’, Department PD which is ‘Production’.

100001AD This may represent Type 100 ‘Assets’, Account Class 001 ‘Cash’,

Department AD ‘Administration’.

Example 2

A company uses a 5 character Basic General Ledger Account code with no Department breakdown.

XXXXXXXX Maximum General Ledger Account size

XXXXX Type X(2)

Class X(3)

20100 This may represent Type 20 ‘Liabilities’, the Account Class 100 is

‘Direct Wages’.

50400 This may represent Type 50 ‘Expense’, the Account Class 400

‘Depreciation Expense’.



General Ledger Branch

The General Ledger Branch code is used to identify the Branch associated with specific transactions.

This can be the Branch that initiated the transaction itself (as in Invoicing) or it could be a distribution of

a portion of a financial transaction to that Branch (as in Journal Entry posting).

The General Ledger Branch code is mandatory and is used if the Branch Required option is used. If

branch accounting is used, then all transactions require a General Ledger Branch code to be entered by the

user or it will be appended automatically by eSTELPLAN. The eSTELPLAN Branch table contains a

General Ledger Branch code. You may redefine the three-character branch into a numeric code for

General Ledger use.

The following examples illustrate some possible alternatives in the use of the General Ledger Branch

code:

Example 1

A company uses a Branch code that is the same as the alpha code used in the eSTELPLAN Branch table.

XXX Maximum General Ledger Branch size

CHI This can represent the ‘Chicago’ branch

Example 2

A company uses a 3 character Branch code in eSTELPLAN but wants to use a two digit Branch number

in General Ledger accounting. The Branch code is made up of 2 characters that have been redefined from

the three-character eSTELPLAN Branch code.

XXX Maximum General Ledger Branch size

02 This can represent the ‘Chicago’ branch

Cost Center

The Cost Center code is an optional field. It is used to identify the individual or piece of equipment for

which you wish to collect and analyze transactions. Cost Centers are defined within a Cost Center Type

so that the Cost Centers of a specific type can be analyzed together.

You can only have one Cost Center Type per Basic General Ledger Account. However, the same Cost

Center Type can be used under more than one Basic General Ledger Account.

The Cost Center is optional and will be used if accounting at the Cost Center level is required. Any

account, other than the General Ledger Interface Accounts (Control Accounts) can have both a Branch

and Cost Center breakdown. This is because the Cost Center detail cannot be passed automatically from

many system applications.

The following examples illustrate some possible alternatives in the use of the Cost Center:



Example 1

A company uses a 3 character Cost Center to represent the Processing Work Centers used to process

customer orders.

XXXXXXXXXX Maximum Cost Center size

200 This may represent the ‘Slitting’ Cost Center

PNT This may represent the ‘Painting’ Cost Center.

Example 2

A company uses a 7 character Cost Center to represent a Fixed Asset number. The Fixed Asset number

itself is composed of the year of acquisition and the Asset number.

XXXXXXXXXX Maximum Cost Center size

91-8452 Cost Center represents 1991 as the year of purchase and 8452 as the

Asset number.

General Ledger Account Numbers

The combination of Basic General Ledger Account, General Ledger Branch and Cost Center represents a

unique Account number. It is the number under which financial transactions are kept in the General

Ledger. Some combinations using the above examples are the following:

Example

A company uses a 5 digit Basic General Ledger Account, a 2 digit Branch and a 3 character Cost Center.

XXXXXXXX XXX XXXXXXXXXX

Maximum combination of Account number fields.

XXXXX XX XXX

Basic Account 1-digit type (Assets, Liab., Equity, Rev., Exp.)

3-digit class (Direct Wages, Outside Processing)

1-digit Department (Sales, Production, Admin.)

G/L Branch 2-digit Branch (Chicago, Philadelphia)

Cost Center 3-character Processing Work Center.

70201 01 PNT Represents maintenance expenses for the Production Department in

Chicago for the Painting Cost Center.

51250 10 Represents salaries for Administrative personnel at the Head Office (no

Cost Center required).



Prerequisites for Basic General Ledger Account Code Entry

In order to understand the General Ledger Account number structure, you must visualize how a chart

should be set up for your particular organization. The Chart of Accounts from your previous system may

be of some assistance in the development of a new chart.

The new Chart of Accounts should first be manually listed in the sequence you would want the accounts

to appear if they were to be printed. In order for specific reporting requirements to be simplified (when

developing PC financial statements for example), it is important to consider departmental breakdowns in

the structure of your Chart of Accounts

Traditionally, the Chart of Accounts structure reflects the financial statement reporting sequence.

Once all of the Basic General Ledger Accounts have been entered, a Chart of Accounts listing should be

printed. This report must be verified against the Chart of Accounts prepared manually. Once you are

satisfied with the listing, you should distribute it to the appropriate personnel.

We also suggest that a descriptive text of how the accounts are structured should accompany the Chart of

Accounts. The text should describe the usage of the accounts to assist users in posting entries into the

General Ledger.

It is strongly recommended that the opening of new Basic General Ledger Account numbers be restricted

to authorized personnel. A request for any new account numbers should be made in writing with the

reason for the request indicated. This will ensure that the chart of accounts is limited to a manageable

size and all accounts are incorporated into the financial reporting formats.

A Basic General Ledger Account can be made Inactive or Deleted, even if it is referenced by another

table (such as Sales Allocation, etc.). When an account is Inactive or Deleted, it cannot be used to enter a

manual Journal Entry to the General Ledger. However, to avoid delay in the processing, any automatic

posting goes through (e.g., Control Accounts in Cash Receipts Entry or Invoice Update). The erroneous

automatic Entry must then be adjusted through a manual Journal Entry. To prevent this situation from

happening, a GL Accounts Setup List should be run and reviewed prior to changing any Basic GL

account’s status.

GL Accounts Setup List

This listing provides reference table names and corresponding GL account numbers. This utility enables

you to verify the status of GL accounts and also indicates which tables contain GL Account numbers.



RUN: 07Nov04 15:02 eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY glracl010725 PAGE: 1

G/L Accounts Set Up List

G/L NUMBER DESCRIPTION

Sales Allocation Codes

1200 INVENTORY CONTROL

2010 UNPAID MATERIAL

2020 UNPAID FREIGHT

2030 UNPAID PROCESSING

2040 UNPAID OTHER

2060 UNAPPLIED RETURNS

4101 SALES WRHSE - MATERIAL

4102 SALES WRHSE - PROCESSING

4103 SALES WRHSE - FREIGHT

4110 SALES WRHSE - MISC. CHARGES

4111 SALES WRHSE - PKG

4112 SALES WRHSE - SKIDS

4202 SALES CUST OWNED - PROCESSING

4203 SALES CUST OWNED - FREIGHT

4204 SALES CUST OWNED - OTHER REV

4301 SALES BUY OUT - MATERIAL

4302 SALES BUY OUT - PROCESSING

4303 SALES BUY OUT - FREIGHT

====================================================================================================================================

GL Account Setup List – page 1



RUN: 07Nov04 15:02 eSTELPLAN METAL COMPANY glracl010725 PAGE: 2

G/L Accounts Set Up List

G/L NUMBER DESCRIPTION

Bank Account Information

1010 BANK - CHASE MANHATTAN

1011 BANK - CITICORP

1012 BANK - CITICORP (PAYROLL)

1015 BANK - BARCLAY'S OF LONDON

1016 EX VARIANCE-POUND STERLING

1018 BANK - ROYAL BANK OF CANADA

1019 EX VARIANCE-CANADIAN DOLLAR

1020 BANK - CREDIT SUISSE

1021 EX VARIANCE-SWISS FRANC

1023 BANK-BANQUE NATIONALE DE PARIS

1024 EX VARIANCE-FRENCH FRANC

1025 BANK - HANOVER COMMERCIAL BANK

1026 EX VARIANCE-GERMAN MARK

Company Parameters - AP

1450 PREPAID EXPENSES

2000 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE - TRADE

9420 DISCOUNTS EARNED

GL Account Setup List – page 2



COUNTRIES

This table is used to enter the list of countries in which the company operates. It allows you to identify

the Country of the installation and the Country of each Vendor and Customer account.

Logic used in Sales Tax calculations is based on the Country.

You must set up your Country codes using the standard telephone codes established for each country.

Example: United States and Canada are code 1

The eSTELfax application uses the Country code. Refer to the Customer Account and Vendor Account

Maintenance chapters of this manual for details of how the Country code affects Customer and Vendor

coding.

Countries

1. Country............. 1

2. Description......... U.S.A. & CANADA

3. Usage Status........ A

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Countries screen



STATE/PROVINCE

This table is used to enter the list of States (USA) or Provinces (Canada) in which the company operates.

It allows you to identify the State or Province of each Vendor and Customer account.

You must set up your Country table prior to setting up the State codes.

State/Province

1. Country............. 001

2. State/Province...... IL

3. Description......... ILLINOIS


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

State/Province screen

Field Name Default Validation Description

Country Country

reference

Enter the Country code corresponding to the State.

State/Province Enter the State (USA) or Province (Canada) code.

Description Enter the State or Province name.



BRANCHES

eSTELPLAN is designed for multi-branch operations throughout all applications.

In a multi-branch company environment, each transaction is identified by the Branch handling it.

In a single Branch company, the multi-Branch functions are not required. Only one Branch would be set

up. All transactions and, therefore, all journals and status reports would be automatically sequenced by

that Branch. The flexibility exists, however, to add Branches at any time.

The development of Branch coding can be affected by the way you want to set up General Ledger

Accounts. This is why we recommend you review the information on General Ledger coding before

establishing Branch codes. General Ledger functions are not reported by Branch. However, since the

Branch is an element in the General Ledger Account number, financial statements can be produced by

Branch using the PC-Interface feature.

Branches are physical locations where the company’s business activities are performed. These activities

can include any or all parts of the eSTELPLAN application functions.

Order Entry, Sales, Purchasing and Accounts Receivable functions are all controlled at the Branch level.

For example, in cross-Branch transactions (such as Inventory Transfers or Sales Orders that are shipped

from one Branch to another Branch’s customer) the ‘Selling Branch’ is defaulted from the User ID (and

can be overridden). In addition, a ‘Shipping Branch’ can be entered to control the Work Order or

Transfer Order Form Printing.

However, there are restrictions by Branch on various applications. Each User ID is assigned a Branch

code. This code is defaulted in all transactions created by that User.

If a user's access is restricted to one specific Branch, the user cannot, for example, invoice orders or

process material belonging to another Branch.

If a user has access to another Branch or to all Branches, he can then log on to another Branch and invoice

material for that specific Branch, or view transactions or status information for another Branch or all

Branches.

eSTELoemtoll Requirements

If you are planning to use the eSTELoemtoll product, you must create a separate Branch code for each

Branch at which you will be doing toll processing. The additional Branch codes are used for reporting

purposes to differentiate between eSTELoemtoll and eSTELPLAN transaction activity.



Branches

Accessing By Branch

1. Branch.............. CHI

2. Region.............. 4

3. Branch Sequence No.. 100

4. Name................ eSTELPLAN CHICAGO

5. Address - Line 1.... 100 INDUSTRIAL BLVD

6. Address - Line 2....


8. City................ CHICAGO, IL

9. Postal/Zip Code..... 60609

10. Fax Number..........

11. Country............. 1

12. Telephone Number....

13. Login I.D........... magda

14. Remit-To Address....


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Branches screen


Branch A physical location at which the company

operates. It is used to identify and sort all

operational transactions, products, customers,

vendors, and financial transactions, by location

where the activity takes place.

Region Region

table

Used to combine a number of Branches for

reporting purposes.

Branch Sequence No. A number given to a Branch to help sort the

Branches by Region. The Branch Sequence number

must be unique within a Region.

Name Branch Name.

Address - Line 1 First line of Address information.

Address - Line 2 Second line of Address information.

Address - Line 3 Third line of Address information.

City Postal City of the Branch.

Postal/Zip Code Postal/Zip code of Branch.

Fax Number Branch Fax number.

The generally accepted format for North America

is:

AAASLLL-LLLL

Legend Representation

AAA Area Code

S Single space

LLL-LLLL Local portion of the Fax Number

Example: 450 555-1234




Country Branch Country.

Telephone Number Branch telephone number.

Login I.D. User

Information

table

Used to provide a Prose Controller destination

for logs and reports generated by certain

eSTELPLAN applications. For example, the

Transfer Order Session Log is sent to the Prose

Controller of the Login I.D. associated with the

Destination Branch.

Remit-To Address A number used to identify Alternate Company Names

and Addresses. It is used for specific forms

printing functions where the standard eSTELPLAN

Company Name stored in the eSTELPLAN Company

table and/or the Branch table cannot be used.

Usage Status A, D, I Used to indicate the status of the record.

Valid codes are:

A Active

D Delete

I Inactive



PRINTER TYPES

This table is used to define the characteristics of the printers that are going to be used on your

eSTELPLAN system for special printing requirements such as Inventory and Shipping Tag printing.

In the current revision, the following Printer Types are supported:

DG6425 – Data General 6425

FUJ – Fujitsu 5800 or equivalent

LASERFRM – Used with eSTELfax

ML395 – Okidata ML395 or equivalent. Required if using an Okidata printer to print

barcoded forms

RJS – RJS Thermabar

ZEBTAG – Zebra Tag Printer

ZEBMULT – Zebra Mult Tag Printer

ZEB160S – Used with the Zebra 160S Tag Printer for correct alignment

Printer type

1. Printer Type........ FUJ

2. Description......... Fujitsu Printer


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Printer Types



Tag Printer Types

The table identifies the valid Printer Type codes that can be used when printing tags in eSTELPLAN.

Required

Printer

Types

Standard Tag (5 ½” X 10 3/8”) Small Labels

AIAG

Tag

Shipping

Tag

Inventory

Tag

Buildup

Tag

Mult

Tag

Product

Label

Job

Label

ZEBTAG Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No

ZEB160S Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No

FUJ Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No

FUJ64000 Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No

RJS Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No

ZEBMULT No No No No Yes Yes Yes



PRINTERS

The Printers established in this table are used as defaults in different printing applications.

The Printer Type, which is used to define the characteristics of the printer for special printing

requirements such as Inventory and Shipping Tag printing, must have already been created in the Printer

Type table.

Printers

1. Branch.............. PHI

2. Printer............. LP0

3. Description......... DEFAULT PRINTER – INC

4. Printer type........ FUJ


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Printers screen



BRANCH OPTIONS

The Branch Options table is used to record Warehouse and Printer defaults by Branch. For each record in

the Branch Options table, a corresponding Branch record must exit.

Branch Options

1. Branch.............. CHI

Warehouse Defaults Printer Defaults

2. G/L Branch.......... CHI 12. System Printer...... CLP2

3. Pricing Branch...... PHI 13. Quotation Prtr...... CLP2

4. Invt Receipt Whs.... CPR 14. Acknowledgement Prtr CLP2

5. Allocation Whs...... CPR 15. Sales Order Prtr.... CLP2

6. Shipping Whs........ CFS 16. Work Order Prtr..... CLP2

7. Ret-to-Stock Whs.... CRT 17. Prod. Wrk Order Prtr CLP2

8. Reject Whs.......... CRJ 18. Shipping Order Prtr. CLP2

9. Work in Process Whs. CPR 19. Credit Log Printer.. CLP2

10. Storage Whs......... CCP 20. Purchase Order Prtr. CLP2

11. Processing Whs...... CCP 21. Production Prtr..... CLP2

22. B/L Loading Prtr.... CLP2

23. Cntr Receipt Prtr... CLP2

24. Pick List Prtr...... CLP2

25. Mult Tag Format..... S


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Branch Options screen


Branch Branch

Reference

A physical location at which the company operates.

It is used to identify and sort all operational

transactions, products, customers, vendors, and

financial transactions, by location where the

activity takes place.

G/L Branch Branch

Reference

The General Ledger Branch number that is related

to an eSTELPLAN Branch. It is used in the General

Ledger system as part of the General Ledger

Account number. Permits the use of up to three

alphabetic characters for the Branch but use only

one or more numeric digits to represent the Branch

in the General Ledger posting accounts for user

entry and reporting convenience.

The field cannot be blank and cannot be changed

once it is set up.

Pricing Branch Used for collecting several Branches under a

common pricing method without having to set up

multiple copies of pricing information.

Invt Receipt Whs The default destination warehouse used in Purchase

Order Entry and Inventory Receipts. Cannot be a

C-Customer-Owned Warehouse.




Allocation Whs Printer

reference

The default Warehouse for the Branch used in Sales

Order and eSTELprice/eSTELquote entry to allocate

material from stock. This warehouse can be

overridden on the Inventory Allocation page.

Cannot be a C-Customer-Owned Warehouse.

Shipping Whs Printer

reference

Used to default the Production Item Warehouse when

a Shipping Tag is created. It must be a valid

Warehouse for the Branch. Cannot be a C-Customer-

Owned Warehouse.

Ret-to-Stock Whs Warehouse

reference


a Return-to-Stock Tag is created. It must be a

valid Warehouse for the Branch. Cannot be a C-

Customer-Owned Warehouse.

Reject Whs Warehouse

reference


a Reject Tag is created. It must be a valid

Warehouse for the Branch. Cannot be a C-Customer-

Owned Warehouse.

Work in Process Whs Warehouse

reference


a Work-In-Process Tag is created. It must be a

valid Warehouse for the Branch. Cannot be a C-

Customer-Owned Warehouse.

Storage Whs Warehouse

reference

Used to identify a default Warehouse used for

Storage. This Warehouse must be a C-Customer-

Owned material warehouse.

Processing Whs Warehouse

reference

Used to identify a default warehouse used for

Processing. The Processing Warehouse must be a

Customer-Owned material warehouse.

System Printer Printer

reference

The default printer used when printing regular

reports for the Branch.

Quotation Prtr Printer

reference

The default printer used when printing quotations

from the Quote Entry program.

Acknowledgement Prtr Printer

reference

The default printer used when printing Sales

Acknowledgements from the Order Entry program.

Sales Order Prtr Printer

reference

The default printer used when printing Sales

Orders from the Order Entry program.

Work Order Prtr Printer

reference

The default printer used when printing Work Orders

from the Order Entry program.

Prod Wrk Order Prtr Printer

reference

The default Production Work Order printer.

Shipping Order Prtr Printer

reference

The default printer used when printing Shipping

Orders from the Order Entry program.

Credit Log Printer Printer

reference

The printer used for the automatic printing of

Credit hold Logs generated by the Work Order

printing and Credit Verification procedures when

automatic credit checking is performed.

Purchase Order Prtr Printer

reference

The default printer used when printing Purchase

Orders from the Purchase Order Entry program.

Production Prtr Printer

reference

The default printer used when printing eSTELpro

and eSTELman Production Work Orders from the

eSTELpro/eSTELman Entry programs.




B/L Loading Prtr Printer

reference

This is the default dot matrix printer used for

printing the Work Tag. The Work Tag is a form

used to initiate the production and staging of

material for customer pick-up or delivery. It is

printed from the Sales/Transfer Order Entry and

Credit Release functions.

NOTE: This printer is NOT used for printing the

BL Loading form.

Cntr Receipt Prtr Printer

reference

Enter a valid printer to be used for the printing

of the Counter Receipt Form. Only used for the

Counter Sales procedures.

Pick List Prtr Printer

reference

Enter a valid printer to be used for the printing

of the Pick Tickets. Only used for the Counter

Sales procedures.

Mult Tag A, S Controls which Mult Tag format is printed.

Options are:

A Format A

S Standard (Default)

Refer to the eSTELbarcodes manual for details.


Valid codes are:

A Active

D Delete

I Inactive



External Certificate Printer (scablp)

The External Certificate Printer links a Postscript Image Printer to a Bill of Lading Printer. The BL Form

printing function automatically prints Mill Test Certificate Images on the specified Postscript Image

Printer (PTC=X Product Installation Option).

Printers

1. Branch.............. PHI

2. Printer............. LP5

3. Extl Test Cert Printer IPS4N2E


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

External Certificate Printer screen


Branch Branch

reference

Enter the Branch code.

Printer Printer

reference

Enter a valid printer that is used for printing

Bills of Lading.

Extl Test Cert Printer Printer

reference

Enter a valid Postscript printer.

Usage Status A A, D, I Usage Status.

NOTE: An External Certificate Printer record must be defined for every printer that is used to print

Bills of Lading.



ACCOUNT CLASS

This function creates the Account Class records used to set up the basic General Ledger Accounts.

The Account Class is a user-defined code used to establish various account classifications for General

Ledger Accounts in the Chart of Accounts. The information is used for financial reporting purposes only.

At least one code must be established.

Account Class

1. Account Class....... CA

2. Description......... CURRENT ASSET


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Rename 3-Change

Account Class screen



COST CENTER TYPES

The Cost Center Type code must be defined before the Cost Centers to tie the General Ledger Account

with the elements of expense. The codes and descriptions are then used for validation on entry of the

Cost Center.

If the Cost Center Origin is eSTELPLAN defined, you can use, as a Cost Center Type, any of the

predefined eSTELPLAN Reference Information from the various modules. For example:

BRH (Branch)

BYR (Buyer)

If the Cost Center Origin is User-defined, enter your own code. For example:

TRK (Truck)

FA (Fixed Assets)

Cost Center Types

1. Cost Center Type.... PWC

2. Cost Center Origin.. S

3. Description......... PROCESSING WORK CENTER


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Cost Center Types screen


Cost Center Type A code used to link a General Ledger account to

its elements of expense, called the Cost Centers.

Cost Center Origin S, U Used to indicate if the Cost Center Type is

eSTELPLAN-defined (S) or if the Cost Center Type

is user-defined (U). The Cost Center Origin

cannot be changed once a Cost Center Type is

defined.

Description The Cost Center Type description.





Valid codes are:

A Active

D Delete

I Inactive



COST CENTERS

The Cost Centers are the elements of expense included in a General Ledger Account. If a Cost Center

Type code has a User-defined Cost Center Origin, you must set up the Cost Center codes.

Cost Centers

1. Cost Center Type.... TRK

2. Cost Center......... 1-90-3075

3. Description......... 1990 MACK - 40' LOADS

4. Branch.............. CHI


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Cost Centers screen


Cost Center Type Cost

Center

Type

reference

A code used to link a General Ledger account to


Cost Center Represents an element of the General Ledger

expense.

The Cost Center allows for miscellaneous expenses

to be reviewed at a detailed level. These

detailed distributions, made at the time a

transaction is entered, are recorded in the Cost

Center for further inquiries and/or reporting

purposes.

If the Cost Center Type is eSTELPLAN-defined, the

Cost Centers automatically default to the data

entered in the eSTELPLAN Reference information.

If the Cost Center Origin is user-defined, the

Cost Centers must be entered.

Description Cost Center description.




Branch Branch

reference

Branch associated with the Cost Center. This

field cannot be modified once one of the following

applications is set to live:

eSTEL/GL Company

Accounts Receivable Company

Accounts Payable Company


Valid codes are:

A Active

D Delete

I Inactive

NOTE: A string of three asterisks is used in the Branch field to indicate that the Cost Center can be

used for all branches.



BASIC GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNTS

This function is used to create the basic General Ledger account numbers to be used for the company.

The codes and descriptions are used for validation on entry of the General Ledger distributions.

You must already have defined the Chart of Accounts structure so that it takes into account all of your

reporting requirements.

Basic G/L account

1. Basic G/L Account... 1720

2. Description......... FURNITURE & FIXTURES

3. Account Type........ A

4. Account Class....... FA

5. Normal Debit/Credit. D

6. Branch Required..... N

7. Cost Center Type.... FA


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Basic General Ledger Accounts screen


Basic G/L Account The basic GL number which identifies an account.

The function validates the account number entered

to ensure that it is unique.

The accounts are used to represent the financial

totals of transactions to the General Ledger via

the General Ledger Interface.

The Basic GL Account code should not include

special characters such as *, -, “, and / since

they may interfere with template inquiry functions

and third party reporting tools.

Description GL Account description.

Account Type A, E, L,

Q, R

Used to identify the type of General Ledger

Account for sequencing of the Trial Balance and

for use in Financial reporting.

Valid Types are:

A Asset

E Expense

L Liability




Q Equity

R Revenue

If the Account Type field is A (Asset) or E

(Expense), the Normal Debit/Credit field defaults

to D (Debit) but can be overridden.

If the Account Type field is L (Liability), R

(Revenue) or Q (Equity), the Normal Debit/Credit

field defaults to C (Credit) but can be

overridden.

This field cannot be changed once one of the

following applications is set to live:

eSTEL/GL Company



Account Class Account

Class

reference

Used to classify a General Ledger Account for

financial reporting purposes. It is used as a

selection criterion in the GL Extract functions.

Normal Debit/Credit C C,D Determines the default entry in any program that

provides for General Ledger distributions. If the

account is a ‘Normal Debit’, the posting screen

defaults to the Debit side when the account is

entered. If the account is a ‘Normal Credit’, the

default is the Credit side.

D Normal Debit

C Normal Credit

Branch Required N, Y Option provided for all financial transactions

relating to accounting at a Branch level. If

Branch Required = Y, then all transactions that

are generated for the account will either require

a Branch number to be entered or will

automatically append a Branch code based on the

Branch of the originating transaction.


following applications is set to live:

eSTEL/GL Company



Cost Center Type Cost

Center

Type

reference

A code used to link a General Ledger account to


Usage Status A, I, D Indicates the status of the record.

Valid codes are:

A Active

D Delete

I Inactive



GENERAL COMPANY INFORMATION

The information contained in this table is used in many eSTELPLAN applications to identify the

company Name and Address for reports and forms. It is also used to control the entry and processing of

information.

If your company uses generic forms, your Company Name and Address are printed on Work Order

Forms, Invoices, Purchase Orders, Bills of Lading and Customer Statements.

NOTE: The data in the Name and Address fields does not have to be left justified. It can be centered

for printing on generic forms. To include the telephone number on the generic forms, it must

be entered on an address line.

General Company Information

1. Key Code............ CSC

2. Name................ eSTELPLAN

3. Address - Line 1.... 114 EAST ORCHARD DRIVE



6. City................ PHILADELPHIA, PA.


8. Fax Number.......... 215-356-4320

9. Country............. 1

10. Telephone Number.... 215-325-0301

11. Init Load G/L Acct.. 1900

12. Date Format......... MDY

13. Nbr of Accntg Per... 12

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

General Company Information screen


Key Code CSC CSC CSC is the default General Company code.

Name Full name of the company.

Address - Line 1 First Address line for the Company.

Address - Line 2 Second Address line for the Company.

Address - Line 3 Third Address line for the Company.

City City of the Company.

Postal/Zip Code Postal code of the Company.

Fax Number Fax number for the Company.

Country Country

reference

Country of the Company.




Telephone Number The telephone number of the Company.

Init Load G/L Acct GL

Accounts

Used in Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable

Initial Loading to balance the GL entry.

NOTE: This field can only be changed prior to

live start-up as it is used in on-line

update procedures and may have transactions

in process.

Date Format YMD, MDY

or DMY

Identifies the method of date entry selected for

the installation. The available options are:

YMD

MDY

DMY

Nbr of Accntg Per 12, 13 Used in General Ledger to control the number of

periods eligible for transaction posting. You can

enter 12 or 13 only. This field cannot be changed

once entered.



FISCAL CALENDAR

The Fiscal Calendar reflects the accounting periods under which your company operates. It enables the

segregation of financial transactions under the appropriate periods, thus maintaining a correct flow of

transactions to the General Ledger.

Each module has its own current accounting period control. As an example, Billing and Cash Receipts

functions are typically closed off at the end of each period, while Accounts Payable may be kept open a

week longer to record all supplier invoices for the previous month.

The Fiscal Calendar does not necessarily correspond to the calendar year. For example, a company with a

Fiscal End of Year of September 30 defines Accounting Period 01 to be from October 1 to October 31.

Depending on the policy of the company, the Fiscal Year may include 12 or 13 Accounting Periods. All

accounting periods for a specific Fiscal Year must be defined at the same time, beginning with the first

one. In addition, we strongly advise you to set up the accounting periods for the subsequent year, so that

the current end of year procedures do not halt abnormally.

Proper installation of the Fiscal Calendar ensures accurate end of month closings and recording of

invoices and payments in their proper Accounting Period.

NOTE: The General Company information must be established before the Fiscal Calendar can be

input.

Fiscal Calendar

1. Accounting Period... 0201

2. Beginning Date...... 01/01/02

3. Ending Date......... 01/31/02

4. Number of Weeks..... 4

5. Month Code.......... JAN

6. Quarter Number...... 1

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Fiscal Calendar screen


Accounting Period Used to divide the Fiscal Year in twelve or

thirteen Accounting Periods depending on the




policy of the company. Each module has its own

current accounting period control. (For more

details, see the Fiscal Calendar section of this

manual).

Beginning Date The first calendar day of an Accounting Period.

Ending Date The first calendar day of an Accounting Period.

Number of Weeks 4, 5 Number of weeks in the period. This field cannot

be changed once one of the following applications

is set to live:

eSTEL/GL Company



Month Code An abbreviation representing the closest calendar

month that corresponds to the Accounting Period.

If you have a 12 period Fiscal Year, use the

standard month abbreviation:

January Jan

February Feb

March Mar

April Apr

May May

June Jun

July Jul

August Aug

September Sep

October Oct

November Nov

December Dec

If you have a 13 period Fiscal Year, you need to

create an abbreviation that best corresponds to

your Fiscal year dates. The information is used

in various eSTELPLAN functions.

Quarter Number Used to indicate if the Accounting Period is in

the first, second, third or fourth quarter of the

Fiscal Year. The field cannot be changed once the

application is live.

This is used for various weighted calculations in

GL Budget Maintenance. This field cannot be

changed once one of the following applications is

set to live:

eSTEL/GL Company





BUSINESS CALENDAR

The Business Calendar table identifies the actual calendar dates in a Fiscal Accounting Period that are

working days. This table is used by Invoice Update to record sales by Business Day.

This Calendar is used to update the Business Day field in the Accounts Receivable Company table. With

the successful completion of the End of Day procedure, the Business Day in the Accounts Receivable

Company table is rolled forward until the last day in the Business Calendar is reached. In order to reset

the Business Day to 1, End of Month must be run.

The Calendar can be created in one of two ways:

Manually using this maintenance program or

Automatically by the End of Month utility.

In the automatic generation of the Business Calendar table, holidays and weekends are excluded from the

calendar, based on the Holiday table and the internal system calendar.

You can manually add any date to the calendar table if you want to use it as a Business day.

Business Calendar

1. Accounting Period... 0209

2. Business Day 1...... 09/01/02 3. Business Day 2...... 09/02/02




10. Business Day 9...... 09/14/02 11. Business Day 10..... 09/15/02

12. Business Day 11..... 09/16/02 13. Business Day 12..... 09/17/02





22. Business Day 21..... 09/30/02 23. Business Day 22.....

24. Business Day 23..... 25. Business Day 24.....




32. Business Day 31..... Number of Bus. Days. 21


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Business Calendar screen



BOOKINGS CALENDAR

The Bookings Calendar table identifies the actual calendar dates in a month that are working days. This

Calendar is used in the End of Day and End of Month utilities to set the Calendar Day in the Accounts

Receivable Company table. Bookings statistics are kept based on this calendar table.

This table can be created in one of two ways:

Manually using this maintenance program or

Automatically by the End of Day or End of Month utilities.

When the last day of the Bookings Calendar is reached, the End of Day procedure automatically builds

the Bookings Calendar and sets the Calendar Day to 1 in the Accounts Receivable Company table.

In the automatic generation of the Bookings Calendar table, holidays and weekends are excluded from the

calendar, based on the Holiday schedule and the internal system calendar.

You can manually add any date to the Bookings calendar if you want to use it as a Booking day.

Bookings Calendar

1. Booking Period...... 0207

2. Bookings Day 1...... 07/01/02 3. Bookings Day 2...... 07/02/02




10. Bookings Day 9...... 07/13/02 11. Bookings Day 10..... 07/14/02

12. Bookings Day 11..... 07/15/02 13. Bookings Day 12..... 07/16/02






24. Bookings Day 23..... 25. Bookings Day 24.....




32. Bookings Day 31..... Number of Bkgs. Days 22


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Bookings Calendar screen



HOLIDAY SCHEDULE

This table is used to identify company-wide holidays. Only holidays that are recognized by all branches

are established. It is not necessary to enter weekends as holidays.

The Holiday schedule is used by the End of Day and End of Month utilities to build the Business and

Bookings calendars.

Holidays

1. Holiday Date........ 12/25/02

2. Description......... CHRISTMAS DAY


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Holiday Table screen



GENERAL LEDGER COMPANY INFORMATION

The information contained in the General Ledger Company table serves to coordinate activities in the

General Ledger function, and to process information for certain reports. It includes certain calculation

constants and interfacing information within the General Ledger system such as the Accounting Periods

and General Ledger Account numbers used in the period-end and year-end closing procedures.

The Last Closed Period represents the last period that was permanently closed. The Current General

Ledger Period cannot be less than or equal to the Last Closed Period.

Both the Retained Earnings Account and the Profit and Loss General Ledger Account must be Account

Type ‘Q’ (Equity). In addition, both accounts must have different General Ledger account numbers.

The GL Account Mask field is for future implementation.

G/L Company Information

1. Key Code............ CGL

2. Last Closed Period.. 0112

3. Current G/L Period.. 0210

4. Ret Earn G/L Acct... 3030

5. Pft & Loss G/L Acct. 3050

6. G/L Account Mask.... 11111111

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

GL Company Information screen


Key Code CGL CGL Key code for the GL Company Information.

Last Closed Period The last Accounting Period that was permanently

closed in the General Ledger system. This field

cannot be changed once one of the following

applications is live:

eSTELPLAN Company

GL Company




Current G/L Period Refers to the current period for which entries are

being posted in the General Ledger system. The

field controls the Accounting Period under which

financial transactions occurring in the General

Ledger system are recorded in the General Ledger.

The period entered must be pre-defined in the

Fiscal Calendar table and must be greater than the

last closed GL period.


following applications is live:

eSTELPLAN Company

GL Company

Ret Earn G/L Acct The account used for the net accumulation of

income less losses after taking into account

dividends and other amounts that may properly be

charged or credited thereto.



eSTELPLAN Company

GL Company

Pft & Loss G/L Acct Used in General Ledger Company to define the Basic

General Ledger Account number used in the end of

period closing function to balance the Revenue and

Expense accounts to permit printing of the Trial

Balance. It is a system-controlled account. It

is not available for Journal Entry posting.



eSTELPLAN Company

GL Company

G/L Account Mask For future implementation.



ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE COMPANY

This table contains information used to update the General Ledger accounts with Accounts Receivable

transactions affecting Customer balances. It also provides control over the Automatic Credit Verification

functions.

Field Modifications

The following fields can only be changed prior to live startup as they are used in on-line update

procedures and may have transactions in process.

Current AR Period

AR Control GL Account


1. Key Code............ CAR

2. Current A/R Period.. 0208

3. Bank................ 1

4. Lte Chg Reqd........ Y

Lte Chg Grace....... 10

Lte Chg Rate........ 18.00

Lte Chg Minimum..... 10

5. A/R Ctrl G/L Acct... 1050

6. Cash Disc G/L Acct.. 9410

7. Lte Chg G/L Acct.... 9400

8. Bad Debts G/L Acct.. 9450

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Accounts Receivable Company – first screen




1. Key Code............ CAR

9. Month-End Date...... 08/31/02

10. Business Day........ 1

11. Calendar Day........ 1

12. Max Credit Limit....

13. Cr Lim Password.....

14. Auto Credit Hold.... Y

Auto Credit Lim %...

Auto Credit Hold Dy.

Auto Bal Agng Lim...

15. Avg Pmt Day Wgtg.... Y

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Accounts Receivable Company – second screen


Key Code CAR CAR CAR is the key code for the Accounts Receivable

Company.

Current A/R Period Indicates the General Ledger Period to which

Accounts Receivable, Inventory and Invoicing

transactions will be posted until the End of Month

closing procedures are performed.

The Current AR Period is entered only at initial

setup time. Afterwards, it is automatically

updated by the End of Month procedures.

Bank Banks

reference

The Bank used in Accounts Receivable transactions.

It defaults from the Bank entered in the AR

Company Information. It can be overridden.

Lte Chg Reqd

N N, Y Used to indicate that the late Charge calculation

functions will be used.

Lte Chg Grace Number of days granted for the grace period and

used in the calculation of Late Charges on overdue

Customer Accounts.

Lte Chg Rate

In the Accounts Receivable Company table, it is

the company-wide rate of interest used for late

charges calculations on the Customer overdue

accounts.

Lte Chg Minimum Minimum amount charged to customers with overdue

accounts when interest is charged on overdue

accounts.

A/R Ctrl G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Control account in which a company registers the

value of merchandise or services rendered on

account to customers. This account is mandatory

in the General Ledger Chart of Accounts.




Cash Disc G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

The account used in Cash Receipts posting when

Cash Discounts are given to Customers.

Lte Chg G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Used to register the miscellaneous revenue from

the interest charged on overdue customer accounts.

Used for automatic write-off of uncollected late

charge amounts, which are offset against this same

account.

Bad Debts G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Used for automatic write-off of AR Open Items.

Month-End Date The calendar day on which the Accounting Period

ends. This is used in various calculations (for

example in the calculation of the late payment

charges and average payment days) where the number

of days in the current month is required.

Business Day Identifies the current business day (1 - 31) for

Sales Analysis transaction update purposes.

Calendar Day Based on the booking calendar, the day that a

sales order addition, change or deletion is

booked.

Max Credit Limit Used to specify the company-wide maximum credit

limit that can be assigned without special

authorization or Credit Password. No customer may

have a credit limit > than the Company Credit

Limit.

If customer Credit Limit is to be charged to an

amount greater than the Maximum Credit Limit, you

must enter the Credit Limit Password in order for

it to be accepted.

Cr Lim Password Password needed before you can set a higher Credit

Limit than the company-wide Credit Limit for

specific customers.

Auto Credit Hold N N, Y Indicates whether Automatic Credit Hold features

of eSTELPLAN are to be used. Orders on Credit

Hold must be reviewed by the Credit Manager (or

any other Credit Authority) who has the ability to

release a Held Order.

Valid options are:

N No

Y Yes

Once set, this code cannot be changed.

Auto Credit Lim % Percentage added to a Customer’s Credit Limit

before an order is rejected because his Exposure

exceeds his Credit Limit. To be used with the

Automatic Credit Hold.

Auto Credit Hold Dy The number of days since the Credit Limit Date was

last changed.

Auto Bal Agng Lim Used to indicate the number of days (on average) a

customer balance is overdue.

Avg Pmt Day Wgtg N N, Y Used to indicate if the average number of days an

individual Customer takes to pay invoices in full

(taking into consideration any partial payments

the customer made before the full payment of the

invoice) must be weighted out.



eSTELPLAN COMPANY

The eSTELPLAN Company table contains General Ledger accounts and other control information used

throughout eSTELPLAN applications.

Inventory General Ledger Accounts are required to account for the financial totals of Inventory

transactions. They offer maximum flexibility in determining how various Inventory transactions are

posted to the General Ledger.

Accounts need not be unique to each field name, but most installations have found the detailed

breakdown helpful to reconcile transactions at the end of month closing.

For the Unpaid Account fields, you can enter General Ledger Account numbers that are Branch Required.

The control fields on the second page control updates to optional eSTELPLAN analysis tables.

eSTELPLAN Company Maintenance

1. Key Code............ CSP

-----G/L Accounts-----

2. Invt Ctrl G/L Acct.. 1200

Non-Steel Purchases. 1202

3. Invt In-Trn G/L Acct 1210

4. Misc Rcpt G/L Acct.. 5950

5. Unap Ret G/L Acct... 2060

6. Phy Inv Adj G/L Acct 5940

7. Markup G/L Control.. 5940

8. Unpd Mat G/L Acct... 2010

Unpd Frt G/L Acct... 2020

Unpd Prs G/L Acct... 2030

Unpd Oth G/L Acct... 2040

Unpd Non-Stl Purch.. 2070

Pur Gn/Loss G/L Acct 5945

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

eSTELPLAN Company – first screen




1. Key Code............ CSP

9. Tfm Mat Cst G/L Acct 5920

Tfm Frt Cst G/L Acct 5921

Tfm Prs Cst G/L Acct 5922

Tfm Oth Cst G/L Acct 5923

10. Tfr Mat Cst G/L Acct 5910

Tfr Frt Cst G/L Acct 5911

Tfr Prs Cst G/L Acct 5912

Tfr Oth Cst G/L Acct 5913

11. Invt Wof G/L Acct... 5935

12. Sls Analysis Reqd... Y

13. Pur Analysis Reqd... Y

14. Usg Analysis Reqd... Y

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

eSTELPLAN Company – second screen


1. Key Code............ CSP

-----Invoicing-----

15. Invoice Date Type... S

16. Admin Cost Reqd..... N

17. Admin Cost..........

18. Admin Cost U/M......

19. Invt Costing Opt.... S

20. Backorder Allowed... Y

21. Invt Mgmt Whs Types. D F O P

--File Cleanup Options--

22. Minimum Weight...... 10

23. Minimum Length...... 9

24. Minimum Area........ 250

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

eSTELPLAN Company – third screen




Key Code CSP CSP 3-character key codes. Must be CSP.

Invt Ctrl G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

The company perpetual inventory General Ledger

account updated by all inventory transactions, to

maintain the balance between the inventory

subledger (shown as the total value of inventory

on the Stock Status report) and the General Ledger

control account.

Any Purchase, Adjustment, Receipt or Sale is

recorded as a transaction against the Inventory

Control Account.

The Inventory Control Account is always in balance

with the total value of Stock on Hand shown on the

Stock Status report. It is an ASSET account.

NOTE: The Inventory Control GL Account can only

be changed prior to live startup of

eSTELPLAN as it is used in on-line update

procedures and may have transactions in

process.

Non-Steel Purchases GL

Accounts

reference

Used for Receiver update. This account is

debited.

Invt In-Trn G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Used by the Inter-Branch Delayed Transfer

functions to record the total Value of material

shipped from the originating Branch or Warehouse

but still in-transit to the Destination Branch or

Warehouse, or not detailed as to exact Dimension

or Tag Number and therefore still only an

estimated value.

It is an ASSET account, which is added to the

Inventory Control Account to give the total value

of inventory.

NOTE: The Inventory In-Transit GL Account can

only be changed prior to live start-up of

eSTELPLAN as it is used in on-line update

procedures and may have transactions in

process.

Misc Rcpt G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Account used for Type M (miscellaneous) receipts

to record the net increase in Inventory Value.

The account is also used at the time of

installation, when you use Type M (miscellaneous)

receipts to load your initial receipts into

inventory. It is an EXPENSE account.

Unap Ret G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Used by the Inventory Receipts program to record

the net increase in Inventory Value for return

transactions (the credit side of customer

returns). Later on, the transaction is debited

through credit note procedure. It is a LIABILITY

account.

Phy Inv Adj G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Account used in Physical Inventory Update to

record the net difference, i.e. additions to or

write-off of, in Inventory Value where the

physical inventory value counted is different from

the previous perpetual value on the books. It is

an EXPENSE account.

Markup G/L Control GL

Accounts

reference

This is the default GL Account used to record the

value added to inventory at the time of receipt in

order to adjust the inventory cost up to

compensate for fluctuations in average costing.




Unpd Mat G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Account used in Inventory Receipts, Purchase Cost

Adjustment, Invoice Update and eSTEL/AP Voucher

Entry to capture the value of the material

received, pending receipt of the actual material

invoice. The account is subsequently offset

debited) by the Accounts Payable system when the

voucher for the invoice is entered.

It is a LIABILITY account because it contains the

value of inventory that has not yet been paid for.

This field can only be changed prior to live

startup of eSTELPLAN.

Unpd Frt G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Account used to capture the value of freight

charges on material received, pending receipt of

the actual freight bill. It is a LIABILITY

account.

The Unpaid Freight GL Account can only be changed

prior to live startup of eSTELPLAN.

Unpd Prs G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Account used to capture the value of outside

processing charges for material received, pending

receipt of the actual processing bill. It is a

LIABILITY account.

The Unpaid Processing GL Account can only be

changed prior to live startup of eSTELPLAN.

Unpd Oth G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Account used to capture the value of any

miscellaneous charges on material received,

pending receipt of the actual bills. It is a

LIABILITY account.

The Unpaid Other GL Account can only be changed

prior to live startup of eSTELPLAN.

Unpd Non-Stl Purch. GL

Accounts

reference

Account used to capture the value of any non-Steel

Purchases pending receipt of the Vendor’s

Invoices. It is a LIABILITY account.

Pur Gn/Loss G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

The account is used in the Inventory Cost

Reconciliation Automatic Reconciliation and On-

Line Reconciliation functions to record the amount

written off for unmatched transactions. It is an

EXPENSE account.

Tfm Mat Cst G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Account used to record the net difference in

Inventory Value for the specific transaction, i.e.

the additional material costs added to the

inventory during Inventory Processing. It is an

EXPENSE account.

Tfm Frt Cst G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

The Account used to record the net difference in

Inventory Value for the specific transaction i.e.

the additional freight cost added to the Inventory

during Inventory Processing. It is an EXPENSE

account.

Tfm Prs Cst G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference


Inventory Value for the specific transaction,

i.e., the additional processing costs added to

inventory during Inventory Processing. It is an

EXPENSE account.

Tfm Oth Cst G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference


Inventory Value for the specific transaction,

i.e., the additional miscellaneous (Other) costs

added to inventory during Inventory Processing.

It is an EXPENSE account.




Tfr Mat Cst G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Used by the Inventory Transfer program to record

the net difference in Inventory Value for the

transactions, i.e., the additional material costs

as the material is transferred. It is an ASSET

account. For this Account, the Branch Required

should be set to N-No.

Tfr Frt Cst G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Used by the Inventory Transfer program to record

the net difference in Inventory Value for the

transactions, i.e. to add Freight costs on your

own trucks as the material is transferred. It is

an ASSET account. For this Account, the Branch

Required should be set to N-No.

Tfr Prs Cst G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Account used by the Inventory Transfer program to

record the net difference in Inventory Value for

the transactions, i.e. the additional Processing

costs as the material is transferred. It is an

ASSET account. For this Account, the Branch

Required field should be set to N-No.

Tfr Oth Cst G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Account used by the Inventory Transfer program to

record the net difference in Inventory Value for

the transactions, i.e. the additional

miscellaneous (Other) costs as the material is

transferred. It is an ASSET account. For this

Account, the Branch Required field should be set

to N-No.

Invt Wof G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

An account used in the End of Day Product

Deletions to record the write-off of Inventory

Value due to the deletion.

The Inventory Purge is run automatically during

the End of Month routine to purge the variance

between received cost and paid cost, based on the

preset values in the Company Installation Options.

It is an EXPENSE account.

Sls Analysis Reqd N N, Y Determines if Sales Analysis recording is

required. This field cannot be changed after live


Pur Analysis Reqd N N, Y Determines if Purchase Analysis recording is



Usg Analysis Reqd N N, Y Determines if Usage Analysis recording is



Invoice Date Type S, U Used to indicate which date is used for the

Invoice Date when the transaction is updated.

Valid codes are:

S Shipping Date

U System Date at the time of the Update

Admin Cost Reqd N N, R, A Determines whether to compute and apply an

Administrative overhead Cost to an Invoice.

Valid codes are:

N No

R Percentage Rate of total Cost

V Percentage Rate of total Sales

A Amount/CWT shipped

This field cannot be changed after live startup of

eSTELPLAN.




Admin Cost Administrative Costs are computed for each Order

and Invoice Item based on one of the following

options:

A Percentage of all Other Cost amounts for the

Item

A rate per weight of the Item

All Item Administrative Costs are totaled for the

Order or Invoice. This field cannot be changed

after live startup of eSTELPLAN.

Admin Cost U/M Units of

Measure

reference

Only Weight based or LOT Units of Measure are

allowed in this field. These are the only Units

of Measure that can always be computed regardless

of the ILC codes of the products on an Order.

If the Admin Cost Reqd field is ‘R’ or ‘V’, the

Administrative Cost UM must be LOT.

If the Admin Cost Reqd field is ‘A’, the

Administrative Cost UM must be a valid weight

based UM.

Invt Costing Opt This field is currently not used. Please enter

‘S’. This field cannot be changed after live


Backorder Allowed N N, Y Controls whether partially shipped Orders are left

on the system for subsequent shipments.

Valid codes are:

Y Yes. Backorders are allowed.

N No. Backorders are not allowed.

On an individual Order you can override the code

as required.

Invt Mgmt Whs Types C, D, F,

M, O, P, R

Warehouse Types are used to combine inventory

activity for Standard Dimensions into one product

statistic record per Branch, Accounting Period,

and Standard Dimension for Inventory Requirements

Forecasting purposes.

You can combine any or all Types as required.

However, it is recommended that only those

Warehouse Types in which you keep stock material

for sale are included. (E.g., Customer-Owned

Material should not be included since it is not

owned and not purchased.) Once the Types have

been set up and you start live operations,

statistics are automatically accumulated for these

Types. Therefore, you cannot change the Types

after live operation.

The Warehouse Types are also used in the ABC

calculation program and in the Inventory

Requirements report to combine the appropriate

Inventory, open Orders, open Purchase Orders and

open Transfers for the same Warehouse Types as are

updated in the Product Statistics table.

Each Warehouse Type can only be entered once.

Valid types are:

C Customer-Owned

D Drop

F Finished Goods

M Mill Claims

O Outside Processor

P Prime Material




R Rejected Material

This field cannot be changed after live startup of

eSTELPLAN.

Minimum Weight Used to specify the minimum weight range either +

or - within which the inventory (Quantity on

Hand/Quantity Available) is deleted even though it

is not zero.

NOTE: Quantity is in the base storage Unit of

Measure from the Company Options table.

The default units of measure are LBS/IN/SIN

for Imperial sites and KGS/MM/SCM for

Metric sites.

Minimum Length Used to specify the minimum length range either +

or - within which the inventory (Quantity on


is not zero.

Minimum Area Used to specify the minimum area range either + or

- within which the inventory (Quantity on-


is not zero.



ACCOUNTS PAYABLE COMPANY

This table contains information used to update the General Ledger accounts with Accounts Payable

transactions and provides control over the Reconciliation functions.


1. Key Code............ CAP

2. Current A/P Period.. 0212

3. Bank................ 1

4. A/P Ctrl G/L Acct... 2000

5. Pur Disc G/L Acct... 9420

6. Ppd Exp G/L Acct.... 1450

7. Month-End Date...... 12/31/02

8. Employer ID.........

9. P/O Reconciliation.. Y

10. P/O Recon Type...... %

11. P/O Recon Mat $.....

P/O Recon Frt $.....

P/O Recon Prs $.....

P/O Recon Oth $.....

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Accounts Payable Company – first screen




1. Key Code............ CAP

12. P/O Recon Mat %..... 5.00

P/O Recon Frt %..... 3.00

P/O Recon Prs %..... 5.00

P/O Recon Oth %..... 2.00

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Accounts Payable Company – second screen


Key Code CAP CAP Must be CAP.

Current A/P Period Current Accounts Payable Period.

Bank Banks

reference

Used to identify the different bank accounts your

company uses for various types of funds and their

corresponding GL accounts.

A/P Ctrl G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Used to identify the Accounts Payable Control

Account for interfacing with General Ledger.

The field can only be changed prior to live

startup as the Account is used in on-line update


Pur Disc G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Account used to record earned supplier discounts.

The account may be either REVENUE or Contra

EXPENSE.

Ppd Exp G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Account used to post vouchers for which payment is

due in a future Accounting Period.

The field can only be changed prior to live

startup as the account is used in on-line update


Month-End Date The calendar date on which the Accounting Period

ends. Used in various calculations (for example,

in Accounts Receivable, for the calculation of

Late Payment Charge and Average Payment Days)

where the number of days in the current month is

required.

Used also in End of Month reporting. The date is

entered only once, when the system is installed.

It is then updated each month by the End of Month

function from the date on file in the Fiscal

Calendar.




Employer ID Federal Employer Identification number for 1099

reporting.

P/O Reconciliation N, Y Indicates if the Purchase Order Reconciliation,

option which links Inventory Control and Accounts

Payable) is used or not.

It is used to reconcile the variance amounts

between the Quantity received and posted to

Inventory and the Value paid to the Vendor,

according to the Vendor’s Invoice from the Voucher

Entry in Accounts Payable.

P/O Recon Type $, % Indicates the unit (amount or percentage) of the

variance to be reconciled by the Reconciliation

Update. The Unit must be the same for all types

of costs (Material, Freight, Other, Processing).

Valid codes are:

$ Amount

% Percentage

P/O Recon Mat $ Indicates, for Material Cost, the minimum amount

($) of variance defined by your company to

represent the acceptable difference between the

Quantity received and posted to Inventory and its

Value paid to the Vendor.

P/O Recon Frt $ Indicates, for Freight Cost, the minimum amount





P/O Recon Prs $ Indicates, for Processing Cost, the minimum amount





P/O Recon Oth $ Indicates, for Other Cost, the minimum amount ($)

of variance defined by your company to represent

the acceptable difference between the Quantity

received and posted to Inventory and its Value

paid to the Vendor.

P/O Recon Mat % Indicates, for Material Cost, the minimum % of

variance defined by your company to represent the

acceptable difference between the Quantity


paid to the Vendor.

P/O Recon Frt % Indicates, for Freight Cost, the minimum % of




paid to the Vendor.

P/O Recon Prs % Indicates, for Processing Cost, the minimum % of




paid to the Vendor.

P/O Recon Oth % Indicates, for Other Cost, the minimum % of




paid to the Vendor.



CONTROLLED REFERENCE NUMBERS

Controlled Reference numbers are assigned by the computer in most eSTELPLAN applications. This

table is not accessible from the menu and is established by Invera personnel at the time of installation.

It is included here for information purposes only. Contact Invera if you require further information on

any of the Controlled Reference numbers.

Controlled Reference Numbers

1. Application......... AP

2. Branch.............. PHI

3. Reference Prefix.... VR

4. Control Number...... 2

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Controlled Reference Numbers screen

Reference Prefixes

Used to identify the type of transaction within an Application and/or Source Journal, the Reference Prefix

is always used in conjunction with the Reference Number assigned to the transaction.

Prefixes are unique to the transaction, regardless of the application to which the transaction may appear.

Example: A Credit Note or Invoice Number is assigned in Invoice Update but appears on both the Sales

Journal and the Inventory Transaction Journal.

Application Prefix Transaction

Accounts Receivable (AR) AO Account Offset

CE Cash Receipt Entry in Process

CR Unapplied Credit

CS Cash Receipts Journal

DR Unapplied Debit

WL Late Charge Write-Off

WR Open Item Write-Off

Accounts Payable (AP) CD Cash Disbursement Journal




CM Credit Memo

CR Unapplied Credit

DE Cash Disbursement Entry in Process

DM Debit Memo

DR Unapplied Debit

PG Cost Reconciliation Purge

VR Voucher

Inventory Cost Reconciliation

(IR)

IR Inventory Cost Reconciliation

PG Cost Reconciliation Purge

Vessel (VS) VS Vessel Number

General Ledger (GL) CP Compressed Entry

JE Journal Entry

LG Log

SE Standard Journal Entry

TJ Temporary Transaction Journal Entry Number

Order Processing (OR) BL Bill of Lading

LG Log

OR Order

QT Quote

TO Transfer Order

XO Transfer Activity Report

Purchasing (PO) LG Log

PO Purchase Order

Sales Analysis (SA) LG Log

System Common (SC) LG Log

SP Spool

Invoicing (IV) CN Credit Note

IB Inventory Transfer - Inbound (Reservation Branch)

IE Invoice Entry in Process

IV Invoice

LC Late Charge

LE Late Payment Charge Entry

LG Log

NE Credit Note Entry in Process

OB Inventory Transfer – Outbound (Invoice Branch)

Inventory (IN) AB Build-Up

AE Application Entry

AP Inventory Application

AJ Inventory Adjustment

DL End of Day Product Deletion

IB Inventory Transfer – Inbound (created from Invoicing)

IP Inventory Processing

IT Inventory Transaction Sequence Number

OB Inventory Transfer – Outbound (created from

Invoicing)

PC Purchase Cost Adjustment

PH Physical Inventory Transaction

RC Receiver




RT Return-to-Stock Tag

SP Spool

ST Shipping Tag

TC Test Certificate

TG Receiving Tag (Inventory Tag)

TO Transfer Out of Stocking Branch

WD Write Down

XF Transfer Into Selling Branch

Production ML eSTELmill

PN eSTELpro

MH eSTELman – Reservation

MP eSTELman – Material Process Order

MN eSTELman – Job (Delayed)

PR eSTELman – Job (Immediate)

Costing AE Inventory Applications

CO Cutting Order


MN eSTELman

PN eSTELpro

PR eSTELman – Immediate Job

Inter-Branch (IB) SN Session ID

XF Inter-Branch Transfer Ref (Destination Branch)

XO Inter-Branch Transfer Ref (Shipping Branch)

eSTELtoll (TI/TP) AJ Inventory Adjustment

BL Bill of Lading

DL On-Line Inventory Deletion

HO EDI Inventory Handoff

HR EDI Hold/Release

IE Invoice Entry in Process


RA EDI Reapplication

RC Customer Receipt

RP Processor Receipt

RR Return

RT Branch Transfer

TB EDI Bill of Lading

TC Credit Note

TI Invoice

TN EDI Inventory Processing

TO Toll Order

TR EDI Receipt

TZ EDI Toll Production



Source Journal Codes

A mnemonic representing the accounting journal in which the transaction originated, the Source Journal

Code is used internally to segregate accounting transactions for audit purposes. It may be used as a user

selection for various screens and reports, as can the above Reference Prefix.

Application Source Journal Transaction

Accounts Receivable (AR) CRJ Cash Receipts Journal

RLD Receivable Open Item Loading

SLJ Sales Journal

Accounts Payable (AP) CDJ Cash Disbursement Journal

PLD Payable Open Item Loading

PUJ Purchase Journal

PUR Cost Reconciliation Purge

General Ledger (GL) GJE General Journal Entry

Inventory (IN) ADJ Inventory Adjustment

BLG Billing

DLJ End of Day Product Deletion

FAB eSTELfab Cutting List

ITF Inventory Processing

PCA Purchase Cost Adjustment

PHY Physical Inventory Update

PRO eSTELpro Production

RCT Inventory Receipt

RTG Inventory Retagging

WDN Inventory Write Up/Down

FR Inventory Transfers

eSTELtoll TSJ Toll Sales journal



WAREHOUSES

Warehouses are used to designate stocking or Outside Processing locations to which inventory is sent for

processes such as slitting and leveling.

Warehouse codes can also be established as a logical grouping of different types of material. The valid

types are:

C – Customer-Owned Material

D – Drops/Return-to-Stock

F – Finished Goods

M – Mill Claims

O – Outside Processors

P – Prime Material

R – Reject Material

For each Branch, at least one Warehouse code must exist. However, it is recommended that you establish

one warehouse of each type per Branch. Each Branch can have more than one Warehouse of each type to

provide for a finer differentiation and control of inventory.

All Warehouses related to a specific Branch are grouped under that Branch for report and inquiry

purposes. In addition, all Warehouses of a type are grouped together for such functions as Stock Status

reporting and the Stock Available inquiries.

Warehouses

Accessing By Warehouse

1. Warehouse......... CFS

2. Branch............ CHI

3. Name.............. CHICAGO - FINISHED GOODS

4. Warehouse Type.... F

5. Address – Line 1.. 100 INDUSTRIAL BLVD

Line 2..

Line 3..

6. City.............. CHICAGO, IL

7. Postal/Zip Code... 60609

8. F.O.B............. DESTINATION

9. Customer Number... 2020 TRANSFER WAREHOUSE CFS

10. Usage Status...... A

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Warehouses screen




Warehouse Warehouse

reference

Used either to designate stocking locations for

your company’s inventory or for Processing Service

Centers to which inventory is sent for slitting,

leveling, etc. A Service Center may use several

internal warehouses within one physical location

for Returns, Rejects or Customer-Owned Material.

Branch Branch

reference

A physical location at which the company operates.

It is used to identify and sort all operational

transactions, products, customers, vendors, and

financial transactions, by location where the

activity takes place.

The Branch code cannot be changed once the


Name Identifies the Warehouse Name.

Warehouse Type C, D, F,

M, O, P or

R

Used in Inventory control programs to summarize

and display specific types of warehouses according

to the material kept there.

Valid codes are:

C Customer-Owned Material

D Drops/Returns-to-Stock

F Finished Goods

M Mill Claims

O Outside Processors

P Prime and Stock Material

R Rejected Material

Each Branch can have more than one Warehouse of

each type to achieve a better

differentiation/separation of inventory. However,

all Warehouses of the same type are grouped

together for functions such as checking inventory

availability or showing stock status.

This field cannot be changed once the application

is live.

Address Line 1, 2, 3 Address lines for the Warehouse.

City City of the Warehouse.

Postal/Zip Code Postal/Zip Code of the Warehouse.

F.O.B. Free on board. Used to designate the delivery

point for material purchases. It is displayed in

Purchase Order Entry and is printed on all

Purchase Orders.

Customer Number Customer

reference

Used in Branch transfers to identify the Customer

Number associated with a Branch to default the

customer related information in the Transfer Order

Entry and Shipping functions.



REGIONS

This table is for use with a future product. The Region code is a required field in the Branch table. You

must set up one Region code that will be assigned to each Branch record.

Regions

1. Region.............. PA

2. Description......... PHILADELPHIA


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Regions screen



ELECTRONIC SCALES

The Scale Maintenance reference table defines the electronic scales used within eSTELPLAN

transactions. Each record is identified by the branch and scale interface name.

Scale Maintenance

1. Branch.............. PHI

2. Scale............... PENN5600

3. Description............. Penn. Scale - Model 5600

4. Scale Codes............. 083 078 087 013

5. Least Significant Digit. 08

6. Station ID.............. tty6

7. Usage Status............ A

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Scale Maintenance screen


Branch User

Branch

Branch Ref The Branch where the scale is located.

Scale The name of the scale interface.

Description Description of the interface.

Scale Codes A table of up to 12 ASCII codes. The codes are

sent to the scale to request the weight.

Examples of codes used:

Pennsylvania Model 5600.....: 083 078 087 013

Cardinal Dominator 738......: 005

Mettler-Toledo Model 8142...: 080 013

Common ASCII Codes:

ENQ = 005 DC1 = 017 ! = 033 % = 037

FF = 012 ETB = 023 # = 035 * = 042

CR = 013 ESC = 027 $ = 036 + = 043

Numbers (0 to 9) = 048 to 057

Letters (A to Z) = 065 to 090

Letters (a to z) = 097 to 122




Least Significant Digit Identifies the position of the weight field in the

scales return string.

Example: Enter 8 for a scale which always prints

the scale weight starting at position 2

and ending at position 10.

Station ID The tty number where the scale is connected to the

RS600.

Usage Status A A, D or I Usage Status of the record, where

A Active

D Deleted

I Inactive



PRODUCT INSTALLATION OPTIONS

Product Installation Options are used by many eSTELPLAN programs. These options are used to provide

program flexibility on a site by site basis. Functions controlled by these options are applicable to all users

at a site.

Product Installation Options must not be used in the following cases:

When a selection is for a specific user

When a selection is applicable under very specific circumstances.

Product Installation Options are entered in the format XXX=variable/XXX=variable.

XXX is the option mnemonic.

Example: PMT for payment

DAY for number of days

CUS for customer

The ‘variable’ represents the option for the program. It may contain up to 6 alphanumeric characters such

as Y, N, 10.

NOTE: The combined length of the option mnemonic and the variable cannot exceed 10 characters.

Each option must be separated by the ‘/’ character. The ‘/’ ends the option value and defines where the

next one begins.

Example: TER=Y/COP=10/CUS=N

TER=Y - Print Territory

COP=10 - Print 10 copies

CUS=N - Do not print Customer Information



Product Installation Options

1. Branch…........... CRP

2. Program….......... ORFORD

3. Option…........... FRM=B/PFT=N/SLP=I/WKF=M/SLO=N/WKO=Y/SHO=Y/DTL=N/PF

S=N/TFO=N

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy 3-Delete

Product Installation Options screen


Branch Branch

reference

Enter a valid Branch or use the Reference Table

Look-Up, to set up Branch specific Product

Installation Options.

When the Product Installation Options apply for

all Branches, enter the Corporate Branch defined

in the Installation Options table.

Program Enter the Program Name.

NOTE: Must be entered in uppercase letters.

Option Enter the required option.

NOTE: Must be entered in uppercase letters.

NOTE: When the options line is blank, the warning message “The options line is empty, default

PIO values will be used. Continue? Y/N” is displayed, and ALL of the default PIO

settings are used for the specified Branch/Program.



Product Installation Option Routine

Every eSTELPLAN program that uses Product Installation Options (PIO’s) scans the PIO table to apply

PIO’s set for the Branch stored in the Login ID of the logged on user.

If no Branch specific PIO’s are found, Corporate PIO’s are checked and applied. Otherwise, the

programs use the default PIO values.

The Product Installation Option routine does not check for the Branch status in the Branch table. This

ensures that Corporate PIO’s can still be entered when the Corporate Branch is I-Inactive or D-Deleted in the

Branch table.



BRANCH TIME ZONE

This optional function allows the Bill of Lading to use the time of the local Branch rather than the time of

the CPU Branch as the Ship Date/Time.

In the Branch Time Zone file, the time differences between the local Branches and the CPU Branch are

recorded.

When a BL is entered for a local Branch, the Ship Date/Time are adjusted to reflect the CPU Branch time

plus or minus the time difference entered in the Branch Time Zone file.

Example: A Branch Time Zone record is set up for the ‘CHI’ Branch with the Time Difference = 1:00

hr. When a Toll Bill of Lading is entered for the ‘CHI’ Branch, one hour is added to the

CPU Branch time to reflect the current time of the local Branch.

Branch Time Zone

1. Branch.............. CHI

2. Time Difference..... 1:00


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Branch Time Zone screen


Branch Branch

reference

file

A valid Branch must be entered.

Time Difference CPU system

time

Enter the Time difference between the CPU time

zone and local Branch time zones. This Time

difference is used to calculate the Ship Date

‘Time’ in the Bill of Lading Header and the OPS

‘90’ Outbound transmission.




Usage Status A A, I, D A valid Usage Status Code.

Options are:

A Active

I Inactive

D Delete


2. CUSTOMER & VENDOR INFORMATION

CURRENCIES

This table defines the currencies used in your system and their current exchange rates.

This table must contain at least one currency with an exchange rate of 1.00000000 for use as the Base

Currency.

Currencies

1. Currency............ CD

2. Description......... CANADIAN DOLLAR

3. Currency Symbol..... CAD

4. Trs Exchange Rate... .87840000

5. Ex Gn/Loss G/L Acct. 9461


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Currencies screen


Currency Currency

reference

Represents the currency of a Bank account.

Description Enter the Currency Description.

Currency Symbol Any alphabetic, numeric or special keyboard

character (such as $) representing the Currency in

use. This symbol is printed on external documents

such as invoices and checks.

Trs Exchange Rate Enter the Exchange Rate.

2. Customer & Vendor Information Page 64



Ex Gn/Loss G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

For those transactions that generate General

Ledger transactions affected by Foreign Exchange,

the Current Exchange Rate in effect at the time

the transaction is created and stored in the

transaction record (AR or AP Open Item).

After the transaction is completed, a calculation

determines automatically the variance between the

original rate and the rate at time of completion.

This account is used to record the gain or loss on

the foreign exchange transaction in AR and AP for

the difference in exchange rates between accrual

and payment of the transaction.

This field cannot be changed once the Accounts

Receivable application is live.



TERMS OF PAYMENT

The Terms of payment codes are used to define the number of days granted for payment of an invoice. In

addition, discount information related to the payment is recorded in this table.

At least one Terms of Payment code must exist.

Terms

1. Terms of Payment.... 5

2. Description......... 1/2 % 10, NET 30 DAYS

3. Cash type........... N

4. End of Mth Following

5. Number of Days...... 30

6. Due Days............

7. Discount Rate....... .50

8. Discount Days....... 10

9. 10th - 25th Discount N

10. Prox Terms.......... N

11. 2nd Month Due Day... N

12. Due 10th - 25th..... N


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Terms of Payment screen


Terms of Payment Terms

reference

A code that is created to define and differentiate

the various selling, purchasing or payment terms

granted to customers or by suppliers. You must

set up at least one code.

Description Terms of Payment description.

Cash Type A, D, N It indicates the type of payment term.

Valid codes are:

A Cash in Advance – used for Counter Sales only

D Cash on Delivery

N Non Cash Term

If you use the Counter Sales Procedures (i.e. the

CSH=X PIO is set to Y on <orpord>), you must set

Cash Customers with Terms between 90 and 99 and a

Cash Type equals to A.

If you don’t use the Counter Sales Procedure but

have ‘Cash Customers’, you must set their Terms

with a Cash Type equals to D. Their Terms of

Payment can be anything from 1 to 99.

When the Terms of Payment are from 90 to 99, there




are additional lines printed on the Sales Order

form to indicate the Charges. These lines are

printed regardless of the Cash Type field set up.

End of Mth Following A Term of Payment code used to specify in which

month an Invoice becomes due. The code accepts

any number from 0 to 9.

Code 0: The ‘End of Month Following’ code does

not apply but all other Terms of

Payment fields apply as usual.

Code 1-9: Any invoice generated in a month (no

matter on what day) will become due on

the last day of the month, ‘X’ months

from the month of invoice (‘X’ being

determined by the code 1-9).

Example: If the ‘End of Month Following’ code is

1, an invoice, dated between January 1-

31, becomes due on February 28 (January

+ 1).

If the ‘End of Month Following’ code is

3, the same invoice becomes due on

April 30 (January + 3).

NOTE: If the ‘End of Month Following’ code is 1-

9, you cannot use any other Terms of

Payment fields.

Number of Days Used to calculate the total number of days granted

for payment before the invoice becomes overdue.

Example: 30 for NET 30 days

Due Days Used when an Invoice is due on a particular day of

the following month.

Example: 10 for Due on the 10th of the following

month.

Discount Rate The percentage of discount granted for early

payment.

Discount Days The number of days a discount is applicable.

10th - 25th Discount N, If 10th - 25th Discount is set to Y, invoices

dated from the 1st to the 15th are discounted up

to the 25th of the month and invoices dated from

the 16th to the end of the month are discounted up

to the 10th of the following month.

Prox Terms N, If Prox Terms are set to Y, invoices are

discounted up to the 10th of the following month.

NOTE: If Prox Terms are used, the Number of

Days/Prox Terms relationship must be

considered.

Example: Number of Days = 30

Prox Terms = Y

For an invoice dated January 1st:

Due Date = January 31

but Discount Date = February 10

Depending on the way the business is normally

conducted, the date discrepancy can be ignored or

the Number of Days can be increased to 41 or more.




2nd Month Due Day N, Used in conjunction with the Due Day to allow for

a due date in two months.

Example: For an item due on the 10th in two

months, enter 10 in the due Day field

and set the 2nd Month Due Day field to

Y-Yes.

Due 10th - 25th N, When this field is set to ‘Y’, invoices dated from

the 1st to the 15th become due on the 10th of the

following month and invoices dated from the 16th

to the end of the month become due on the 25th of

the following month.

The following example is based on an Invoice Date of 12th of April:

Terms Description Number

of Days

Due

Day

Due

10/25

2nd

Mo

Discount

Rate Days

10/25

Disc

Prox

Terms

1 Prepaid 0 0 N N 0.00 0 N N

2 Net 30 Days 30 0 N N 0.00 0 N N

3 Due 20th Following Mo 0 20 N N 0.00 0 N N

4 Due 20th in 2 Mo 0 20 N Y 0.00 0 N N

5 ½% 10, Net 30 Days 30 0 N N 0.50 10 N N

6 1% 10-25th Net 30 Days 30 0 N N 1.00 0 Y N

7 ½% Prox Net 30 Days 30 0 N N 0.50 0 N Y

8 1% Prox, Due 20th 2 Mos 0 20 N Y 1.00 0 N Y

9 1% 10-25th, Net 10-25th 0 0 Y N 1.00 0 Y N

10 Net 10-25th 0 0 N N 0.00 0 N N

99 COD 0 0 N N 0.00 0 N N

Terms

1. No terms of payment and no discounts are offered.

2. Payment is due the 12th of May. No discount is offered.


4. Payment is due the 20th of June No discount is offered.

5. Payment is due the 12th of May. ½% discount is offered for payment by the 22nd

of April.

6. Payment is due the 12th of May. 1% discount is offered for payment by the 25th

of April.

NOTE: If the Invoice Date was the 22nd of April, the discount would be offered until the 10th of May.

7. Payment is due the 12th of May. ½% discount is offered for payment by the 10th

of May.

8. Payment is due the 20th of June. 1% discount is offered for payment by the 10th

of May.

9. Payment is due the 10th of May. 1% discount is offered for payment by the 25th

of April.


99. No terms are given. No discount is offered.



End of Month Following:

This code accepts any number 0-9. The interpretation of the code is as follows:

If the code is 0, the term does not apply. All other Terms fields apply.

If the code is 1-9, you cannot enter any other Terms fields. Any invoice generated in a month

(whether it be the first day, last day or any day in-between) is due on the last day of the month, X

months from the month of invoice.

Example:

If the End of Mth Following code is 1, an Invoice dated January 1-January 31 is due February 28.

If the End of Mth Following code is 3, an Invoice dated January 1-January 31 is due April 30.



CREDIT AUTHORITIES

Typically, Credit Managers use Credit Authority codes to assign the follow-up or collection of customer

accounts to specific individuals.

The code is required in the Customer Account table. You can then use it to obtain a printout of

delinquent open items by Credit Authority.

At least one code must exist.

Credit Authority

1. Credit Authority.... 1

2. Description......... JULES TACKAS


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Credit Authority screen



CREDIT CONTROL CODES

Credit Control codes classify Customer Accounts according to credit worthiness and allow Credit

Managers to control Order Entry on high-risk customers. Associated with a Credit Action code, they are

used four ways:

To (ALERT) the order entry clerk to take specific action concerning an order.

To prevent (HOLD) the printing of an order before credit approval.

To add information to Accounts Receivable inquiries and reports.

To pre-authorize (PA) the release of a customer's orders, regardless of the customer's credit status.

To (STOP) an order from being entered.

The code is required in the Customer table.

Credit Control Codes

1. Credit Control...... AA

2. Description......... AUTOMATIC APPROVAL

3. Credit Action....... PA


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Credit Control Codes screen



STANDARD INDUSTRIAL CLASSIFICATIONS

The Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) is a recognized coding system designed by the U.S.

government to identify the type of business performed by a company.

Example: Service Centers are SIC Number 5051.

At least one SIC code must exist. A blank (spaces) code is allowed.

Standard Industrial Classifications

1. SIC Code............ 2500

2. Description......... *** Furniture & Fixtures ***


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Standard Industrial Classifications screen



CUSTOMER/VENDOR CATEGORIES

Customer and Vendor Categories are used to identify the type of business the Customer or Vendor does

with your company.

Example: Fabrication

Mill

Appliance manufacturing.

At least one code must exist. A blank (spaces) code is not allowed.

Customer/Vendor Category

1. Customer/Vendor Cat. FF

2. Description......... FURNITURE AND FIXTURES


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Customer/Vendor Category screen



TAX REGIONS

Tax Regions are used to calculate Sales Taxes.

The Tax Regions allow many combinations of codes for U.S. tax jurisdictions where one county can have

more than one tax rate depending on whether the City is taxable or not. However, depending on the

location of your customers, you may not be liable for sales tax collection, or your customer may have an

exemption certificate.

It is often necessary to monitor taxable and non-taxable sales. For this reason, we recommend that you

establish applicable and non-applicable Sales Tax codes for each tax region. In this way, the Sales Tax

reports can be used as an effective tool to track sales.


Tax Regions

1. Tax Region.......... CAGST

2. Description......... GOODS AND SERVICES TAX

3. Rate................ 7.0000

4. Sales Tax Type...... 1

5. Basic G/L Account... 2420

6. Sales Tax on Mat.... Y

7. Sales Tax on Prs.... Y

8. Sales Tax on Frt.... Y

9. Sales Tax on Oth.... Y

10. Compound on Taxes... 0


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Tax Regions screen


Tax Region Used to represent the taxing authority for which

the Sales Tax is collected. Every taxing

authority is represented by a unique Tax Region so

that the Sales Tax Report can be printed and

submitted to the authority as an audit trail of

the sales tax collected.

The Tax Region code identifies which portions of

revenue are taxable for the region, whether the

tax is calculated on the Net Sale only or whether

it is compounded on top of another type of tax and

the rate of tax applicable to the region.




Description Tax Region Description.

Rate Tax Region Rate. When the Rate field is spaces,

the following fields default to N-No:

Sales Tax on Mat

Sales Tax on Prs

Sales Tax on Frt

Sales Tax on Oth

Sales Tax Type 1, 2, 3, 4 There are four different types of sales tax that

may be applied to a sale. Labeled with a generic

name: Sales Tax 1, Sales Tax 2, Sales Tax 3,

Sales Tax 4, these codes are user-defined.

The Sales Tax Type field, included in the Tax

Regions Maintenance, prevents entry of an invalid

Tax Region in one of the 4 Tax Types of the

Customer Information Maintenance.

Example:

In the U.S.:

Sales Tax 1 is State Sales Tax

Sales Tax 2 is County Sales Tax

Sales Tax 3 is Municipality Tax

Sales Tax 4 is City Sales Tax

In Canada:

Sales Tax 1 is Goods and Service Tax

Sales Tax 2 is Provincial Sales Tax

This field cannot be changed once the eSTELPLAN


Basic G/L Account GL

Accounts

reference

Basic GL account for the Tax Region.

Sales Tax on Mat N, Y Used to indicate if the region has a sales tax

applicable to Material.

Sales Tax on Prs N, Y Used to indicate if the region has a sales tax

applicable to Processing Charges.

Sales Tax on Frt N, Y Used to indicate if the region has a sales tax

applicable to Freight Charges.

Sales Tax on Oth Used to indicate if the region has a sales tax

applicable to Other Charges.

Compound on Taxes 0 0, 1, 2, 3 Used if Tax must be calculated on an amount

including a previous tax.

If tax type is 1, Compound on Tax must be 0

If tax type is 2, Compound on Tax must be 0, 1

If tax type is 3, Compound on Tax must be 0,

1, 2

If tax type is 4, Compound on Tax must be 0,

1, 2, 3


Application is live.



SALES TERRITORIES

Assigning individual customer accounts to a geographic area helps sales management to prepare reports

of Accounts Receivable and Sales Analysis by Territory.

Example: 1 = CHICAGO SOUTH

2 = ILLINOIS

3 = INDIANA

The Sales Territory is required in the Customer and Ship-To tables.


Sales Territories

1. Sales Territory..... IL



Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Sales Territories screen



SALESPERSONS

This table allows you to uniquely identify each individual in your sales department. In this way, you can

attribute sales to the appropriate Inside or Outside Salesperson responsible for a customer account.


Salesperson

1. Salesperson......... AG

2. Description......... ALLAN GREEN

3. Price Var % Alwd.... 5.00


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Salesperson screen


Salesperson Enter the Salesperson Name.

Description Enter the Salesperson Description.

Price Var % Alwd The percentage of Price Variance Allowed. This

field is only accessible if eSTELprice is

installed on your system.



FREIGHT RESPONSIBILITY

Freight Responsibility codes are used in Order Entry and Purchase Order Entry to identify who is

responsible for the freight charges associated with the delivery of material.

The Freight Responsibility code is comprised of

a Freight Charge code

a description

This enables you to add your own Freight Responsibility codes and descriptions as needed.

The Freight Responsibility code is stored in the Vendor and the Customer records. It is defaulted to the

Sales/Purchase Order Header at time of entry. It can be changed as required.

You must create at least one Freight Responsibility code.

Freight Responsibility

1. Frt Resp Code....... CG

2. Description......... CHARGE

3. Frt Code............ CHG


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Freight Responsibility screen



BANKS

This table is used to identify the different banks your company uses for various types of funds. It is also

used to record their corresponding General Ledger accounts.

eSTELPLAN applications support multiple bank accounts for deposits or disbursements. If you conduct

business in a single currency, you need only one bank per application. However, if you use multiple

currencies in your dealings with customers or suppliers, you must set up at least one Bank and General

Ledger Account for each currency.

Example:

Regular bank accounts for Accounts Receivable, Payable and Payroll accounts.

Banks for Foreign funds accounts.

Banks are required for the following eSTELPLAN modules:

Accounts Receivable

eSTEL/AP (Accounts Payable)

At least one Bank code must exist.

Banks

1. Bank................ 4

2. Description......... ROYAL BANK

3. Bank G/L Acct....... 1018

4. Check Limit......... 200000

5. Currency............ CD

6. Ex Var G/L Acct..... 1019


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Banks screen




Bank Enter the Bank code.

Description Enter the Bank code Description.

Bank G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Enter the Bank GL Account code. This field cannot

be changed once the eSTELPLAN application is live.

Check Limit Used to specify the maximum amount that can be

drawn on the Bank in one check. This prevents

automatic disbursement of checks over a certain

dollar value.

Currency Currency

reference

Represents the currency of a Bank account. This

field cannot be changed once the eSTELPLAN


Ex Var G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

Enter the Exchange Variance GL Account code. This

field cannot be changed once the eSTELPLAN




CUSTOMER BANKS

This reference table is used to compile a list of the banks used by your Customers for reference purposes.

It allows you to trace the customer bank in the Cash Receipts Entry program.

If the Product Installation Option CBK=Y is used, a window is displayed in the Cash Receipts Entry

program and you must enter a valid Customer Bank. (A Customer Bank Look-Up is available in this

field.) If the Product Installation Option CBK=N, the Customer Bank window is not shown in Cash

Receipts Entry.

Customer Bank File

1. Bank................ RB

2. Name................ Royal Bank

3. Address - Line 1.... 465 Main Street

Address - Line 2....

Address - Line 3....

4. City................ Chicago, Il.



Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Customer Bank screen



CREDIT STATUS

The Credit Status is a user-defined code that indicates the status of an Order, while it is under credit

review. Examples of Credit Status codes are waiting for payment, order to be canceled, order hold for

release. The code can be set before or after a Sales Order is placed on Credit Hold and is displayed on the

Order Inquiry. The status can be changed as many times as required until the Order is released.

Credit Status

1. Credit Status....... PMT

2. Description......... WAITING FOR PAYMENT


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Credit Status screen



CREDIT HOLD REASONS

Credit Hold Reasons are used exclusively with the Automatic Credit and Profit Hold options, which

provide an automatic credit/profit verification at the time of Work Order form printing.

At that time, several factors are examined for potential credit or profit problems. When a Credit/Profit

Hold situation is encountered, a Credit/Profit Hold Reason is added to the Sales Order to indicate why it

is held. This reason is displayed on the Credit Release and Profit Release screens and is printed on the

Credit and Profit Hold Logs. There can be several reasons for an order to be held, but only the first

reason is shown.

Credit Hold Reasons

1. Credit Hold Reason.. 4

2. Description......... Credit Limit Date Expired


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Credit Hold Reasons screen

Credit Hold Reasons 1 through 21 (explained below) are predetermined. You cannot modify them.

Credit Hold Reasons

---Checked at---

Reason Description Order

Entry

Order

Printing

1. Customer Inactive or Deleted Y Y

2. Temporary Customer Acct Y

3. Cr. Control Action HOLD/STOP Y Y

4. Credit Limit Date Expired Y Y

5. First Sale Date is 0 Y

6. Order is Job related Y

7. Cr. Limit Dt > Cr. Hold Days Y Y

8. Order Change over Release Amt Y

9. Cr. Exposure > Credit Limit Y

10. Average Aged Balance Exceeded Y

11. Order Change Exceeds Cr Limit Y



Credit Hold Reasons

---Checked at---

Reason Description Order

Entry

Order

Printing

12. Percentage of Aged Receivables Y

13. Overdue Invoice Days Exceeded Y

14. Dormant Customer Account Y

15. Future Delivery Days Exceeded Y

16. Zero Price Order Y

17. Below Profit Percentage (Profit Verification function) Y

18. <Pft % after Manual Credit Rel (Profit Verification function) -- --

19. <Pft % after A-Auto Credit Rel (Profit Verification function) -- --

20. Job Overdue Inv Days Exceeded (Job Credit Verification function) Y

21. Job Cr Exposure > Job Cr Limit (Job Credit Verification function) Y

NOTE: The above mentioned codes are supplied with eSTELPLAN.



1099 CATEGORIES

The 1099 Categories are used to categorize certain types of payments for which the U.S. government

requires tax related reporting. It is not necessary to use the government codes.

1099 Categories

1. 1099 Categories..... MISC

2. Description......... MISCELLANEOUS

3. Usage status........ A

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

1099 Categories screen



MATERIAL SPECIFICATION STANDARDS

This table is used to enter standard ordering remarks about material. Remarks can be entered for a single

Branch or for a Corporate Branch.

Up to 99 lines of 50 characters can be entered for each type of Remark.

Material Specification Standards 27Jul04

1. Group............... CRC Cold Rolled Steel Coil

2. Grade............... CQ Commercial Quality

3. Branch.............. PHI eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH

4. Transaction Type.... P

5. Remark Type......... I

Specification Standards

1. Remark 1

2. Remark 2

Insert 1 / 99

Material Specification Standard Remarks

Purchase Orders

Branch specific remarks are automatically copied to the Purchase Order as Item Remarks.

Under specified conditions, the Corporate Remarks are printed on the Purchase Order Form once for

products having the same Group and Grade codes.

Requirements

A record must be created for every Branch (Stocking Branch at a minimum) that will have Purchase

Orders for a Group and Grade.

The transaction Type must be ‘P’ for Purchase Order item creation.



Sales Order Cycle

The Material Specification Standard Remarks entry program provides the ability to enter the following

Selling remark types:

D – Product Description

O – Order

P – Production

W – Work Order

The following transaction entry programs automatically copy the Material Specifications Standards for

Selling remarks:

Sales Order

Transfer Order

Invoice entry

eSTELquote Entry

eSTELspec Entry

Rules and Restrictions

If the Group, Grade and Branch on a Quote, Sales or Transfer Order Item match a Material

Specification Standards entry, then all Selling-type remarks are automatically copied to the item.

If the Group, Grade and Branch code on a Direct Invoice or Credit Note match a Material

Specification Standards entry, then any Selling-type D-Product Description remarks are automatically

copied to the item.

When entering a Customer Part Specification record, all Selling-type remarks are automatically

copied if the following conditions are satisfied:

o the Group and Grade on the Customer Part Specification match those of a Material Specification

Standards entry, and

o the User’s branch matches the branch on the Material Specification Standards record.

To avoid duplicating the Material Specification Remarks on an Order Item, they are not copied in the

following cases:

o if the Order or the Item is created using either the Order or Item Copy functions.

o if the item is copied from a Customer Part Specification.

If the order is created through the eSTELgateway Sales Order Insertion function.



CUSTOMER TAG INFORMATION

Some customers may have specific Tag printing requirements for material that you process. If you need

to print Tags of a specific format for a customer, complete the following screen so that the Tag format and

copies are defaulted automatically.

If no record is found for a customer, the standard eSTELPLAN Shipping Tag format is printed, with no

Tare Weight.

Customer Tag Info

1. Customer Number..... 1010

2. Ship-To Number......

3. Shipping Tag Prefix. AF

4. Shipping Tag Format. S

5. Tag Copies Req'd.... 1

6. Mult Tag Req'd...... N

7. Mult Tag Copies Reqd

8. Tare Weight......... N

9. AIAG Supplier Number

10. Build-up Tag Req'd.. Y

11. AIAG Format.........

12. Charge Qty Type..... A

13. Print Info KGS...... N

14. BL Desc............. D

15. Allow Mult Cus PO... Y

16. Print Cus Name...... N

17. One Invoice Per BL.. N

18. Print Amt on Shp/BL. N

19. Suppress Mill/Heat..

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Customer Tag Information screen 1



Customer Tag Info


2. Ship-To Number......

20. Weight on BL Form..... W

21. Print AIAG Tag in KGS. N

22. Print Msr in BseLgth. N

23. Usage Status.......... A

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Customer Tag Information screen 2


Customer/Ship-to Customer

Reference

Ship-To

Reference

Identifies the combination of Customer and Customer

Ship-To Address for which this tag information

applies.

The Ship-To number can be blank if the information

applies to all Ship-To Addresses for a customer.

You need only enter those Ship-To Addresses that

require different information. The Tag printing

program first scans the file for the Customer/Ship-

To and then for the Customer.

Shipping Tag Prefix If you or the customer require a special prefix to

identify material produced for the account, you can

enter a two character code that will be added in

front of the Tag number when it is generated.

Shipping Tag Format S A, B, S Identifies the default tag format to be used for

the customer.

Options are:

A AIAG format

S Standard eSTELPLAN format (the default)

B Both AIAG and Standard Shipping Tags are

required

Tag Copies Req'd 1 1-99 Indicates the number of copies required of each

Shipping Tag.

Mult Tag Req'd N N, Y Identifies whether or not the customer requires a

Mult Tag in addition to the Shipping Tag for each

item.

The default is N-No.




Mult Tag Copies Req'd 1-99 Identifies the number of Mult Tags to be printed

for each item if the Mult Tag Required code is Y-

Yes.

Tare Weight Y N, Y Controls whether Tare Weights are printed

separately, or are included in the Tag weight for

Shipping Tags.

Options are:

Y Tare Weight is separate from the tag weight

when the tag is printed.

N Tare Weight is included in tag weight when the

tag is printed.

AIAG Supplier Number This field is only required for AIAG Shipping Tag

(Format A).

Build-up Tag Req'd N N, Y Controls the default for printing the Build-Up

Detail Tag.

AIAG Format S S Prints the Standard AIAG format

The AIAG Format code for printing Standard AIAG

Tags is ‘S’.

Charge Qty Type T A, E, G,

H, T

Determines the default Charge Quantity Type for the

Customer Ship-To/Customer number.

Options are:

A Actual

E Enhanced

G Gross (Inventory + Tare)

H Higher or Actual or theoretical

T Theoretical

Print Info KGS N A, B, N,

S, T

For Imperial Base Unit of Measure, controls whether

to print the weight in KGS on the BL form and/or

the Shipping Tags.

Options are:

A Prints weight in LBS and KGS on the Bill of

Lading Form and Shipping Tag. With this option,

the weight on the BL Form and the Shipping Tags

is printed in LBS and KGS regardless of the

Metric code on the Order Item.

B The weight on the BL form and the Shipping Tag

is printed in KGS as well as LBS.

N The weight is only printed in LBS on the BL form

and the Shipping Tag.

M (Metric Sites Only) Both LBS and KGS are printed

on Bills of Lading and Shipping Tags.

S The weight on the BL form is printed in KGS as

well as LBS. The weight on the Shipping Tag is

only printed in LBS.

T The weight on the Shipping Tag is printed in

KGS. The weight on the BL form is only printed

in LBS.

Not applicable for Metric Base Unit of Measure.

Coil Length – If option is set to A,B or T – the

Coil Length is printed in meters on Shipping tags.




BL Desc D D, L, T Allows you to print the Item Description, Coil

Length or the Other Tag Ref. No. instead of the

item detail description on the Bill of Lading

forms.

Options are:

D Description. Prints the item detail

description.

L Length. Prints the shipping tag's Coil Length

instead of the item detail description.

T Tag Reference Number. Prints the shipping tag’s

Tag Ref field instead of the item detail

description.

Allow Mult Cus PO Y N, Y Determines whether you can ship multiple Sales

Orders with different Customer Purchase Order

numbers on the same Bill of Lading.

Options are:

N You cannot change the Sales Order number on

the Bill of Lading Item if its Purchase Order

number does not match the one on the Order

used on the Bill of Lading Header.

Y You can change the Sales Order Number on the

Bill of Lading Item as long as the other

conditions are satisfied.

Print Cus Name N B, T, N, Y Determines whether the customer name is printed on

the Shipping Tag instead of your company name or

branch, and whether the BL Form and the Shipping

Information Label are printed as a Blind Shipment.

Options are:

B Print the BL Form and the Shipping Information

Label as a Blind Shipment.

N (Default). Print the company name or branch

on the finished goods tags and print the BL

Form and the Shipping Information Label as a

regular company shipment.

T Print the Customer Sold-to name instead of the

company name or branch on the finished goods

tags (both AIAG and standard eSTELPLAN

shipping tags).

Y Print the Customer Sold-to name instead of the

company name or branch on the finished goods

tags (both AIAG and standard eSTELPLAN

shipping tags) and print the BL Form and

Shipping Information Label as a Blind

Shipment.

One Invoice Per BL N N, Y Used by the Invoice entry program to default the

Invoice Type when creating an Invoice from a Bill

of Lading.

Options are:

N The Invoice Type defaults to B, one Invoice

entry is created for each Sales Order shipped

on the Bill of Lading.

Y The Invoice Type defaults to E, one Invoice is

created for the entire Bill of Lading as long

as all the Sales Orders shipped on the Bill of

Lading belong to the same Selling Branch.




Print Amt on Shp/BL N B, C, N, V This field is used to default the Prt Amount field

on the Order Header. The Prt Amount field controls

the printing of the Order Charges/Value on the

Shipping Order and Bill of Lading forms regardless

of the Terms of Payment.

Options are:

B Both. Order Charges and Order Values are

printed on the Shipping Order and Bill of

Lading form regardless of the Order Terms of

Payment.

C Charges. The Order Charges are printed on the

Shipping Order and Bill of Lading form

regardless of the Order Terms of Payment.

N For orders with COD Terms of Payment, the

Order Charges and Order Value are printed on

the Shipping Order. Only the Order Value is

printed on the Bill of Lading form.

V The Order Value is printed on the Shipping

Order and Bill of Lading form regardless of

the Order Terms of Payment.

Suppress Mill/Heat N N, Y On AIAG and Shipping Tags, controls the printing of

Mill/Heat information by customer

Options are:

N The Mill/Heat number and the field label

‘HEAT’ are printed on the customer’s Shipping

Tags.

Y The Mill/Heat number and the field label

‘HEAT’ are not printed on the AIAG, Shipping

and Mult Tags for the customer.

Weight on BL Form B B, W For tagged and weight-based products, controls the

printing of the weights on the Bill of Lading form

Options are:

B (Default.) Only the Billing Weight is printed

on the BL form. The Billing Weight is computed

based on the Product Item being shipped and the

Charge Quantity Type.

W Weight. All Weights are printed on the BL

form. When the Charge Quantity Type is G or E,

the Actual and Billing Weights are printed.

When the Charge Quantity Type is A, T or H, the

Actual and Theoretical Weights are printed.

Print AIAG Tag in KGS N, Y Allows you to ALWAYS print weights in KGS on AIAG

Tags.

Options are:

N (Default.) Weights are printed in LBS for

Imperial Orders and in KGS for Metric Orders.

Y Always prints weights in KGS (both Imperial

and Metric Orders). The option affects the

printing of weights on the AIAG Datablocks and

on the AIAG tear-off stubs. In the Datablock,

the weight is printed in KGS. On the stubs,

the weight is printed in BOTH LBS and KGS.

For Metric Sites:

Datablock 6 Actual Weight is printed in LBS.

Weights on the first tear-off stub are printed




in Both LBS and KGS.

Print Msr in BseLgth N N, Y Controls the printing of the Measure on the Bill of

Lading and Invoice Forms.

Options are:

N (Default.) On the Bill of Lading and Invoice

Form, the Measure is printed using the

applicable Printing UM (from the Installation

Options file).

Y On the Bill of Lading and Invoice Form, the

Measure is printed using the applicable

Storage UM (from the Installation Options

file) in addition to the Printing.



Tag Numbers – Automatic Assignment

Return to Stock Tags (types M, D, W, R and S) are assigned from the following control sequence:

Application (IN)

Branch (Job Branch)

Ref Prfx (RT)

Finished Goods Tags (type F) are assigned from the following control sequence:

Application (IN)

Branch (Job Branch)

Ref Prfx (ST)

Defaulting the Charge Quantity Type

A Product Installation Option, TYP=X, is used to default the Charge Quantity Type for new records.

Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for details.

Automatic Customer Tag Information Table Generation

A utility <sctcti> enables you to automatically create a Customer Tag Information record for each

Customer in the Customer reference table.

Restriction

This utility is only used if there are no records in the Customer Tag Information table as it will override

any existing information.

Customer Tag Information Record Creation

The Customer Tag Information record is created with a blank Ship-To, regardless of whether you have

one or more Ship-To records set up for the Customer.

Charge Qty Type Field: The utility defaults the value of this field in the following way:

If you have the TYP Product Installation Option set on <orschg>, then you must set up the same PIO

on <sctcti>. This ensures that the Charge Quantity Type will continue to default in the same way.

If you do not set the TYP Product Installation Option on <sctcti>, the value of the Charge Qty Type

field defaults to T-Theoretical.



STATE/PROVINCE

This table is used to enter the list of States (USA) or Provinces (Canada) in which the company operates.

It allows you to identify the State or Province of each Vendor and Customer account. This code is not

printed on Customer lists.

You must have set up your Country table prior to setting up the State codes.

State/Province

1. Country............. 001

2. State/Province...... IL



Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

State/Province screen


Country Country

reference

Enter the Country code corresponding to the State.

State/Province Enter the State (USA) or Province (Canada) code.

Description Enter the State or Province name.



USER DEFINED TABLE

This table enables you to define a customized set of 2-character user defined (UD) codes. These UD

codes can then be assigned to the Customer, Customer Ship-To, Vendor or Vendor Ship-From reference

tables. The Quote, Order and Purchase Order Headers can also contain a UD code that is subsequently

carried to the History and Analysis tables by the processing and update programs. The UD codes are also

used for reporting purposes throughout the Sales and Purchase Order cycles. The User Defined code is

optional.

User Defined

1. User Defined........ AG

2. Description......... Agent


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

User Defined screen


User Defined Enter the User Defined (UD) code.

Description Enter the description of the UD code.




3. INVENTORY INFORMATION

OVERVIEW

The eSTELPLAN method of Inventory Control is both comprehensive and flexible. It provides an accurate

means for the control of a varied range of metals including Aluminum, Brass, and Copper and for products

including structural steel, coils, sheet, pipe and tubing, wire mesh, expanded metal and pre-fabricated

products (nails, ladder rungs, fittings) that may be carried by a service center.

The eSTELPLAN inventory classification of metal products employs commonly used industry related

terminology. The flexibility of this system allows you to tailor the coding of your products to meet the needs

and characteristics of your service center. If a particular product that you carry is not discussed, or if the

method of classifying that product is not suitable for the way you stock and sell it, we recommend further

discussion with your Installation Analyst.

Inventory is affected by several areas of service center operations including: Sales Order Processing,

Invoicing, and Purchasing.

3. Inventory Information Page 98


INVENTORY CODING

Three-Tiered Structure

Product coding is a fundamental aspect of eSTELPLAN use that has many system-wide implications. The

method used for coding products is unique to each service center and is dependent upon a great many

variables. In order to obtain the most beneficial results, we recommend that the coding of products be

considered carefully and, if necessary, discussed with your Installation Analyst.

eSTELPLAN inventory coding is comprised of user defined tables (such as Product Group, Grade) and tables

that are supplied with eSTELPLAN. The basis of eSTELPLAN Inventory coding involves classifying each

product into a three-tiered structure:

1) Product Group (the physical characteristics of the product that determine how it is

stored in inventory).

Example: angles, plate, pipe or coil

2) Product Size (the size of the product within the Group)

Example: 2" X 2" X 1/4", 1/2", 10 Gauge

3) Product Grade (quality, finishing)

Example: A-36, C-1018, DOM

Each combination of Product Group, Size and Grade is referred to as a Product Master. Once Product

Masters are created, products can be purchased, received and sold.

Product Dimension

Another factor affecting Inventory Control is the dimension of products. Generally, products have

dimensional characteristics that fall into one of the following categories:

Dimension Products

Length bar angles

Width coils

Width-Length plate, sheet

Unitized fittings, ladder rungs

The addition of dimension to each unique Group, Size, Grade combination serves to further differentiate

products.



Inventory Tagging

Inventory Tagging offers the ultimate control over inventory. Tag numbers are used when a more

detailed identification of products is required. In this way, if the Group, Size, Grade and Dimension of

products are identical, the Tag number makes each piece, bundle, lift or coil unique. Tag numbers allow

each of these individual units to be tracked from the moment of its arrival until several months after it has

been completely sold.

A product is defined as being Tagged at the Product Master level. The actual Tag number is assigned at

the time of receiving goods into inventory. There are two Product Master fields that determine the extent

of data stored and the manner in which Tagged products are treated by the system. These fields are the

Product Master Inventory Organization and Tag Master Required fields.

The valid Inventory Organization codes are:

Inventory Organization Code Products

L (Length Controlled) pipe, bar angles

WL (Width-Length Controlled) plate

LT (Length-Tag Controlled) tubing, round bars

WLT (Width-Length-Tag Controlled) sheet

WT (Width-Tag Controlled) coil

T (Unitized-Tag Controlled) fittings

Once the Inventory Organization is determined, you must establish whether you require comprehensive Tag

Master information for each of your Tagged products. Data such as product source, date of receipt, cost, heat

information (including chemistry) and transactions (e.g., Processing from coil to sheet) is recorded for each

Tagged product that has the Tag Master Required field set to ‘Yes’. It is then possible to inquire about a

product and its related data through the use of the assigned Tag number.

If the Tag Master Required field is set to ‘No’, then the Tag number assigned at the time of receiving is used

solely as an additional identifier for the product and may be utilized for such purposes as location control.

However, detailed Tag information is not stored and it is not possible to inquire on such a product by its Tag

number.

This feature can be used selectively for any product, however, it is not practical for all service centers to

identify all products in this manner. Inventory Tagging is essential for products that require Mill Test

Certification. It is also important to note that this method of Inventory Control is only effective if warehouse

procedures are such that the Tagged products can retain their tagged status from their initial receipt through to

their final shipment.



Gauge Required

A product is defined as Gauge Required at the Product Group level. For each product that is Gauge

Required, a Product Gauge table consisting of appropriate Gauge ranges must exist.

The use of this feature permits the control and validation over the entry of Gauge Required products at the

time of Sales and Purchase Order Entry, Inventory Receipts and other eSTELPLAN applications. When

entering Gauge Required products in these applications, you are prompted to enter a Gauge. The Gauge

is then validated against the Product Gauge table. If the Gauge of the product is not within the pre-

defined range, you are forced to correct the entry.

TMW Factor/Theoretical Weight

The TMW Factor (Theoretical Material Weight Factor) is used to calculate equivalent weight for

products—such as sheet and plate—that are Gauge Required and have Width and Length dimensions.

For Imperial sites, the TMW Factor is recorded in the Imperial base weight Unit of Measure (LBS) per

Cubic Inch, while for Metric sites this factor is recorded in the Metric base weight Unit of Measure

(KGS) per Cubic Centimeter. The base weight Unit of Measure (which is stored in the Installations

Options table) refers to the smallest weight Unit of Measure that has a conversion factor of 1.

The TMW Factor can be established in two tables – the Group/Grade Options and the Product Group

tables. In calculating Theoretical Weights, the system looks first to the appropriate Group/Grade table

and uses the TMW Factor stored there. If there is no TMW Factor found in this table, then the one in the

Product Group record is used.

A Group/Grade options table should be established for products that have had a change in weight due to

some type of processing. Processes such as tinplating, galvanizing or plastic coating can slightly increase

the weight of products, therefore resulting in the need for a Group/Grade record.

Theoretical Weight is established at the Product Master level and allows for the calculation of equivalent

weight for non-Gauge Required products. The Theoretical Weight factor is recorded in the base weight

Unit of Measure (such as LBS, KGS) per a dimensional Unit of Measure (such as FT, M). As with the

TMW Factor, the base weight Unit of Measure is derived from the corresponding base weight Unit of

Measure (Metric or Imperial) in the Installation Options table. In general, this Unit of Measure is LBS for

Imperial sites and KGS for Metric sites. The dimensional Unit of Measure is determined by the ILC

Code (Theoretical Weight Unit of Measure) associated with the Product Group.

The calculation of product quantity for non-gauge, piece controlled products uses the Theoretical weight

factor X the number of pieces X the Dimension or the pieces alone, if the product has no dimension.



Changing the TMW Factor

The ability to change the theoretical weight factor (TMW) is controlled by the User Menu Option ‘t’.

The function MUST NOT be generally accessible, as inadvertent changes to TMW factors without

following the proper procedures could cause serious data integrity problems.

Procedure

The following procedure MUST be followed to ensure the integrity of your data BEFORE making any

changes to your TMW Factors:

Identify the Product Group, Group/Grade or Product Master to be changed

Run a Stock Status Report for these products ( include transient and planned)

Remove ALL reservations for these products.

Zero out the On-Hand Pcs/Qty/Wgt for these products. You can use Inventory Adjustments, option

‘2.New Qty in the Adjustment’ or Physical Inventory.

Change the TMW in the Product Group <inaprg>, Group-Grade <inagrg> or Product Master

<inaprm> reference tables.

After the TMW has been changed:

Add back the On-Hand Pcs/Qty/Wgt for the Product Items. You can use Inventory Adjustments,

option ‘5.Qty & Cost’ or Physical Inventory.

Go through all Sales Order Items and Purchase Order Items for the Product Items to re-calculate the

theoretical weight and adjust costs and charges.

Put back the Product Item Reservations that were previously removed.

Run a Stock Status Report for these products.

Customer Part Specs – If Customer Part Specs have been created that reference the changed Product

Item, you must go through ALL of the entry fields in change mode using the Change action bar

options and the Spec action bar options.

Piece Control

Piece control relates to aspects of inventory management affecting how products are purchased, stocked,

and sold.

Piece control is established at the Product Group level and is used to indicate whether the product piece

count is necessary. Typically, products such as Bar Angles are purchased and sold by the piece, therefore

requiring that the Piece Control field be set to ‘Yes’. Other products such as coil may not require Piece

Control, however, if the eSTELPLAN production package eSTELpro has been, or is expected to be

installed, then Piece Control is mandatory.

Product Group/Product Master Sequence Number

These Sequence Numbers are used in reporting and inquiry functions to arrange products in a logical

manner.

The Group Sequence number is used in Purchasing, Sales Order Processing, Inventory reporting to



determine the sequencing of Product Groups.

The Product Master Sequence Number is of particular importance. This sequence number is used to

arrange the Product Group/Size/Grade combinations in ascending order of the smallest Size/lowest Grade

to the largest Size/highest Grade. For example, a ¼" A-36 plate is smaller in size than a ½" A-36 plate,

however, this difference would not be reflected correctly if reports and inquiries were sorted by Size

alone. It is for this reason, that it is necessary to attach a lower Product Master Sequence Number to the

¼" plate than to the ½" plate.

Management Summary Group/Product Category

These categories are used as a method of classifying products for reporting purposes. The Management

Summary Groups can be used as a more general classification of products or materials stocked by a

service center. The Product Categories are then used to further differentiate products or materials within

the larger Management Summary Groups. For example, a flat rolled service center might establish a

Management Summary Group as Carbon Steel and a Product Category as Flat Products. In this way, a

stock status report could be generated showing the inventory position of Carbon Steel Flat Rolled

products.

Company/Branch Standard Dimension

Company Standard Dimensions are a critical part of inventory coding. They are used to keep product

statistics and balance information that are in turn used in such functions as Inventory Forecasting. These

dimensions must be established for all products that you wish to track.

It is imperative that you establish some dimensions for use when data starts to be accumulated through

various transactions. The system automatically creates a ‘0’ dimension for all products that have an

existing Product Master. This ‘0’ record is used as a generic Standard Dimension. When entering

transactions for products with no established Standard Dimension, the information from the transaction is

stored under this ‘0’ Standard Dimension.

Example: A Product Master for 3/16" plate is created (PL 316 CQ) and no Standard Dimensions are

established for this product.

This Product is then received into inventory with a Dimension of 48 X 96. The Product

Detail record reflects the actual dimensions of 48 X 96. It reflects the Receipt as it was

actually made. As there are no Standard Dimensions for this product, all transaction

information is stored under the ‘0' Dimension that is created by the system.

There are two methods that can be used to create Company Standard Dimensions. The first is an

efficient, two-step creation process that can be executed at the time of Product Group and Product Master

entry. Further discussion of this multi-record creation procedure is contained in the Product Group and

Product Master sections of this manual. The second method uses a standard entry program to manually

create records on an individual basis.

The use of the multi-record build process is recommended when establishing new products where

numerous dimension records need to be created. For the creation of individual records or for the

maintenance of existing Company Standard Dimensions, the entry program is used. Standard Dimensions

can be added or modified once the inventory related eSTELPLAN applications are live.



Branch Standard Dimensions are similar to Company Standard Dimensions. They enable you to forecast

Inventory Requirements by Branch. Therefore, records should be established for those products that are

purchased by Branch. Company Standard Dimensions must be established before Branch Standard

Dimensions can be entered. For each Branch Standard Dimension record, a corresponding Company

Standard Dimension must exist.

Pre-Defined eSTELPLAN Tables

The pre-defined tables supplied with eSTELPLAN are the Price Per Check Codes, Units of Measure,

Inventory Logic Control Table and Installation Options. These tables are referenced by all programs

affecting inventory.

Price Per Check Codes

The Price Per Check Code is used in different eSTELPLAN applications to calculate the correct cost or

price for a product. Products are inventoried in certain Units of Measure (such a LBS, FT, EA, SFT), but

they can be sold in a different Unit of Measure.

Example: Bar Angles are inventories in LBS but they can be sold by

the Gross Ton (GTN) to a bridge manufacturer

the Piece to a fabricator

the Foot (FT) to a walk-in customer

A Price Per Check Table is built into eSTELPLAN that identifies the valid Units of Measure in which a

product may be purchased or sold. This prevents invoices for pipe from being priced by the square foot

or other products from being sold in incorrect units.

The Price Per Check Codes are identified below along with the Units of Measure and products for which

they are used.



Code Valid Units of Measure Product Examples

1 LBS, CWT, TON, GTN, MTN, TNE, KG,

CKG, EA, PCS, LOT,

Weight or Unit Controlled products having

only a width dimension, or no dimension.

(Coil, ladder rungs, gratings, couplings)


CKG, EA, PCS, LOT, IN, FT, YRD, CFT,

MFT, MM, CM, DC, M, HM, KM

Length Products that have Pieces Required

and/or a theoretical weight whether they

are kept in a weight or a length unit of

measure.

(Pipe, mechanical tubing, bar angles,

channel, bars, flats)


CKG, SIN, SFT, SYD, CSF, SCM, SDM,

SQM, CSM, EA, PCS, LOT

Width and Length products that have

Pieces Required and/or a theoretical weight

whether they are kept in a weight or an area

unit of measure. (plate, sheet, expanded

metal, perforated metal)


CKG, LOT

Weight controlled products that have no

Dimension or Piece Control Required.

(Box of nails)

5 LBS, CWT, TON, GTN, KG, CKG,

MTN, TNE, UF2, ROL, R10, LOT

Unitized weight controlled products that

have no Piece Control Required but have

weight.

Price Per Check Codes

Units of Measure

Units of Measure are used to identify the Inventory Control characteristics of products. In addition, they

are used to associate a Unit of Measure with billing charges in Invoicing and Purchasing Costs in

Purchasing and Receiving.

eSTELPLAN is supplied with established Units of Measure. In general, there are two classifications of

Units of Measure. These types include Units of Measure used in processing material (such as CUT, HR)

and Inventory control Units of Measure (such as CWT, KG). The Units of Measure supplied with

eSTELPLAN are used differently depending upon the Base Measure of the site.

A site with a Base Measure of Imperial must use Imperial Units of Measure for inventory control but can

also use Metric Units of Measure for billing purposes. For example, it is possible to store products in

inventory in an Imperial Measure (such as FT) but invoice the same product in a Metric Measure (such as

Meters). At a site with a Base Measure of Metric, you can only store, sell and purchase products in

Metric Units of Measure.

Additions or modifications to the established Unit of Measure codes must be done in conjunction with

Support Center personnel.



List of standard Units of Measure

UM Meas Basis Imperial Metric Nbr -Price Per Check-

Type Code Conv Factor Conv Factor Dec 1 2 3 4 5

LBS I W 1.0000000 0.4535929 0 Y Y Y Y Y

CWT I W 100.0000000 45.3592909 0 Y Y Y Y Y

TON I W 2000.0000000 907.1858188 0 Y Y Y Y Y

GTN I W 2240.0000000 1016.0481170 0 Y Y Y Y Y

KGS M W 2.2046200 1.0000000 0 Y Y Y Y Y

CKG M W 220.4620000 100.0000000 0 Y Y Y Y Y

TNE M W 2204.6200000 1000.0000000 0 Y Y Y Y Y

MTN M W 2204.6200000 1000.0000000 0 Y Y Y Y Y

IN I L 1.0000000 25.4000000 4 N Y N N N

FT I L 12.0000000 304.8000000 2 N Y N N N

YRD I L 36.0000000 914.4000000 2 N Y N N N

CFT I L 1200.0000000 30480.0000000 2 N Y N N N

MFT I L 12000.0000000 304800.0000000 2 N Y N N N

MM M L .0393701 1.0000000 2 N Y N N N

CM M L .3937008 10.0000000 2 N Y N N N

DC M L 3.9370079 100.0000000 2 N Y N N N

M M L 39.3700787 1000.0000000 3 N Y N N N

HM M L 3937.0078740 100000.0000000 2 N Y N N N

KM M L 39370.0787400 1000000.0000000 2 N Y N N N

SIN I A 1.0000000 6.4516000 2 N N Y N N

SFT I A 144.0000000 92903.0400000 2 N N Y N N

SYD I A 1296.0000000 836127.3600000 2 N N Y N N

CSF I A 14400.0000000 9290304.0000000 2 N N Y N N

SCM M A .1550003 1.0000000 0 N N Y N N

SDM M A 15.5000310 100.0000000 2 N N Y N N

SQM M A 1550.0031000 10000.0000000 2 N N Y N N

CSM M A 155000.3100000 1000000.0000000 2 N N Y N N

EA B U 1.0000000 1.0000000 0 Y Y Y N N

PCS B U 1.0000000 1.0000000 0 Y Y Y N N

LOT B 1.0000000 1.0000000 0 Y Y Y Y Y

UF2 B U 1.0000000 1.0000000 0 N N N N Y

ROL B U 1.0000000 1.0000000 0 N N N N Y

R10 B U 1000.0000000 1000.0000000 0 N N N N Y

MIN B H 1.0000000 1.0000000 0 Y Y Y Y Y

HRS B H 60.0000000 60.0000000 2 Y Y Y Y Y

THW B T 1.0000000 1.0000000 0 Y Y Y Y Y

CUT B C 1.0000000 1.0000000 0 Y Y Y Y Y

NOTE: Once the Inventory application is live, only the Usage Status can be changed.

NOTE 2: If the PMV=XXX Product Installation Option is used on the Charge Entry program

<orschg>, a ‘XXX’ Unit of Measure must be added to the Unit of Measure table by the

Support Center personnel. ‘XXX’ should be set up as a ‘LOT’ Unit of Measure.



Example: PMV=% is set. The following Unit of Measure record must be set:

1. Unit of Measure..... %

2. Imperial Conv Fctr.. 1.0000000

3. Metric Conv Fctr.... 1.0000000

4. U/M Type............ B

5. U/M Basis Code......

6. Price Per Check Cd.. N N N N N

7. Nbr Decimals on Qty.


Refer to the Product Installation Guide for more details on the use of this option.

Inventory Logic Control Table

The Inventory Logic Control Table is the basis of the logic that the system requires to know the difference

between products such as bar angle, plate, sheet, coil or pipe. eSTELPLAN is supplied with a standard

list of ILC Codes in a range from 1-99. ILC Codes 1-50 are for use at sites that have a Base Measure of

Imperial. Codes 51-99 are intended for use with a Base Measure of Metric.

The ILC Code is a required field on the Product Group. This code determines how inventory is controlled

and costed. The ILC code also controls the printing Unit of Measure codes to be used for material within

a specific Product Group.

IMPERIAL MEASURE BASED ILC CODES

Code Ctrl

Meth

Imper

Cost

U/Ms

Print

Met

Cost

U/Ms

Print

Theo

U/M

Description

1 W CWT LBS TNE KGS FT Weight controlled products that are inventoried

in LBS, costed per CWT and have a length

dimension and a Theoretical Weight per FT.

E.g. Bar Angles, Channel Bars, Rounds,

Beams.

2 W CWT LBS TNE KGS SFT Weight controlled products that are inventoried

in LBS, costed per CWT, have a width or a

width and length dimension and a Theoretical

Weight per SFT.

E.g. Coil, plate and sheet.

3 L CFT FT HM M FT Length controlled products inventoried in FT,

costed in CFT with a Theoretical Weight per

FT.

E.g. Pipe

4 A CSF SFT CSM SQM SFT Area controlled products that are inventoried in

SFT, costed in CSF and have a Theoretical

Weight per SFT.

E.g. Expanded metal, perforated metal.



Code Ctrl

Meth

Imper

Cost

U/Ms

Print

Met

Cost

U/Ms

Print

Theo

U/M

Description

5 U EA EA EA EA EA Unitized products that have no Piece Control

Required, are inventoried in units, costed per

unit and have a Theoretical Weight per unit.

E.g. Ladder rungs or other pre-fabricated

products.

6 W LBS LBS KGS KGS FT Weight controlled products that are inventoried

in LBS, costed in LBS and have Theoretical

Weight per FT.

E.g. Aluminum angles, brass rod, copper

rounds.

7 W LBS LBS KGS KGS SFT Weight controlled products that are inventoried

in LBS, costed in LBS and have a Theoretical

Weight per SFT.

E.g. Stainless Steel or aluminum sheet and

plate.

8 L FT FT M M FT Length controlled products that are inventoried

in FT, costed per FT and have a Theoretical

Weight per FT.

E.g. Mechanical Tube, aluminum or stainless

steel tube.

9 U ROL ROL ROL ROL ROL Unitized products kept in rolls, costed per roll

and with a Theoretical Weight per roll.

10

W

CWT LBS CKG KGS EA Weight controlled products that are inventoried

in LBS, costed in CWT and with a Theoretical

Weight per EA.

E.g. Carbon steel circles.

11 W LBS LBS KGS KGS EA Weight controlled products that are inventoried

in LBS, costed in LBS and with a Theoretical

Weigh per EA.

E.g. Aluminum circles.



METRIC MEASURE BASED ILC CODES

Code Ctrl

Meth

Imper

Cost

U/Ms

Print

Met

Cost

U/Ms

Print

Theo

U/M

Description

51 W CWT LBS TNE KGS M Weight controlled products that are inventoried

in KGS, costed per TNE, have a length

dimension and a Theoretical Weight per M.

52 W CWT LBS TNE KGS SQM Weight controlled products inventoried in

KGS, costed per TNE, have a Width and

Length dimension and a Theoretical Weight

per SQM.

E.g. Plate and sheet.

53 L CFT FT HM M M Length controlled products inventoried in

Meters, costed per HM with a Theoretical

Weight per Meter.

E.g. Pipe.

54 A CSF SFT CSM SQM SQM Area controlled products that are inventoried in

SQM, costed per CSM and have a Theoretical

Weight per SQM.

E.g. Expanded metal, perforated metal.

55 U EA EA EA EA EA Unitized products that have no Piece Control

Required, are inventoried in units, costed per

unit and have a Theoretical Weight per unit.

E.g. Ladder rungs or other pre-fabricated

products.

56 W LBS LBS KGS KGS M Weight controlled products that are inventoried

in KGS, costed in KGS and have a Theoretical

Weight per Meter.

E.g. Aluminum angles, brass rod, copper

rounds.

57 W LBS LBS KGS KGS SQM Weight controlled products that are inventoried

in KGS, costed in KGS and have a Theoretical

Weight per Square Meter.

E.g. Stainless steel or aluminum sheet and

plate.

58 L FT FT M M M Length controlled products that are inventoried

in Meters, costed in Meters and have a

Theoretical Weight per Meter.

E.g. Mechanical tube, aluminum or stainless

steel tube.

59 U ROL ROL ROL ROL ROL Unitized products kept in Rolls, costed per roll

and with a Theoretical Weight per Roll.

60 W CWT LBS CKG KGS EA Weight controlled products that are inventoried

in KGS, costed in CKG and with a Theoretical

Weight per EA.

E.g. Carbon steel circles.

61 W LBS LBS KGS KGS EA Weight controlled products that are inventoried

in KGS, costed in KGS and with a Theoretical

Weight per EA.

E.g. Aluminum circles.



NOTE: The basic ILC codes are provided with eSTELPLAN. If you require additions or

modifications to the existing codes, it must be done in conjunction with Support Center

personnel.

Installation Options

The Installation Options control the Base Measure, Currency and Language, as well as, the basic Storage

and Print Units of Measure to be used in eSTELPLAN applications. These Options are established in

conjunction with you and are then supplied when the system is installed.


1. Key Code............ OPT

2. Base Measure........ I

3. Base Currency....... US

4. Base Country........ 1

5. Base Language....... E

---Storage--- ---Printing---

-Imp Inv Control U/Ms-

6. Imp Wgt U/M......... LBS 10. Imp Wgt U/M......... LBS

7. Imp Lgth U/M........ IN 11. Imp Lgth U/M........ FT

8. Imp Area U/M........ SIN 12. Imp Area U/M........ SFT

9. Imp Unit U/M........ PCS 13. Imp Unit U/M........ PCS

-Met Inv Control U/Ms-

14. Met Wgt U/M......... KGS 18. Met Wgt U/M......... KGS

15. Met Lgth U/M........ MM 19. Met Lgth U/M........ M

16. Met Area U/M........ SCM 20. Met Area U/M........ SQM

17. Met Unit U/M........ PCS 21. Met Unit U/M........ PCS

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Installation Options – first screen




1. Key Code............ OPT

--Miscellaneous U/Ms--

22. Theo Basis Print U/M THW

23. Cut Basis Print U/M. CUT

24. Hrly Basis Print U/M HRS

25. Met Ton U/M......... TON

26. Met Ton U/M......... TNE

27. Material Frt U/M.... CWT

28. Metric Frt U/M...... CKG

29. Lot U/M............. LOT

30. Met Mat Cost U/M.... CWT

31. Met Mat Cost U/M.... KGS

32. Max Sales Type...... 3

33. Corporate Branch.... CRP

34. Default Product Acs. P

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Installation Options – second screen


1. Key Code............ OPT

--Cost Unit of Measure--

35. Met Wgt Cst U/M.... CWT

36. Met Wgt Cst U/M.... TNE

37. Met Lgth Cst U/M.... CFT

38. Met Lgth Cst U/M.... HM

39. Met Area Cst U/M.... CSF

40. Met Area Cst U/M.... CSM

41. Met Unit Cst U/M.... EA

42. Met Unit Cst U/M.... EA

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Installation Options – third screen




Base Measure I, M The base standard of measure for the installation.

It is used to control processing of inventory.

Valid codes are:

I Imperial

M Metric

Base Currency Currency

reference

Used to identify the Base Currency of the

eSTELPLAN Installation. The Exchange Rate for

this Currency must be 1.000000. Once set, it

cannot be changed. It is used to default the

Currency code and Exchange Rate for any

transactions in the Base Country.

Base Country Determines the Country of the eSTELPLAN

Installation. It controls the default Country for

Customer and Vendor account creation. It is also

used in conjunction with the Telephone Number or

Fax Number for accounts in different countries.

Used also to control certain government controlled

areas like Sales and Income Taxes.

You cannot change this field if any of the

eSTELPLAN applications are live.

Base Language eSTELPLAN operates in ENGLISH as the Base

Language. The Base Language is used to control

the default language code in Vendor and Customer

reference tables. (See Alternate Language

Facilities for details.)

Imp Inv Control U/Ms

Storage U/Msr

Imp Wgt U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Imperial Weight Storage UM is used to identify

the basic storage unit of measure for Weight

controlled products.

The UM Basis must be ‘W’

The UM Type code must be ‘I’.

The Imperial Conversion Factor must be 1.0.

Imp Lgth U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Imperial Length Storage UM is used to identify

the basic storage unit of measure for Length


The UM Basis must be ‘L’.



Imp Area U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Imperial Area Storage UM is used to identify

the basic storage unit of measure for Width and

Length products controlled by area.

The UM Basis must be ‘A’.



Imp Unit U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Imperial Unit Storage UM is used to identify

the basic storage unit of measure for unitized

products (such as Ladder Rungs, Gratings, etc.).

The UM Basis must be ‘U’.

The UM Type code must be ‘B’.





Printing U/Msr

Imp Wgt U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Imperial Weight Print UM identifies the

default print unit of measure for Weight


The UM Basis must be ‘W’.


Imp Lgth U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Imperial Length Print UM is used to identify

the default print unit of measure for Length




Imp Area U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Imperial Area Print UM is used to identify the

default print unit of measure for Width and Length

products controlled by area.

The UM Basis code must be ‘A’.

The UM Type must be ‘I’.

Imp Unit U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Imperial Unit Print UM identifies the default

print unit of measure for unitized products.


The UM Type must be ‘B’.

Met Inv Control U/Ms

Storage U/Msr

Met Wgt U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Metric Weight Storage UM is used to identify

the basic storage unit of measure for Weight



The UM Type code must be ‘M’.


Met Lgth U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Metric Length Storage UM is used to identify

the basic storage unit of measure for Length





Met Area U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Metric Area Storage UM is used to identify the

basic storage unit of measure for Width and Length


The UM Basis must be ‘A’.



Met Unit U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Metric Unit Storage UM is used to identify the

basic storage unit of measure for unitized

products (such as Ladder Rungs, Gratings, etc.)


The UM Type code must be ‘B’.


Printing U/Msr

Met Wgt U/M Standard The Metric Weight Print UM identifies the default




UM

reference

print unit of measure for Weight controlled

products.


The UM Type must be ‘M’.

Met Lgth U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Metric Length Print UM is used to identify the

default print unit of measure for Length




Met Area U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Metric Area Print UM is used to identify the

default print unit of measure for Width and Length


The UM Basis code must be ‘A’.

The UM Type must be ‘M’.

Met Unit U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Metric Unit Print UM identifies the default

print unit of measure for unitized products.


The UM Type must be ‘B’.

Miscellaneous UM’s

Theo Basis Print U/M Standard

UM

reference

Identifies the Quantity UM used for the

theoretical Weight per unit of measure calculation

in pricing and costing by Cost UM or Price UM.

For example ‘THW’.

The UM Basis must be ‘T’.

Cut Basis Print U/M. Standard

UM

reference

Identifies the Unit of Measure used for charges or

costs per ‘CUT’. The UM is not used for inventory

control purposes but only for pricing and costing

functions which calculate Processing charge and

cost amounts on Quotes, Orders and Invoices.

The UM Basis must be ‘C’.

Hrly Basis Print U/M Standard

UM

reference

Identifies the unit of measure used for charges

and costs based on hours. It is not used for

inventory control purposes but only for pricing

and costing functions which calculate Processing

charge and cost amounts on Quotes, Orders and

Invoices.

The UM Basis must be ‘H’.

Met Ton U/M TON Standard

UM

reference

Identifies the default Unit of Measure to be used

for Imperial Base Measure weights in TONS.

Met Ton U/M TNE Standard

UM

reference

Identifies the default unit of measure to be used

for weights in Metric TON. The Metric Ton is a

unit of mass equal to 1,000 kilograms.

Material Frt U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Imperial Unit of Measure used to calculate

product weight in relation to Freight.

Metric Frt U/M Standard

UM

reference

The Metric Unit of Measure used to calculate the

product weight in relation with Freight.

Lot U/M Standard

UM

reference

Used for Cost or Charge purposes, it is the

default Unit of Measure for lot pricing.




Met Mat Cost U/M Standard

UM

reference

Identifies the default Imperial Cost Unit of

Measure to be used when an average rate of cost is

computed for products of mixed Groups. This must

be a weight related Unit of Measure.

Met Mat Cost U/M Standard

UM

reference

Identifies the default Metric Cost Unit of Measure

to be used when an average rate of cost is

computed for products of mixed Groups. This must

be a weight related Unit of Measure.

Max Sales Type Indicate how many Sales Types you use for Order

Processing and Sales Analysis.

Corporate Branch Branch

reference

The Buying Branch, as set up in the Branch table

and defined by a Product Installation Option.

NOTE: A Corporate Branch can NEVER be a Selling

or a Stocking Branch.

The Corporate Branch defined in the Installation

Options table cannot be entered as spaces. The

Branch entered can have the Usage Status A-Active

or I-Inactive but it cannot be flagged as D-

Deleted.

Default Prod Acs P P,T Determines the default product access method in

processing programs.

Valid codes are:

P Access by Group/Size/Grade

T Access by Tag No/Whs

Cost Unit of Measure

Met Wgt Cst U/M Used in internal calculations.

Met Wgt Cst U/M Used in internal calculations.

Met Lgth Cst U/M Used in internal calculations.

Met Lgth Cst U/M Used in internal calculations.

Met Area Cst U/M Used in internal calculations.

Met Area Cst U/M Used in internal calculations.

Met Unit Cst U/M Used in internal calculations.

Met Unit Cst U/M Used in internal calculations.

NOTE: Any modifications to the Installation Options must be done in conjunction with Invera

Customer Services Center.



CODING CONVENTIONS

In order to obtain the most efficient and beneficial results from Product coding, a great many factors,

including those mentioned above, must be considered. The manner in which products are coded is unique

to each service center and depends upon other variables such as types of products carried (coils, sheets,

plates, pipe, tubing, bar angles, beams, rebars, fittings), method of stocking and selling products and the

amount of detailed product information required. The following is a suggested guide to the coding of

different products that may be carried by your service center.

Carbon Steel Products

Structural Shapes

This category would include products such as angles, bar angles, standard ‘I’ beams, channels, cold

drawn rounds, cold and hot rolled round bars, rebars, wide flange beams.

In general, it is not necessary to compile detailed product history information for these products. As a

result, they do not usually require Inventory Tagging.

In some cases, however, Tagging may be a practical consideration. This process is beneficial for sites

that manage stock by warehouse locations. The product can have a Tagged Inventory Organization with

the Tag Master Required field set to ‘No’. For sites that rotate stock and for whom the identification of

older material is a necessity, the setting of the Tag Master Required field to ‘Yes’ is desirable.

Carbon Steel structurals are usually defined as Non-Gauge Required and Piece Controlled. The

Theoretical Weight Factor for these products is established at the Product Master level. The products are

generally costed in CWT (TNE for Metric sites), stocked in LBS (KGS for Metric sites) and have a

Theoretical Weight per FT (M for Metric sites). The ILC Codes 1 (Imperial) or 51 (Metric) are normally

applied.

Flat Products

Products such as cold and hot rolled steel coil and sheet, galvanized coil and sheet, pickled and oiled coil

and plate are among the products in this category.

Typically, detailed specifications and transaction tracing are required for such products. They should be

established as Tagged inventory with the Tag Master Required field set to ‘Yes’.

These products are generally Gauge Required and they can be Piece Controlled. Piece Control is

mandatory if eSTELpro has been, or is expected to be installed.

The TMW factor for these products can be established in either the Product Group or Group/Grade

Options tables. Carbon steel flat products are usually costed in CWT (TNE for Metric sites), inventoried

in LBS (KGS for Metric sites) and have a theoretical weight per SFT (SQM for Metric sites). The ILC

Codes 2 (Imperial) and 52 (Metric) are generally assigned to these products.



Pipe and Tubing

This category includes products such as rectangular, square and round tubing pipe.

If heat information or costing details is required, then the product should be established with the Tag

Master Required field set to ‘Yes’.

These products are usually not defined as Gauge Required. The Theoretical Weight Factor for these

products is assigned at the Product Master level. Pipe and tubing are generally Piece Control Required

products.

Carbon steel pipe and tubing products are usually costed in CFT (HM for Metric sites), stocked in FT (M

for Metric sites) and have a Theoretical Weight per FT (M for Metric sites). The ILC Codes 3 (Imperial)

and 53 (Metric) are generally applied to them.

Alloy Metals (Aluminum, Brass, Copper Stainless Steel)

Structural Shapes

Aluminum angles, round FC brass rods, stainless steel round bars are among products in this

classification.

These products are typically more expensive than carbon steel and may require the accumulation of

specifications and transaction history resulting in the need for them to be Tagged and Tag Master

Required.

Other Inventory characteristics of these structurals are similar to their carbon steel counterparts. They are

generally defined as Non-Gauge Required and Piece Controlled with their Theoretical Weight Factor at

the Product Master level.

Products such as these are usually costed in LBS (KGS for Metric sites), stocked in LBS (KGS for Metric

sites) and have a theoretical Weight per FT (M for Metric sites). ILC Codes 6 (Imperial) and 56 (Metric)

are normally assigned.

Flat Products

Products such as brass, aluminum and stainless steel coil, sheet and plate are included in this

classification.

These products are not unlike the carbon steel flat products in that they often require that specifications

and detailed product history information be recorded. They are generally Tagged with the Tag Master

Required field set to ‘Yes’. They are usually defined as Gauge Required and Piece Controlled.

The TMW Factor for these products is established in either the Product Group or Group/Grade Options

tables. These products are generally costed in LBS (KGS for Metric sites), inventoried in LBS (KGS for

Metric sites) and have a Theoretical Weight per SFT (SQM for Metric sites). ILC Codes 7 (Imperial) and

57 (Metric) are usually used.



Pipe and Tubing

This category includes products such as stainless steel, leaded brass and aluminum tubing, mechanical

tubing (DOM).

These products usually require transaction history and specification information resulting in their being

classified as Tagged and Tag Master Required. They are generally defined as Non-Gauge Required and

Piece Controlled. The Theoretical Weight for these products is maintained at the Product Master level.

Products such as these are usually costed in FT (M for Metric sites), stocked in FT (M for Metric sites)

and have a Theoretical Weight per FT (M for Metric sites). ILC Codes 8 (Imperial) and 58 (Metric) are

generally assigned.

Perforated Metal Products

Expanded Metal

Expanded metal is among the products in this category. These products do not usually require inventory

Tagging. They are generally Non-Gauge required and Piece Controlled with their Theoretical Weight at

the Product Master level.

Products such as these are normally costed in CSF (CSM for Metric sites), stocked in SFT (SQM for

Metric sites) and have Theoretical Weight per SFT (SQM for Metric sites). ILC Codes 4 and 54 are

generally applied to them.

Non-Dimensional Products

This category includes products such as ladder rungs, fittings and couplings.

Generally, these non-dimensional, unitized products do not require that specification or transaction

history be recorded. They are normally Tagged but not Tag Master Required. These products are usually

Non-Gauge Required with their Theoretical Weight at the Product Master level.

Non-Dimensional products are generally costed and inventoried with a Theoretical Weight per Piece or

Each (EA). These Units of Measure apply to both Metric and Imperial sites. As a result, these products

are not usually Piece Controlled. The ILC Codes 5 (Imperial) and 55 (Metric) are normally used.

Products Stored in Rolls

Wire and reinforcing mesh are among products in this classification. In general, it is not necessary to

compile detailed information for these products. As a result, they do not usually require inventory

Tagging.

These products are generally Piece Controlled and Non-Gauge Required. They are costed, stocked and

have a Theoretical Weight per ROL. This Unit of Measure applies to both Metric and Imperial sites. ILC

Codes 9 (Imperial) and 59 (Metric) are assigned.



INVENTORY CODING TABLES

eSTELPLAN inventory coding is comprised of user defined and eSTELPLAN defined tables. The user

defined reference tables include:

System Common Inventory Related Tables

Mills

Inventory Adjustment Reasons (General Ledger Chart of Accounts must be established)

Inventory Conditions

Color Codes

Chemical Elements

Default Chemical Elements Table

Product Category

Specifications

Specification Template

Management Summary Groups

Reasons

Equivalent Product

Inventory Control Reference Tables

Product Groups

Product Grades

Product Group/Grade

Product Master

Product Gauges

Company Standard Dimensions

Branch Standard Dimensions

Optional Inventory Control Reference Tables

Standard Physical Properties

Standard Locations

Product Tax Status

Alternate Language Descriptions

These tables should be created to meet the needs of your service center. It is important to note, however,

that these tables should be created and input in the order indicated above.



MILLS

Mill codes are used in various eSTELPLAN functions. They are used primarily in conjunction with Heat

Numbers, to store the chemical analysis of each heat in order that test reports may be printed for material

sold to customers. Mill codes are also used in other reporting and inquiry functions. For example, Mill

codes can be used as a selection criterion in the Stock Available Inquiry.

When establishing Mill codes, it is important to note that the Mill code identifies the mill that produced

the material, not necessarily the supplier that sold the material to you. As these codes are used only for

internal purposes such as inventory reporting and Stock Inquiry, we suggest that you establish Mill codes

that are meaningful and easy to remember.

Examples: USS – US Steel

ARM – ARMCO

If you require Mill Test Information, then at least one Mill Code must exist. If this is not the case, the

Mill code may serve as an optional feature to provide an additional selection criterion for reporting and

inquiry purposes.

Mills

1. Mill................ ARM

2. Name................ ARMCO

3. Statement of Origin1

4. Statement of Origin2

5. Src.................


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Mills screen


Mill Mill Code

Name Mill Name

Statement of Origin1 Statement of Origin - line 1

Statement of Origin2 Statement of Origin - line 2

Src Source Code Enter a source code. The code defaults to the




Mill/Heat record when adding a new Mill/Heat.

When adding or changing the Src code the user is

prompted to update ALL matching Mill/Heat records

with the new Source code. (See Warning below)

Usage Status A A, D or I Usage Status.

Warning

When changing the Source code – ALL tags with the same Mill code that are reserved to Sales Orders,

Bills of Lading, Invoices and Production Jobs must be reviewed.

Because the Source code determines if a Tag/Heat meets the Distinction of Material Origin requirements

Invera recommends running the Material Source Exception reports for listings of reservation records that

have been made invalid when the Source code is changed.



INVENTORY ADJUSTMENT REASONS

This table is used in Inventory and Purchase Cost Adjustments to provide a reason for the adjustment.

The code is entered for each adjustment and is stored in the Inventory Transaction table.

The Inventory Adjustment Reason differs from those in the Reason table in that you are provided with a

General Ledger account number. The Adjustment General Ledger account is used exclusively for the

distribution of Inventory Adjustments. When making a Purchase Cost Adjustment, you can use an

Inventory Adjustment Reason, but the distribution of the adjustment goes to one of the standard Unpaid

accounts.

Inventory Adjustment Reasons

1. Adjustment Reason... IP

2. Description......... Inventory Processing Error

3. Adjustment G/L Acct. 5944


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Inventory Adjustment Reasons screen

Field Modifications

You can change any of the fields in this table after the Inventory application is live, since all Inventory

Adjustments are on-line updates.



CONDITION CODES

Condition codes are used to describe the condition of inventory. In Purchase Order entry, they can serve

as either ‘pre-conditions’ to be verified at the time of receiving, or as conditions that describe the material

being purchased.

Conditions codes are also used in numerous eSTELPLAN Inventory applications to place a pre-defined

code or series of codes on a particular product in inventory. They are entered by means of a pop-up

window in such functions as Inventory Receipts and Inventory Processing. The codes are then stored as

part of the Product Detail and are displayed in different Inventory screens including the Stock Available

and eSTELview Tag inquiries.

These codes can be used as additional selection criteria for Inventory reporting and Stock Inquiry

purposes.

In setting up the Inventory Conditions, we suggest that you use easy-to-remember mnemonic codes.

Examples: CLN Clean RST Rusty

DRY Dry WVY Wavy

BNT Bent Edges OIL Oily Surface

The system stores the Inventory Conditions in a compressed format separated by slashes (e.g.,

BNT/RST/WVY), up to a maximum of 50 characters. Therefore, if you intend to use more than 12

conditions at one time, you must set them up as 2-character codes.

Condition Codes

1. Condition Code...... CLN

2. Condition Desc...... Clean


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Condition Codes screen

NOTE: Conditions codes are optional but it is recommended that at least one code exist.



COLOR CODES

Color codes are normally used to specify the size, grade or alloy of material for easy identification of

items in the warehouse.

Color is a required field on the eSTELPLAN Product Master. Therefore, at least one code must exist in

the Color reference table. You are permitted to enter a blank color at the Product Master level, however,

this blank color code must exist in the Color code table.

Examples:

Code Description

YEL Yellow

RYB Red/Yellow/Blue

The Color code is added to the Product Master in two ways. If you wish to associate color with specific

Group/Grade combinations, then you can establish individual Group/Grade records. When entering a

Product Master for a product with an existing Group/Grade record, the color is then defaulted and can be

overridden as necessary. Alternately, if no Group/Grade record exists, you must enter the color at the

time of Product Master entry.

Color Information

1. Color Code.......... YEL

2. Description......... Yellow


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Color Information screen

NOTE: In order to fully understand the additional functions and implications of Group/Grade record

use, refer to the Group/Grade Options section of this chapter.



CHEMICAL ELEMENTS

This table is used to record Chemical Elements that are not contained in the following list of standard

Chemical Elements. Those contained in the list are supplied with eSTELPLAN.

The elements entered in this table are used in various eSTELPLAN applications including Heat

Information entry. Elements entered in Heat Information are validated against this table.

Chemical Elements

1. Chemical Elements... Al

2. Description......... Aluminum


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Chemical Elements screen

The basic eSTELPLAN data tables provided on installation include these standard Chemical Elements:



Element Symbol Element Symbol Element Symbol

Actinium Ac Helium He Radium Ra

Aluminum Al Holmium Ho Radon Rn

Americium Am Hydrogen H Rhenium Re

Antimony Sb Indium In Rhodium Rh

Argon Ar Iodine I Rubidium Rb

Arsenic As Iridium Ir Ruthenium Ru

Astatine At Iron Fe Samarium Sm

Barium Ba Krypton Kr Scandium Sc

Berkelium Bk Lanthanum La Selenium Se

Beryllium Be Lawrencium Lr Silicon Si

Bismuth Bi Lead Pb Silver Ag

Boron B Lithium Li Sodium Na

Bromine Br Lutetium Lu Strontium Sr

Cadmium Cd Magnesium Mg Sulfur S

Calcium Ca Manganese Mn Tantalum Ta

Californium Cf Mendelevium Md Technetium Tc

Carbon C Mercury Hg Tellurium Te

Cerium Ce Molybdenum Mo Terbium Tb

Cesium Cs Neodymium Nd Thallium Tl

Chlorine Cl Neon Ne Thorium Th

Chromium Cr Neptunium Np Thulium Tm

Cobalt Co Nickel Ni Tin Sn

Copper Cu Niobium* Nb Titanium Ti

Curium Cm Nitrogen N Tungsten W

Dysprosium Dy Nobelium No Unnilhexium Unh

Einsteinium Es Osmium Os Unnilpentium Unp

Erbium Er Oxygen O Unnilquadium Unq

Europium Eu Palladium Pd Uranium U

Fermium Fm Phosphorus P Vanadium V

Fluorine F Platinum Pt Xenon Xe

Francium Fr Plutonium Pu Ytterbium Yb

Gadolinium Gd Polonium Po Yttrium Y

Gallium Ga Potassium K Zinc Zn

Germanium Ge Praseodymium Pr Zirconium Zr

Gold Au Promethium Pm

Hafnium Hf Protactinium Pa

*Columbium – Cb / Niobium – Nb

Niobium was officially adopted as the name of the element in 1949, but the name Columbium remains in

current use in metallurgy in the United States.



DEFAULT CHEMICAL ELEMENTS TABLE

The Default Chemical Elements Table defines a list of chemical element abbreviations to be used in

various eSTELPLAN applications.

You may specify up to 20 default elements in the table. These elements are validated against those

contained in the Chemical Elements table. Once entered, these elements are used in different Mill Test

applications. For example, when entering heat information, these elements are defaulted and you can then

make the necessary additions or deletions.

When adding a new Heat record, you are permitted to enter other valid Chemical Elements that are not

displayed in the Default Chemical Elements table. However, these additional Elements must exist in the

Chemical Elements table.

The list of elements specified varies according to the type of service center. For example, Carbon steel

distributors might only have a short list of approximately 10 elements, while a service center that handles

carbon steel, stainless steel, aluminum and other types of metal might have a more extensive list.

The entry of the Chemical Elements Table is optional. If not established, you are able to enter the

elements composing a heat in the related Mill Test programs. However, the existence of the table

facilitates the entry of heat information in that a standard list of elements is defaulted.


1. Key Code............ CHM

2.C Carbon 12.V Vanadium

3.Mn Manganese 13.N Nitrogen

4.P Phosphorus 14.Ti Titanium

5.S Sulfur 15.Sb Antimony

6.Si Silicon 16.Al Aluminum

7.Cu Copper 17.

8.Ni Nickel 18.

9.Cr Chromium 19.

10.Mo Molybdenum 20.

11.Sn Tin 21.

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy




JOMINY TABLE REFERENCE TABLE

Before you can start tracking Jominy Test results, you must set up the test positions in the Jominy Table

Reference table. This table is not accessible from the eSTELPLAN menu. In order to use this feature,

you must contact the Invera Support Center.

Jominy Table

1. Key Code............ JMY

Table Area

2. 1 11. 10 20. 28

3. 2 12. 12 21. 30

4. 3 13. 14 22. 32

5. 4 14. 16 23.

6. 5 15. 18 24.

7. 6 16. 20 25.

8. 7 17. 22 26.

9. 8 18. 24 27.

10. 9 19. 26

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Jominy Table – Test Positions

NOTE: Once these positions are set, they should not be altered, as this will affect all past and future

Jominy tests.



GROUP/JOMINY REFERENCE TABLE

A Reference table enables you to flag certain Product Groups as being eligible for Jominy entries. In this

table you flag those Groups that have Jominy applicable.

An entry having a Usage Status of A-Active in the Group/Jominy reference table specifies that the

identified Product Group is eligible to track Jominy Test Results. Only enter those Groups that have

Jominy applicable.

Group/Jominy Reference

1. Product Group ...... 6061CE


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Group/Jominy Reference Entry



PRODUCT CATEGORY

Product Categories are required in the Product Master table therefore, at least one code must exist. They

are also used in Product Enterprise Parameters. This table enables you to differentiate Product Categories

used in INVEX and eSTELPLAN.

These codes permit you to classify different products together for reporting purposes.

Examples: Flat Products

Extrusions

Structural Beams

Channels

Rectangular and Square Tubing

Product Categories can be used as selection criteria for the Stock Status and some Sales Analysis Reports.

NOTE: The development and use of Product Categories is unique to each service center and is

dependent upon a great many variables. We recommend that the formation of these

categories be considered carefully and discussed with your Installation Analyst to maximize

their reporting potential.

Product Category

1. Product Category.... FP

2. Description......... Flat Products


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Category screen



SPECIFICATIONS

This table is used to record Specifications associated with the physical tests performed on material. The

Specifications entered in this table are used in various eSTELPLAN applications.

Specifications

1. Specification....... RA

2. Description......... % REDNESS AREA

3. Measurement.........


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Specifications screen

NOTE: The Measurement field is for future implementation.



SPECIFICATION TEMPLATES

Specification Templates are used in Inventory transactions to store the exact material specifications for

Tag Master Required inventory. Each one may contain up to ten (10) different Specification

abbreviations. The Specifications entered in these templates are validated against the Specifications table.

The Specification Templates should be set up for each Product Group that represents a different type of

metal such as carbon steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper and brass, where the specifications are

applicable to all sizes and shapes within a type. The Specification Template Number is a single character,

alpha-numeric field. You can build up to thirty-five (35) Specification Templates, but it is recommended

that you build Templates for only those Specifications you wish to track.

Once established, the Specification Template Numbers should be assigned to the appropriate Product

Groups. Each eSTELPLAN Product Group can use one Template for Specifications.

Specification Templates

1. Spec Template No.... 4

Spec Abbrev

2. YIELD

3. ELONG

4. RA

5. ROCK

6. BEND

7. A262

8. SIZE

9. HARD

10. STL

11.

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Specification Templates screen

The Specification Templates are used in Inventory Functions, such as Inventory Receipts. When entering

Specifications for any Product in a designated Group, the corresponding Template is displayed and the

necessary Specification values can be entered. These Specifications and their values are then used and

displayed in different eSTELPLAN applications.

Example: A Product Group uses Specification Template Number 3. A product in that Group needs

only the Rockwell and Olsen specifications. When the Template bearing these specifications

is displayed in Inventory Receipts, you enter values for them. In Stock Inquiry, the Stock

Available and Tag Information screens display only those Specifications with the values you

entered for them, e.g. ROCK=65/OLS=700.



MANAGEMENT SUMMARY GROUPS

Management Summary Groups are used to combine many different Product Groups together for reporting

purposes at a global level.

These codes are used for reports including a selection by Product Group, such as the Stock Status and

Sales Analysis reports.

The Management Summary Group must be created before a Product Group record can be created.

The Management Summary Group is a required field on the eSTELPLAN Product Group, therefore at

least one code must exist.

Examples: Code Description

CF Carbon Steel Flat Products

AF Aluminum Flat Products

AT Alloy Tubing

M Miscellaneous

Management Summary Groups

1. Mgt Summary Group... AP

2. Description......... ALUMINUM PLATE

3. Markup Percentage...


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Management Summary Groups screen

NOTE: The Markup Percentage field is not used.



REASONS

These codes are used to assign a Reason to a transaction. Different transactions use different Reasons so

the Reason codes are identified by a Reason Type and then the actual code. You must set up the type

appropriate to where the reason is being used. In setting up Reasons, we suggest that you use easy-to

remember mnemonic codes.

In Tag Information maintenance, these codes are used to assign a Reject Reason to Tags with a Reject tag

status.

Examples: GA Not to Gauge Specified

LT Late Delivery

SZ Wrong Size

WRP Warped

Below is an explanation of the different Reason Types and their uses:

AT Activity Reason (used in eSTELman).

HD Hold Reason – used to identify the reason why material is held.

LQ Lost Quotation – identifies the reason an eSTELquote quotation or quotation item is deleted.

LT Late Reason.

RJ Reject Reasons – used in applications such as, eSTELpro, eSTELbarcodes and Credit Note entry

to identify the reason for material rejection.

RT Return-to-Stock.

TF Transfer Reason – used in Transfer Order Entry to identify the reason that material is being

transferred.



Reason

1. Reason Type......... LQ

2. Reason.............. MSP

3. Description......... Material Specifications


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Reasons screen



EQUIVALENT PRODUCT

Equivalent Products are used to group similar products that have different Groups or Grades on the

Inventory Requirements Forecast in order to analyze the total requirements of the products. The

groupings are user defined.

Example: Cold rolled coil and sheet, 18 Gauge, CQ may be considered equivalent because the

company always levels the coil to make sheets as needed.

Equivalent Product

1. Equivalent Product.. SC

2. Description......... Stainless Coils/Sheets

3. Invt Ctrl Method.... W

4. Common Dimension....


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Equivalent Product screen


Equivalent Product Used to group similar products having different

Groups or Grades on the Inventory Requirements

Forecast report in order to analyze the total

requirements for the products.

NOTE: Groupings are user-determined.

Example: Cold Rolled Coil and Sheet 18 Gauge, CQ,

may be considered equivalent because the

company always levels the coil to make

sheet.

Description Equivalent Product Description.

Invt Ctrl Method A, L, U, W Used to indicate that the quantity of a product is

maintained in inventory by one of the following

factors:

A Area (Square Feet or Square Meters) - Expanded

Metal

L Length (Feet or Meters) - Pipe, Mechanical

Tube




U Units (EA) - Ladder Rungs, Grating, etc.

W Weight (Pounds or Kilograms) - Coil - Bar

Angles, Plate, etc.

This field cannot be changed since it affects the

basic inventory coding even prior to live

operation.

Spaces are not a valid entry for this field. This

field is used by various Inventory Planning

reports to group products into common Inventory

Control Methods.



Common Dimension W, L Used to specify the common dimension for all the

Product Masters having the same Equivalent

Product. Valid codes are:

W Width

L Length

If there is no common dimension, the field can be

left blank.





PRODUCT GROUPS

The Product Group table is used to define the physical characteristics of each product and is the basis for

Inventory, Purchasing and Sales statistics record-keeping.

The Product Group determines the Unit of Measure in which the product is controlled in the inventory,

the Unit of Measure in which the cost is calculated, by what Measure the product can be priced and

whether both Piece Control and Quantity will be used to control the inventory level.

The Product Group identifies the type of product. We suggest that you use mnemonic codes when

establishing your Product Groups. The use of easy-to-remember codes enables service center personnel

to readily identify products.

Coding Product Groups

You may carry many different types of products with the same physical characteristics, but broken down

into several Groups. In that case, we suggest that you choose a common character in the Group to

summarize the different Groups.

Examples: AA6061 Aluminum Angles 6061

AC6061 Aluminum Coil

BA Bar Angles

CRC Cold Rolled Coil

CRS Cold Rolled Sheet

GC Galvanized Coil

GS Galvanized Sheet

HRC Hot Rolled Coil

HRCPO Hot Rolled Coil Pickled and Oiled

HRS Hot Rolled Sheet

The Product Group is used as selection criteria for various reports and inquiries including the Stock Status

Report. If you require a Stock Status Report for only hot rolled products, then you can select Groups

HRC to HRS, for example, and only hot rolled coil and sheet products are printed.



Product Groups

Accessing By Product Group

1. Product Group....... 3003C

2. Sequence No......... 1000

3. Description......... Aluminum Coil 3003

4. ILC Code............ 7

5. Price Per Check Cd.. 1

6. Piece Control Reqd.. Y

7. TMW Factor.......... .099000

8. Gauge Required...... Y

9. Spec Template No.... 1

10. Cst/Prc Decimals.... 2

11. Source Product Group

12. Mgmt Summary Group.. AF


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy 3-StdDim

Product Groups screen


Product Group Used to identify the type of product, usually by a

mnemonic code. There may be many different types

of products with the same physical

characteristics, but broken down into several

Groups.

The following characters should not be used in

Product Group codes:

* Asterisk

/ Slash

- Dash

‘ ’ Space

~ Tilde

Sequence No The Group Sequence Number is used for reporting.

It serves to classify Product Groups in a logical

manner for such applications as the Stock Status

Report.

Description Product Group Description.

ILC Code ILC

reference

A number from 1-99 used to identify and define the

method of control and the combination of inventory

control costing and printing Unit of Measure codes

to be used for products of this type. This field

cannot be changed after the Inventory application

is live.

Price Per Check Cd Price Per

Check

reference

Used to group and identify the valid Units of

Measure in which a product may be sold, thus

preventing, for example, pipe from being priced by

the square foot or other products from being sold

in inappropriate units. This field cannot be

changed after the Inventory application is live.




Piece Control Reqd N, Y Piece Control Required is used to indicate that

this Product Group requires that Pieces be

controlled in all programs. I.e. a product may be

bought or sold with both Pieces and Quantity

specified.

Although some products are not Piece Controlled,

in some cases, for the finished products ready to

ship, the Piece Control is a convenient way to

indicate multiple cuts on a Tag.

This field cannot be changed after the Inventory


TMW Factor Used in all weight calculations for flat rolled

products such as Sheet and Plate that are Gauge

(thickness) required. This factor is used in

various applications to compute Theoretical Weight

for Gauge Required products.

The Theoretical Material Weight (TMW) factor can

be established at the Product Group level or

Group/Grade levels. Before determining the most

appropriate method for establishing the

Theoretical Minimum Weight, we recommend that you

review the alternate ways in which the system

determines which TMW is used in various eSTELPLAN

functions. This information is contained in the

Group/Grade section of this chapter.

By default, this field cannot be changed once the

Inventory application is live (access is

controlled by a User Menu Option. Refer to the

section on Changing the TMW Factor for the

required procedures).

Gauge Required N, Y Gauge Required means that the Gauge (thickness)

control and identification is needed for the

Product Group. Enter Y-Yes to trigger entries for

gauge in various applications.



Spec Template No Used in Inventory transactions to store the exact

material specifications for Tag Master Required

Products. Each Product Group can use one Template

for specifications.

A space indicates that no template is required.

Cst/Prc Decimals 2 2, 3, 4 Used to specify the number of decimals to be used

for a product’s Cost or Price.

Valid codes are 2 (default), 3 or 4 decimals.



Source Product Group Product

Group

reference

Used to look up the Product Group from which a

product is obtained.

Example: Cold Rolled Sheet (CRS) may be produced

from Cold Rolled Coil (CRC).




Mgmt Summary Group Management Summary Groups are used as a more

general classification of products or materials

stocked by a service center. They combine many

different Product Groups together for reporting

purposes at a global level in reports including a

selection by Product Group.

A Management Summary Group must be created before

a Product Group record can be created as it is a

required field on the Product Group record.

Examples: CF - Carbon Steel Flat Products

M - Miscellaneous

Creating Group Standard Dimensions

The Product Group entry program can also be used to create Group Standard Dimensions that are used as

the basis for the creation of Company Standard Dimensions. Upon completion of a Product Group record

entry or modification, the program prompts “Create Group Standard Dimensions?”

Creating Group Standard Dimensions involves two processes. The first step is to define the appropriate

Standard Dimensions for each individual Product Group using the action bar choices provided. For

example, a coil product requires defined standard Widths and as it is Gauge Required, standard Gauges

must also be created.

Product Groups


1. Product Group....... CRC

2. Sequence No......... 10

3. Descrip Standard Widths

4. ILC Cod Std Width Width Range

5. Price P 36.0000" 36.0000" 38.5000"

6. Piece C 42.0000" 42.0000" 44.5000"

7. TMW Fac 48.0000" 48.0000" 49.5000"

8. Gauge R 60.0000" 60.0000" 63.0000"

9. Spec Te

10. Cst/Prc

11. Source

12. Mgmt Su

13. Usage S

Item No :

1-Width 2-Length 3-Gauge 4-Build

Standard Width Entry screen



Product Groups



2. Sequence No......... 10

3. Descrip Standard Gauges

4. ILC Cod Size Std Gauge Gauge Range

5. Price P 20 .0350 .0344 .0365

6. Piece C 20 .0375 .0366 .0388

7. TMW Fac 19 .0410 .0389 .0424

8. Gauge R 19 .0430 .0425 .0448

9. Spec Te 18 .0470 .0449 .0484

10. Cst/Prc 18 .0500 .0485 .0508

11. Source

12. Mgmt Su

13. Usage S

Item No :

1-Width 2-Length 3-Gauge 4-Build

Standard Gauge Entry screen

Action Bar Action

Width Add/Change Standard Widths.

Length Add/Change Standard Lengths.

Gauge Add/Change Standard Gauges.

Build Build Standard Dimensions.

Each Group Standard Dimension definition allows the entry of a range of Dimensions. The ranges

entered must not overlap. It is also important to note that Group Standard Dimensions that are

inconsistent with the Inventory Logic Control Code of the Product Group are not permitted. For example,

standard Widths cannot be established for a Product Group that is controlled per FT (such as Bar Angle,

Pipe).

The second step in the creation of Group Standard Dimensions involves building the records. When you

select the Build option from the action bar choices, you are presented with a pop-up window displaying

the combinations of the dimensions entered.



Product Groups



2. Sequence No......... 10

3. Des Group Standard Dimensions

4. ILC Std Width Std Length Std Gauge Size

5. Pri 36.0000" .0470 18

6. Pie 36.0000" .0500 18

7. TMW 42.0000" .0470 18

8. Gau 42.0000" .0500 18

9. Spe 48.0000" .0470 18

10. Cst 48.0000" .0500 18

11. Sou 55.0000" .0470 18

13. Usa 60.0000" .0470 18

60.0000" .0500 18

Item No :

Group Standard Dimensions Pop-up window

Some flat rolled products (such as coil) do not require the definition of standard Length dimensions. If,

for example, no standard Lengths are defined for a coil product, the program indicates this and requests

confirmation to continue the build procedure.

Product Group Setup for Late Payment Charges

You must establish a ZZZZZZ Product Group for miscellaneous, non-stock products. It is also used in

the calculation of Late Payment Charges, as the Invoice Entry created contains a miscellaneous product

line used to charge the amount of the Late Payment Charges.

The ZZZZZZ product group for Late Charges should be established in the following manner.

Product Group ZZZZZZ

Desc LATE PAYMENT CHARGES

ILC Code 5

Price Per Check Cd 1

Piece Control Reqd N

Gauge Reqd N

Cst/Prc Decimals 2

Usage Status A



Scrap Product Groups

Scrap Product Groups should also be created for use in various eSTELPLAN applications including

Inventory Processing. These groups should be weight controlled, non-Gauge Required and the Piece

Control field should be set to N-No.



Product ILC Price/ Pcs TMW Gauge Spec

Group Description Code Check Cntl Factor Req Temp Dec

AA6061 Aluminum Angles 6061 6 2 Y 0.000000 N 2 4

AC5052 Aluminum Coil 5052 7 1 Y 0.000000 N 2 4

AF6061 Aluminum Flat 6061 6 2 Y 0.000000 N 2 4

AP6061 Aluminum Plate 6061 7 3 Y 0.000000 N 2 4

AS5052 Aluminum Sheet 5052 7 3 Y 0.000000 N 2 4

AT6061 Aluminum Tube 6061 8 2 Y 0.000000 N 2 4

BA Bar Angle 1 2 Y 0.000000 N 1 2

BC 70/30 Brass Coil (CDA 260) 7 1 Y 0.000000 N 4 4

BR Brass Round (CDA 360) 6 2 Y 0.000000 N 4 4

BS 70/30 Brass Sheet (CDA 260) 7 3 Y 0.000000 N 4 4

BT Brass Tubing (CDA 330) 8 2 Y 0.000000 N 4 4

CDR Cold Drawn Round 1 2 Y 0.000000 N 1 2

CRC Cold Rolled Steel Coil 2 1 Y 0.283300 Y 1 2

CRS Cold Rolled Sheet 2 3 Y 0.283300 Y 1 2

DOM Mechanical Tubing - DOM 8 2 Y 0.000000 N 1 4

EX Expanded Metal 4 3 Y 0.000000 N 1 2

FIT Fitting 5 1 N 0.000000 N 5 2

GC Galvanized Coil 2 1 Y 0.283500 Y 1 2

GS Galvanized Sheet 2 3 Y 0.283500 Y 1 2

HRPOC Hot Rolled Pickled/Oiled Coil 2 1 Y 0.291000 Y 1 2

I Standard "I" Beam 1 2 Y 0.000000 N 1 2

WFB Wide Flange Beam 1 2 Y 0.000000 N 1 2

LR Ladder Rung 5 1 N 0.000000 N 5 2

N Nails 5 4 N 0.000000 N 2 2

P Pipe 3 2 Y 0.000000 N 1 2

PL Plate 2 3 Y 0.000000 N 1 2

RE Rebar 1 2 Y 0.000000 N 1 2

REC Rectangular Tubing 3 2 Y 0.000000 N 1 2

RT Round Tubing 3 2 Y 0.000000 N 1 2

S Scrap 10 1 N 0.000000 N 5 2

SC304 Stainless Steel Coil 304 7 1 Y 0.283700 Y 3 4

SMT Seamless Mechanical Tubing 8 2 Y 0.000000 N 3 4

SR303 Stainless Steel Round 303 6 2 Y 0.000000 N 3 4

SS304 Stainless Steel Sheet 304 7 3 Y 0.283700 Y 3 4

ST304 Stainless Steel Tubing 304 8 2 Y 0.000000 N 3 4

TR5662 Titanium Round 5662 6 2 Y 0.000000 N 4 4

WM Wire Mesh 9 5 Y 0.000000 N 5 2

ZZZZZZ Miscellaneous 5 1 N 0.000000 N 5 2

eSTELPLAN Sample Product Groups



PRODUCT GRADES

Product Grades are used to classify products according to their metal specification. They subdivide

products with the same Group and Size, but with different usage or physical characteristics.

The product Grade is a mandatory component of the Product Master and Group/Grade Options tables

therefore, you must create these codes before the other tables can be entered.

We recommend that you define the product Grade as a mnemonic for the actual Grade. You are permitted

to have a blank (spaces) product Grade code.

Examples:

Actual Grade eSTELPLAN

Product Grade

ASTM A-36 36

Commercial Quality CQ

A-106 106

6061-T4 6061T4

Lock Forming Quality LFQ

Grades

1. Grade............... 1

2. Grade Description... 1/4 Hard (HO1)


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Grades screen



The Product Grade is used as a selection criterion in numerous eSTELPLAN functions, including the

Stock Available Inquiry and the Stock Status Report. The coding of Product Grades is significant in that

it can affect how products are selected and displayed in the Stock Available Inquiry. It is possible to

select Stock Available by a Grade template. For example, if you wish to see stock for only those products

with a Grade range starting with the letter ‘C’, you would enter the pre-defined Product Group and Size

and when entering the Grade it would only be necessary to enter ‘C*’. All products within the specified

Group and Size with a Grade starting with the letter ‘C’ (such as ‘CQ’, ‘C1008’) are then displayed.

NOTE: The Grade Template feature uses the ‘*’ character. As a result, the ‘*’ character should not

be used as part of the Grade code.



PRODUCT GROUP/GRADE

This table identifies default characteristics of products of different Sizes within a Product Group and

Grade combination.

It is used to control inventory weight calculations for Gauge Required products. If the Theoretical

Material Weight factor is set in the Product Group/Grade table, the system uses this figure to calculate the

weight for Gauge Required products. It is important to note that the system performs the following steps

to get the Theoretical Material Weight Factor used to calculate the weight of Gauge Required products.

The Group/Grade table is checked first. If there is no Theoretical Material Weight Factor in this table

then the system verifies the Theoretical Material Weight Factor at the Product Group level. For non-

Gauge Required products, the system checks the Theoretical Weight on the Product Master.

The Group/Grade table is also used to default a Color code to the Product Master. When entering a

Product Master for a product with an existing Group/Grade record, the color from the Group/Grade table

is defaulted and can be overridden as necessary.

In this table, you must establish a Scrap Product Master that is used as the default Scrap Product for the

corresponding Group and Grade in Inventory Processing. The combination of Scrap Group, Size and

Grade is validated against the Product Master table.

Once the Group, Grade, Theoretical Material Weight Factor, Color code, Scrap Product Master and Usage

Status have been entered, elements for the Default Chemistry Table are displayed. You may enter

acceptable ranges of values for each of the elements in the table. If no value is entered for the Minimum

and Maximum ranges, then the element is not saved in the table (controlled by the AZE=X Product

Installation Option). However, additional elements and their corresponding ranges can be entered at any

time.

NOTE: If you intend to default Color codes to Product Masters through the use of the Group/Grade

table, you must establish a Scrap Product Master for each Group/Grade, before the entry of

Group/Grade records.



Product Group/Grade Options


2. Grade............... 2D

3. TMW Factor.......... .283700

4. Color Code.......... NA

5. Scrap Product Group. SSSCR

Scrap Size..........

Scrap Grade......... NA


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Group/Grade Options – first screen

Product Group/Grade Options


2. Grade............... 2D

7. Chemical Elements...

Element Minimum Maximum Element Minimum Maximum Element Minimum Maximum

C .0590 .0610 Mn 1.8000 1.9000 P .0299 .0350

S .0010 .0055 Si .3500 .5100 Ni 8.0000 9.1000

Cr 18.0000 18.5000 N .0400 .0700

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Group/Grade Options – second screen




Product Group Product

Group

reference

Enter the Product Group.

Grade Grade

reference

Enter the Product Grade.

TMW Factor Used in all weight calculations for flat rolled

products such as Sheet and Plate that are Gauge

(thickness) required. This factor is used in

various applications to compute Theoretical Weight

for Gauge Required products.

The Theoretical Material Weight (TMW) factor can

be established at the Product Group level or

Group/Grade levels.






Color Code Color

reference

The code used to identify material in the

Warehouse.

Scrap Product Group Product

Group

reference

eSTELPLAN allows identification and tracking of

scrap separately from normal material. The Scrap

Product Group is a component of the Scrap Product

Master. These Product Masters are used in

Inventory Processing to default the leftover

weight of a product consumption quantity, i.e. the

scrap left after the processing. At least one

Scrap Product Master must exist in order for the

Group/Grade options table to be built.

Scrap can be tracked at a global level (Product

Group only) or more specifically (Group, Grade)

depending upon the level of detail required.

Scrap Groups are usually established for each

major type of metal (Aluminum Scrap, Carbon Steel

Scrap, Stainless Steel Scrap) because of the large

difference in value. In order to group the

various scraps, you may also take into account

other factors such as Grade and Chemical

properties.

Scrap Size This is the Size entered for the Scrap Product

Group. Scrap Product Size is used by companies

that wish to track the quantity of scrap generated

by specific product size. This level of detail

for recording scrap is generally not required.

Scrap Grade Product

Master

reference

Scrap can be tracked at a global level (by Product

Group only) or more specifically (by Group and

Grade) depending upon the level of detail

required.

For Scrap Product Masters and Product/Grade

options, the use of the Grade field is optional as

the Grade is used to subdivide products with

different usage, chemical or physical

characteristics according to their metal

specifications.




Chemical Elements Allows entry of values for Chemical Elements.

These values are validated when Chemical Element

entries are made in various processing programs

for the corresponding Group/Grade combination.

NOTE: The Product Installation Option AZE=X

allows you to enter chemical elements that

MUST be 0.



PRODUCT MASTERS

Product Masters are used to classify inventory according to the stock-keeping characteristics of your

service center.

A Product Master consists of a unique combination of Product Group, Size and Grade along with the

inventory control characteristics of that product. These combinations determine the valid products that

may be bought and sold within eSTELPLAN.

As there are many factors to be considered when establishing Product Masters, we recommend that you

first set up your Product Masters on paper using the input forms provided.

Product Masters within a Group need not all have the same control characteristics, but we recommend for

ease of use and continuity that at least the Inventory Organization be the same.

NOTE: The development and use of Product Masters is unique to each service center. As their

creation is fundamental to the operation of eSTELPLAN and the manner in which they are

created affects a variety of applications, we strongly urge you to discuss their development

with your Installation Analyst.

Examples:

Product Group Size eSTELPLAN

Size Code

Angles 2" X 2" X 1/4" 2214

Wide Flange Beam 12" @ 27 LBS/FT 1227

Expanded Metal 1/2" 16 Gauge 1216

Reinforcing Bar #4 4

Plate 3/16" 316

Coil and Sheet 12 Gauge 12

or .1046 1046

Pipe 10" Schedule 40 10-40

or 10.75"

O.D. X .365 wall 10.75-365

Wire Mesh 6" x 6" 6/6 6666

Nails 6" Concrete 6C



Product Master

Accessing By Group/Size/Grade


2. Size................ .009

3. Grade............... 14H

4. Sequence Number..... 10000

5. Size Desc........... .009

6. Invt Organization... WT

7. Theoretical Weight..

8. Tag Master Required. Y

9. Bundle Ctrl Reqd.... N

10. Use Base Length Unit Y

11. Product Category.... NA

12. Freight Class.......

13. Color Code..........

14. Equivalent Product..

15. Buyer...............

16. Control Type........

17. Thickness...........

18. Usage Status........ I

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy 3-StdDim 4-ExtDesc

Product Master screen



Group

reference

Used to identify the type of product, usually by a

mnemonic code. There may be many different types

of products with the same physical

characteristics, but broken down into several

Groups.

Size The product Size should identify the physical

shape of the product, excluding width or length.

We recommend using the industry standard to

classify different sizes. You should remove any

character abbreviations such as '(FT) and "

(Inches).

Grade Grade

reference

Used to classify products according to their metal

specification i.e. to subdivide products with the

same Group and Size but with different usage,

chemical or physical characteristics.

Sequence Number The Sequence number plays a very important role in

various eSTELPLAN applications. This Sequence

number is used to arrange the Product

Group/Size/Grade combinations in ascending order

of smallest Size/lowest Grade to largest

Size/highest Grade within a Product Group so that

the products are presented in a logical manner in

Inventory reports and inquiries (such as the Stock

Available Inquiry and the Stock Status Report).

Example: 3/16" A-36 plate is smaller in size

than a ½" A-36 plate, but the Size

codes (316 and 12) would not reflect

this difference accurately if inquiries

and reports were sorted by Size alone.

Therefore, it is necessary to attach a

lower Sequence number to the 3/16"




Plate than to the 1/2" plate.

We suggest that within each Product Group, you

assign Sequence Numbers in multiples of at least

200, starting with 5000 as the lowest. This

provides the flexibility to add Group/Size/Grade

combinations at a later date.

Size Desc The Size Description field must contain the full

description of the Size. As the Product Group and

Grade each have their own description, you do not

need to refer to either in this field. All three

descriptions are printed on Inventory related

reports and forms.

Examples:

For Bar Angle Size 2214, enter 2" X 2" X 1/4"

For Coil Size 12, enter 12 Gauge

For Sheet Size 030, enter 030 or .030 Min or .030

Nom

Invt Organization L, LT, WL,

WT, WLT or

T

Used to determine what Dimensions are used to

control the Product Item records.

Valid options are:

L by Length

LT by Length and Tag #

T by Tag #

WL by Width and Length

WT by Width and Tag #

WLT by Width, Length and Tag #

This field cannot be changed once the Inventory


In reference to the Inventory Organization and Tag

Master Required fields, it is important to note

that certain conditions apply. If the Product

Group is Gauge Required, then the Inventory

Organization must be ‘T’, ‘WT’, ‘WLT’, ‘LT’ and

the Tag Master Required field must be set to

‘Yes’.

Theoretical Weight The Theoretical Weight is the weight per Inventory

Control Base Unit of Measure i.e. Pounds per Foot,

Kilograms per Square Meter. It is used to compute

the weight of the product for non-Gauge Required

products.






Tag Master Required N, Y Used to create and update Tag Master Information

for products controlled by Tag Number. It

provides automatic Tracing of all transactions on

that Tag, as well as additional material

specifications (such as Heat Number, Chemical

Analysis, Specification Templates) and the ability

to maintain a Transient Inventory (Work-In-

Process) which may be viewed and printed.

In reference to the Inventory Organization and Tag

Master Required fields, it is important to note

that certain conditions apply. If the Product

Group is Gauge Required, then the Inventory

Organization must be ‘T’, ‘WT’, ‘WLT’, ‘LT’ and




the Tag Master Required field must be set to

‘Yes’.



Bundle Ctrl Reqd For future implementations.

Use Base Length Unit Y N, Y Used to control the printing and display of the

Dimensions for Products with Inventory

Organization ‘L’ or ‘LT’ only.

Based on this code, the default entry mode for all

inventory transactions for the product will be in

either the smallest unit of measure possible for

the product (inches or Millimeters) or in the

standard eSTELPLAN entry and display format for

length controlled products (feet and inches or

meters).

Valid codes are:

N Product length is entered and displayed in

Feet and Inches for Imperial products and

Meters and decimals of Meters for Metric

products.

Y Product length is entered and displayed in

Inches only for Imperial products and

Millimeters only for Metric products.



Product Category Product

Category

reference

Used to classify several Product Masters within

categories for reporting purposes.

Freight Class Used to indicate the Product Freight Class.

Color Code Color

reference

The code used to identify material in the

Warehouse.

Defaulted from the corresponding Group/Grade

record if it exists.

Equivalent Product Equivalent

Products

reference

Used to group similar products that have different

Groups or Grades on the Inventory Requirements

Forecast in order to analyze the total

requirements of the products.

Buyer Buyer

reference

Used to obtain a list of open Purchase Orders or

purchasing statistics by the person who initiated

the purchase.

Control Type Used for Area Controlled Coils for the calculation

and entry of Coil Length in the Pieces field of

the Group/Size/Grade entry line.

Thickness Specifies the thickness of the material. Used in

eSTELquote when a Burning Cost Table record is

used to default the Item Processing Charge and

Cost.

The Thickness is expressed:

- in Inches if your Base Unit of Measure is

Imperial.

- in Millimeters if your Base Unit of Measure is

Metric.



Extended Description

The action bar option, ExtDesc, allows for the entry of an extended product master description.

Miscellaneous Product Billing

For the billing of miscellaneous products with different Inventory Logic Control characteristics, you

should set up at least one miscellaneous Product Master for each Group having the same control

characteristics. The product description can then be overridden on each transaction as required.

Scrap Product Masters

Product Masters should be created for each Scrap Product Group. This provides you with the ability to

accumulate Scrap Product information. In addition, you can sell and cost these items. Scrap Products

should be Weight Controlled and have an Inventory Organization of ‘T’.

Requirements for Late Payment Charges

If you are going to charge customers Late Payment Charges for overdue Accounts Receivable open items,

you must create a Product Master with the following characteristics.

A miscellaneous Product Master must be set up having

A Product Group of ‘ZZZZZZ’

A blank Size

A blank Grade

Inventory Organization = T

Tag Master Required = N

Example: Product Group ZZZZZZ

Size (blank)

Grade (blank)

Invt Organization T

Tag Master Required N

Usage Status A

This Product Master is used in the Invoice Entry Item for late charges.

NOTE: The fields mentioned above are the mandatory fields that have specific coding requirements

for the Late Payment Charges. You must enter the remaining fields as per your own

requirements and codes.



RUN: 14Dec04 11:28 eSTELPLAN inrprm000232 PAGE: 2 Product Master Group Size Grade Seq No Size Desc Org Theo Wgt TMR Bd/Rq Fmt Cat FrCl Clr Eqv Prd Byr Thick Sts 3003C 063 H32 5000 .063 WT Y N Y S RED 0.0000 A 3003C 063 H34 5100 .063 WT Y N Y S RED 0.0000 A 3003C 071 H32 5300 .071 WT Y N Y S RED 0.0000 A 3003C 071 H34 5400 .071 WT Y N Y S RED A 3003S 063 H12 5000 .063 WLT Y N Y FP 1 RED 0.0000 A 3003S 063 H12R 5100 .063 WLT Y N Y FP 1 RED 0.0000 A 3003S 063 H14 5200 .063 WLT Y N Y FP 1 RED 0.0000 A 3003S 063 H14B 5300 .063 WLT Y N Y FP 1 RED 0.0000 A 3003S 063 H14W 5400 .063 WLT Y N Y FP 1 RED 0.0000 A 5052C 063 H32 5000 .063 WT Y N Y FP 1 RED 0.0000 A 5052C 063 H34 5100 .063 WT Y N Y FP 1 RED 0.0000 A 5052C 071 H32 5200 .071 WT Y N Y FP 1 RED 0.0000 A 5052C 071 H34 5300 .071 WT Y N Y FP 1 RED 0.0000 A 230C 025 0 5000 .025" WT Y N Y FP 1 RED FBW 0.0000 A 230C 025 1 5100 .025" WT Y N Y FP 1 RED AB 0.0000 A 230C 025 2 5200 .025" WT Y N Y FP 1 RED AB 0.0000 A 230C 025 3 5300 .025" WT Y N Y FP 1 RED FBW 0.0000 A 330T 1040 0 5000 1" OD X .0420 Wall LT 0.465700 Y N N RT 1 NA 0.0000 A 330T 1040 1 5100 1" OD X .0420 Wall LT 0.465700 Y N N RT 1 NA 0.0000 A 330T 1040 2 5200 1" OD X .0420 Wall LT 0.465700 Y N N RT 1 NA 0.0000 A 330T 1040 3 5300 1" OD X .0420 Wall LT 0.465700 Y N N RT 1 NA 0.0000 A 330T 1040 4 5400 1" OD X .0420 Wall LT 0.465700 Y N N RT 1 NA 0.0000 A BA 22316 36 5000 2" x 2" x 3/16" L 2.440000 N N N S NA 0.0000 A BA 22316 CQ 5100 2" x 2" x 3/16" L 2.440000 N N N S NA 0.0000 A BA 2214 36 5200 2" x 2" x 1/4" L 3.190000 N N N S NA 0.0000 A BA 2214 CQ 5300 2" x 2" x 1/4" L 3.190000 N N N S NA 0.0000 A BA 22516 CQ 5400 2" x 2" x 5/16" L 3.920000 N N N S NA 0.0000 A BA 22516 36 5500 2" x 2" x 5/16" L 3.920000 N N N S NA 0.0000 A BA 212112316 36 5600 2 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 3/16" L 2.440000 N N N S NA 0.0000 A BA 212112316 CQ 5700 2 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 3/16" L 2.440000 N N N S NA 0.0000 A WFB 1245 36 5100 12 (x 8 x .366) @ 45 L 45.000000 N N N S NA 0.0000 A WFB 1250 36 5200 12 (x 8 x .371) @ 50 L 50.000000 N N N S NA 0.0000 A CRC 20 CQ 5000 20 Gauge WT Y N Y FP YEL AB 0.0000 A CRC 20 DQ 5100 20 Gauge WT Y N Y FP YEL JAS 0.0000 A CRC 20 DQAK 5200 20 Gauge WT Y N Y FP YEL 0.0000 A CRC 19 CQ 5300 19 Gauge WT Y N Y FP YEL AB 0.0000 A CRC 19 DQ 5400 19 Gauge WT Y N Y FP YEL 0.0000 A CRC 19 DQAK 5500 19 Gauge WT Y N Y FP YEL 0.0000 A CRC 18 CQ 5600 18 Gauge WT Y N Y FP YEL AB 0.0000 A CRC 18 DQ 5700 18 Gauge WT Y N Y FP YEL LSW 0.0000 A *** End of Report ***

Samples of eSTELPLAN Product Masters




In the Product Master maintenance program, the Group Standard Dimensions created in the Product

Group program are used to create Company Standard Dimension records. Upon completion of Product

Master entry or modification, the prompt “Create Company Standard Dimensions?” is displayed. The

display of this message is controlled by the ASD=X Product Installation Option. If you respond ‘Yes’, a

pop-up window is displayed containing a compilation of the Company Standard Dimensions created.

Product Master


1. Product Group....... DOM

2. Size................ 112188

3. Grade............... 1026

4. S

5. S Build Company Standard Dimensions

6. I

7. T Std Width Std Length Std Gauge Size

8. T 12' 112188

9. B 20' 112188

10. U

11. P

12. F

13. C

14. E

15. B

16. U

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy 3-StdDim

Build Company Standard Dimensions Pop-up window

Only those Group Standard Dimension records that match the Group and Size of the Product Master are

displayed. You can delete any records that you do not need by pressing <F6>.

You cannot use this program to add new Group Standard Dimensions. You can only create them at the

Product Group level. You cannot use the Product Master maintenance program to create additional

dimension records. Additional records are added or modified through the use of the Company Standard

Dimension maintenance program.



PRODUCT GAUGES

The Product Gauge table is used to control and validate the entry of Gauge Required products in such

applications as Sales and Purchase Order Entry and Inventory Receipts.

In the Product Gauge table, you assign a range of appropriate gauges to a defined Product Group and

Size. You must enter a Product Gauge record for each Size of every Product Group that requires Gauge

control.

Example: Galvanized coil in Size 18 has a Gauge range of .0466 to .0566. This would be entered as:

Product Gauge

Accessing By Group/Size

1. Product Group....... GC

2. Size................ 18

3. Gauge From.......... .0466"

4. Ending Gauge........ .0566"

5. Nominal Gauge....... .0516"


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Gauge screen

Product Gauges should be established to suit your product classification. For example, you may have

overlapping Gauges within Product Groups where material is not strictly controlled and variances are

acceptable.



Product Gauge


1. Product Group....... CSS

2. Size................ 20

3. Gauge From.......... .0344"

4. Ending Gauge........ .0388"



Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Overlapping gauge – first screen

Product Gauge


1. Product Group....... CSS

2. Size................ 21

3. Gauge From.......... .0323"

4. Ending Gauge........ .0358"



Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Overlapping gauge – second screen

Once the Gauge ranges are established, they are used in a wide variety of eSTELPLAN functions. For

example, when entering a Gauge Required product in Sales Order Entry, the system requires the input of

a specific Gauge. At that time, the Product Gauge table is scanned to validate that the Gauge entry falls

within the specified range for that Product Group and Size.



The Gauge is also used as a selection criterion in the Stock Available Inquiry and Stock Status Report. It

is important to note that there is a difference in the manner in which different Gauge Required products

are sorted in the Stock Available Inquiry.

Bar related products (such as Hex Bars, Round Bars) that are Gauge Required are sorted by

Group/Gauge/Grade/Width-Length/Warehouse/Tag. Gauge Required flat products (such as coil, sheet)

are sorted by Group/Width-Length/Grade/Warehouse/Gauge/Tag. For products with an overlapping

Gauge range, the selection of products in the Stock Available screen is dependent upon the product Size.

Example: Product Group CSS - Size 20 has a Gauge range from .0344 to .0388

Product Group CSS - Size 21 has a Gauge range from .0323 to .0358

When selecting products by Size in the Stock Available Inquiry, products received in Size 20

with a Gauge of .0344 are displayed under Size code 20 rather than 21.

Alternately, if you choose to select products by Gauge in the Stock Available Inquiry and

you enter a Gauge of .0344, products in Sizes 20 and 21 are displayed.



COMPANY STANDARD DIMENSIONS

Company Standard Dimensions are a critical part of inventory coding. They are used as the basis for

product statistics and balance information that are in turn used in such functions as Inventory Forecasting.

These dimensions must be established for all products that you wish to monitor.

It is imperative that you establish some dimensions for use when data starts to be accumulated through

various transactions. The system automatically creates a ‘0’ dimension for all products that have an

existing Product Master. This ‘0’ record is used as a generic Standard Dimension. When entering

transactions for products with no established Standard Dimension, the information from the transaction is

stored under this ‘0’ Standard Dimension.

Example: A Product Master for 3/16" plate is created (PL 316 CQ) and no Standard Dimensions are

established for this product.

This product is then received into inventory with a Dimension of 48 X 96. The Product

Detail record reflects the actual dimensions of 48 X 96. It reflects the Receipt as it was

actually made. As there are no Standard Dimensions for this product, all transactions (Order

Entry, Invoicing) are stored under the ‘0’ Dimension that is created by the system.

There are two methods that can be used to create Standard Dimensions. The first is a two-step creation

process that can be executed at the time of Product Group and Product Master entry. The second method

uses a standard entry program to manually create records on an individual basis.

It is recommended that the two-step Company Standard Dimension build process be used when

establishing new products where numerous dimensions need to be created. For the creation of individual

records, or for the maintenance of existing Company Standard Dimensions, the entry program is used.

Company Standard Dimensions can be added or modified once the inventory related eSTELPLAN

applications are live. However, it is impossible to change historical information, such as Product

Statistics, associated with specific Standard Dimensions.




1. Product Group....... 230S

2. Size................ 025

3. Grade............... 0

4. Standard Width...... 36.0000"

5. Standard Length..... 96.0000"

6. Standard Gauge......

7. Width............... 36.0000" 36.0000"

8. Length.............. 96.0000" 96.0000"

9. Gauge...............

10. Remark Description..

11. Turnover Objective.. 2.00

12. Index Objective..... .50

13. Product ABC Class... A

14. Group ABC Class.....

15. Corp. Average Cost..

16. Corp. Avg Incm Cost.

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Company Standard Dimensions – first screen

=



2. Size................ 025

3. Grade............... 0




17. Preferred Vendor No.

18. Pref Ship-From No..

19. Preferred Carrier...

20. Min. P/O Quantity..

21. Mat Rplc Cost......

22. Mat Rplc Cost U/M..

23. Freight Cost.......

24. Freight Cost U/M...

25. Total Rplc Cost....

26. Next Vendor Cost...

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Company Standard Dimensions – second screen





2. Size................ 025

3. Grade............... 0




27. Remark Template....

28. Next Cost Date.....

29. Usage Status....... A

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Company Standard Dimensions – third screen



Group

reference


Size Enter the Product Size.

Grade Grade/

Product

Master

reference


Standard Width Enter the Standard Width.

Standard Length Enter the Standard Length.

Standard Gauge Enter the Standard Gauge.

Width Enter the Width range.

Length Enter the Length range.

Gauge Enter the Gauge range.

Remark Description A user defined text of up to 50 characters used to

add descriptive information about a transaction.

Turnover Objective Used to indicate the desired level of inventory

turnover for the Branch for this product. Entered

manually.

Index Objective Used to indicate the desired level of

profitability to be achieved for all Branches for

this product. Entered manually.

The actual Inventory Index is calculated as the

Gross Profit times the Turnover rate.

Example: A product with a 20% gross profit and a

Turnover rate of 4.5 would have an




Inventory Index of 20 X 4.5 = 90.

Product ABC Class The ABC rank of a Standard Product across all

Product Groups. There is a Company Product ABC

and a Branch Product ABC:

- The Company Product ABC compares a product

across all Branches and all Groups.

- The Branch Product ABC compares a product

against all products sold at the Branch.

Group ABC Class The ABC rank of a Standard Product across all

Product Masters within a Group. There is a

Company Group ABC and a Branch Group ABC.

The Company Group ABC compares a product across

all Branches and all Product Masters within its

Group.

The Branch Group ABC compares a product for that

Branch against all Product Masters within its

Group.

Corp. Average Cost Used to calculate the Product Item Average Cost on

a daily basis.

Corp. Avg Incm Cost Corporate Average Incoming Cost.

Preferred Vendor No. Vendor

reference

This represents the carrier mostly used by a

Customer when the Delivery Method is CC-Common

Carrier. It is also the Vendor Number from which

a product is usually purchased.

Pref Ship-From A valid Ship-From Number, for the preferred

Vendor, at which the material is usually produced.

This field can be blank if there is no preferred

Vendor.

Preferred Carrier Vendor

reference

The preferred carrier must be a valid Vendor.

However, the field can be blank.

Min. P/O Quantity Enter the Minimum PO Quantity for this Standard

Dimension. Used as a selection criteria in some

Inventory Planning functions.

Mat Rplc Cost This is the Alternate Replacement Cost by the ILC

Unit of Measure of the product.

Example:

The Replacement Cost for a Pipe product might be

in CWT but the selling Unit of Measure is FT or

CFT. Therefore, you enter the Alternate

Replacement Cost and Cost UM (as CWT) for a pipe

product, and the Material Replacement Cost is

calculated and displayed (in FT or CFT).

If either the Replacement Cost or the selling Unit

of Measure is changed, the other is recalculated

based on the new value.

Mat Rplc Cost U/M Unit of

Measure

reference

The Unit of Measure used for the material

Replacement Cost.

Freight Cost Used to record the Freight cost.

Freight Cost U/M Unit of

Measure

reference

Total Rplc Cost The total cost to replace the material: material

cost + freight cost. The total cost is computed




by the system and displayed in the ILC Cost Unit

of Measure. The total Replacement Cost is the

cost used for all pricing and purchasing reports

as it is the actual cost to replace the product.

Next Vendor Cost This is the next Material Replacement Cost and

effective date. The next Replacement Cost is

saved in the same Unit of Measure as the Alternate

Replacement Cost Unit of Measure.

Remark Template This is optional. You can enter a Remark

Template.

Next Cost Date This is the effective date of the Next Material

Replacement Cost. An end of day batch utility

updates the current Material Replacement Cost with

the Next Replacement Cost based on the date

entered here as the Next Replacement Cost Date.



BRANCH STANDARD DIMENSIONS

Branch Standard Dimensions are required for Inventory Forecasting purposes. They are used to record

purchasing related information. The following illustrates how these records can be established.

Example: The corporate office purchases all plate products up to 2 1/2" while a Branch purchases

larger plate because of the weight of the material and the freight cost to move it.

A Company Standard Dimension record is required for all Sizes while each Branch that

purchases sizes over 2 1/2" would set up their own Branch Standard Dimensions.

Company Standard Dimensions must be set up first and then the Branch Standard Dimensions are

entered. You cannot add a Branch Standard Dimension without first setting up a corresponding Company

Standard Dimension record.

Branch Standard Dimension

1. Brh PHI eSTELPLAN PHILADELPHIA BRANCH

Group BA Bar Angle Commercial Quality

Size 2214 2" x 2" x 1/4" X 20'

Grade CQ Width Length 20' " Ga

2. ABC Class A U/M Min Max

3. Frcst Fctr 1.00 7. Stk Qty LBS 50000 LBS 500000 LBS

4. Turn Obj 12.00 8. Pur Qty LBS 25000 LBS 100000 LBS

5. Index Obj 9. Prf Vendor 2070 BETHLEHEM

6. Mths Demand: Shp From

Min 2.00 Lead Time 30 Min Ord Qty 50000 LBS

Max 9.00 Prf Carrier 1010 ARMCO

10. Alt Rep Cst 16.8000 CWT 12. Upd Freq

Mat Rep Cst 16.8000 CWT 13. Nxt Cst

Frt Cost 1.0500 CWT 14. Alt Vendor 1010 ARMCO

Tot Rep Cst 17.8500 CWT Shp From

Mkt Factor R CWT 15. En Wgt Fct 1.0000

Mkt Rep Cst 17.8500 CWT 16. Usage Sts A

11. Remarks BREAD & BUTTER PRODUCT

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy 3-Cre Bal

Branch Standard Dimensions screen


Brh Branch

reference

Enter the Branch.

Group Product

Group

reference


Size Enter the Product Size.

Grade Grade/

Product

Master

reference





Width, Length, Gauge Enter the Product Width, Length, Gauge.

ABC Class Used for an ABC rating code, for reference or

selection of specific classes of customers.

In the Company Standard Dimensions, the ABC

Classification is used for the ranking of the

product for all Branches. The ranking criteria

are established based on a user determined

classification of the percentage range for each

ABC code.

Example:

A Products = 90 - 100% Cost of Goods Sold

B Products = 86 - 90%

C Products = 0 - 85%

If a report selection is for a specific Branch,

the Branch ABC code is used. If the report

selection is for All Branches, then the Product

ABC is used.

Frcst Fctr 1 It is the factor used to increase or decrease the

Projected Demand during the course of a year as

actual demand fluctuates. The factor is

determined and entered manually.

Turn Obj Used to indicate the desired level of inventory

turnover for the Branch for this product. Entered

manually.

Index Obj Used to indicate the desired level of

profitability to be achieved for all Branches for

this product. Entered manually. The actual

Inventory Index is calculated as the Gross Profit

times the Turnover rate.

Mths Demand: Min, Max The minimum number of months of demand for which

the inventory of a product must be maintained

within the Branch.

Example:

2.5 indicates a level of inventory required to

meet two and a half months of demand.

1 day’s demand in an average 22 day selling month

is .045, 11 days’ demand in an average 22 day

selling month is .5

Stk Qty This is the Unit of Measure applicable to the

Minimum and Maximum Stocking quantities at the

Branch. It must be a valid Unit of Measure for

the product based on the Price per Check code of

the Group.

Pur Qty The Unit of Measure applicable to the Branch's

minimum order quantity. It must be a valid Unit

of Measure for the product based on the Price per

Check code of the Product Group.

Prf Vendor Vendor

reference



Carrier. It is also the Vendor Number from which

a product is usually purchased.

Shp Frm A valid Ship-From Number, for the preferred

Vendor, at which the material is usually produced.

This field is bypassed if the Pref Vendor field is

blank.




Lead Time The average (or expected) length of time, in days,

from the moment a purchase order is placed to the

Preferred Vendor until it is delivered. This

field is bypassed if the Pref Vendor field is

blank.

Prf Carrier In the Bill of Lading entry screen, this field is

used if the shipment is made by Common Carrier

(indicated by CC in the ‘Delivery Method’ field)

For shipments on your own trucks (indicated in the

field ‘Delivery Method’ by OT), this field is left

blank and the cursor is positioned directly in the

Vehicle Number field.

Alt Rep Cst Used to record a Material Cost for the entered

Unit of Measure if the Unit of Measure differs

from the one stored in the Inventory Logic Control

code for the product. If an Alternate Replacement

Cost exists, the system recomputes the Material

Replacement Cost in the appropriate ILC Unit of

Measure for the product.

Mat Rep Cst Material Replacement Cost.

Frt Cost Enter the Freight Cost.

Tot Rep Cst Calculated Total Replacement Cost.

Mkt Factor R P, R This field provides the ability to increase or

decrease the Replacement Cost for Sales or Market

reasons.

The factor can either be a rate or a percentage:

R - Rate = 999999.9999 / Unit of Measure

P - Percentage = 999.99

Example:

If a product is currently in high demand, but

supply is low, management could put a factor of

0.5 (1/2 of 1 %) or a rate of 0.50/CWT which would

increase the Replacement Cost by 0.50/CWT.

Mkt Rep Cst Market Replacement Cost.

Remarks A user defined text of up to 50 characters used to

add descriptive information about a transaction.

Upd Freq A user-defined code which indicates at what

frequency prices for the product are to be

updated. Valid codes are Spaces (default) or A-Z.

Nxt Cst This is the next Material Replacement Cost. The

next Replacement Cost is saved in the same Unit of

Measure as the Alternate Replacement Cost Unit of

Measure.

Alt Vendor Vendor

reference

An Alternate Vendor from which a product can be

purchased. The number entered must be a valid

Vendor Number. If there is no Alternate Vendor,

the field can be blank.

Shp From Ship-From for the Vendor.

En Wgt Fct 1.00 Determines the Enhanced Weight Factor to be

applied in the Order Cycle when the Item Charge

Quantify Type is E-Enhanced. The Enhanced Weight

factor is entered as a multiplying factor. To

Enhance the Weight by 2%, the corresponding

Enhanced Weight Factor is 1.02.



NOTE: The Create Balance action bar selection is for Future Implementation.



STANDARD PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

The Standard Physical Properties table contains the standard test ranges of products and uses the

eSTELPLAN Specification Templates as its basis.

In this table you enter standard ranges for physical properties. These ranges are stored by

Group/Size/Grade. The Group/Size/Grade entry is validated against the Product Master table. Once this

information has been entered, Specification abbreviations are defaulted. These abbreviations default from

the Specification Template number associated with the Product Group. You are then able to enter

acceptable ranges for each of the Specifications.

Example:

Standard Physical Properties

1. Product Group....... 303PL

2. Size................ 112

3. Grade............... 1F

Spec Abbrev Min Max

4. ROCKB 79.00 83.00

5. TENS 85000.00 91000.00

6. ELONG 48.00 52.00

7. YIELD 35000.00 47000.00

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Standard Physical Properties screen

Additional Specifications can be added as required. The Specification entries are validated against the

Specifications table. If you do not enter values for Specifications within the Standard Physical Properties

table, the Specifications are not saved in this table.

The entry of Standard Physical Properties is optional. The values entered in this table are used only at the

time of Receiving to validate that the physical information entered for Tag Master Required products is

within an acceptable range. If you do not have standard ranges established for a Specification, you are

still permitted to enter the Specifications in Inventory Receipts, however, the entered values are not

validated.



STANDARD LOCATIONS

This table is used to establish Standard Locations for products received into inventory.

Examples: BAY1

ROW7

This table is scanned for a match in the Group/Size/Grade/Width-Length Range/Warehouse combination

when the Inventory functions for Remarks and Locations is called during Inventory Receipts. If a

Standard Location record exists for the entered product, the corresponding Location is defaulted and can

be overridden as necessary. If no match is found, the Location field remains blank and you can enter the

necessary Location.

Standard Locations


2. Size................ 18

3. Grade............... CQ

4. Warehouse........... PFS

5. Width............... From To 999.9999"

6. Length.............. From To

7. Default Location.... BAY1

8. Alternate Loc.1..... BAY6



11. PSQ Code ........... CUT


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Standard Locations screen



PRODUCT TAX STATUS

These codes define an exceptional tax treatment for a Product Group. By default, all products are

considered taxable in all Tax Regions if the Sales Tax Applicable code on the Customer or Customer Ship

To tables is set to ‘A’.

If a product is not taxed in a particular Tax Region while other products in that same Tax Region are

taxable, then you must create a Product Tax Status record to indicate that it is exempt in that Region.

The Product Tax Status table is used in eSTELquote, Sales Order and Invoice Entry to prevent the

calculation of Sales Tax for a particular Product Group and Tax Region combination.

Product Tax Status

1. Product Group....... BA

2. Tax Region.......... PAPH

3. Product Tax Status.. E


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Tax Status screen

Examples:

In the U.S.: If any product is exempt from State, County, Municipal or City tax when other products

are taxable for that particular Region, then you must enter the combination of Tax Region

and Product Group in the Product Tax Status table.

In Canada: All products are taxable for the Goods and Services Tax but not all are taxable for the

Provincial Sales Tax.

For Goods and Services Tax calculations, there is no need for a Product Tax Status record

as the Product is always taxable.

However, if the Product is not taxable in a specific province when all other products are

taxable, then you must create a Product Tax Status record for the Group and Tax Region

classified as exempt.



ALTERNATE LANGUAGE DESCRIPTIONS

These tables are used to record Alternate Language descriptions for Product Groups, Sizes, Grades and

Units of Measure. These descriptions are used only when a language, other than the Base Language of

the system, is required to communicate with customers and vendors for product related transactions. If

only a few customers/vendors require Alternate Language descriptions, then you need only establish

Alternate Language records for those products that will be purchased or sold.

Many eSTELPLAN Processing and Forms printing functions utilize the Alternate Language facility.

The processing programs that have Alternate Language capabilities are:

eSTELquote

Sales Order Entry

Invoicing

Purchase Order Entry

Forms printing programs that use this facility are:

Quotations

Sales Acknowledgments

Work Order

Small Invoice

Mill Test Certificate

Customer Statements

In order to use the Alternate Language facility, the Language code on the Customer, Customer Ship-To,

Vendor and Vendor Ship-To tables must be employed. This code defaults to the Base Language of the

system and can be overridden as necessary. The Language code is not validated against a reference table.

If an Alternate Language Product Description (which encompasses Product Group, Size, Grade and Unit

of Measure) has not been created for a Language code, the Processing and Forms printing programs

automatically default to the Base Language descriptions.



Alt Language Grade Description

1. Alternate Language.. F

2. Grade............... CQ

3. Alt Grade Desc...... QUALITE COMMERCIALE


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Alternate Language Grade Description screen

Alt Language Group Description



3. Alt Group Desc...... ROULEAU D'ALUMINIUM 3003


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Alternate Language Group Description screen



Alternate Language Size Description


2. Product Group....... PL

3. Size................ 316

4. Grade............... 36

5. Alt Size Desc....... 3/16 po


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Alternate Language Size Description screen

Alt Language Unit of Measure Desc


2. Unit of Measure..... FT

3. Alt Unit of Measure. PI


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Alternate Language Unit of Measure screen



MARKUP PERCENTAGE

This table is used to increment the value of received material by a specified percentage for the receiving

branch. The difference between the purchased and received value is written to the Inventory Gain/Loss

account. If there is no branch Markup Percentage, the total value of the received inventory is increased

by the Corporate Branch Markup Percentage.

Markup Percentage

1. Brh................. PHI


3. Description......... COLD ROLLED STEEL

4. Markup Percentage... 7.50


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Markup Percentage screen

Restriction

The Markup Percentage is only applied to Purchase Order Type ‘P’ Receipts.

Corporate Branch Installation Options Settings

The Corporate Branch is a requirement in the Installation Options table. If you have not previously

defined a Corporate Branch, you must now do so as ‘spaces’ is no longer accepted in this field.

It is recommended that you create a new Branch, e.g., CRP, and make the Usage Status I-Inactive.



PRODUCT LINE REMARK

Product Line Remarks store general internal sales and procurement remarks for specific product lines.

This table holds remarks pertaining to inventory organized by:

Branch

Group

Size

Grade

Dimensions

The entry of dimension for Product Line Remarks is available, but not mandatory to accommodate

inventory items whereby remarks based on dimension are not applicable. The programs that search and

display the Product Line Remarks do so using the following logic:

1. Search for Product Line Remark based on Branch, Group, Size, Grade and Dimensions.

If a record is not found then

2. Search for Product Line Remark based on Branch, Group, Size and Grade

If a record is not found then

3. Does not display a remark

The Product Line Remark is 35 characters, and is referenced/displayed in the following applications:

eSTELquote

o Rapid Quote Entry

o Uniquote Entry

Stock Available Inquiry

Multi-View Inquiry

Stock Status Report



Product Line Remarks

1. Product Group....... BA

2. Size................ 2214

3. Grade............... 36

4. Width...............

5. Length.............. 20

6. Remark.............. DON'T DISCOUNT MORE THAN 10%!!


Product Line Remarks screen


Branch Branch

Reference

Enter Branch

Group Product

Group

reference

Enter Product Group related to Product Line

Remark.

Size Product

Gauges

reference

Enter Product Size related to Product Line Remark.

Grade Product

Grades

reference

Enter Product Grade related to Product Line

Remark.

Width Enter Width. Only accessible for width controlled

products. Not mandatory.

Length Enter Length. Only accessible for Length

controlled products only.

Remark Mandatory Enter Product Line Remark. Maximum 35 characters.

Usage Status Enter the Usage Status.

Options are:

A Active

I Inactive

D Deleted


4. SALES AND COSTING INFORMATION

SALES CATEGORIES

These codes are used in conjunction with the Sales Allocation codes to define charges applicable to Sales

Order and Invoice items.

They differentiate service center sales according to:

Major classifications of revenue (e.g., Warehouse Sales, Direct Shipments and Sales Returns).

or

Individual Branch (e.g., Chicago Sales, Detroit Sales, Philadelphia Sales).

or

Type of Sales (e.g., processed, contract, government program).

We recommend that you set up Sales Category codes for the following:

Warehouse Sales (sales from inventory)

Direct Shipments

Returns and Allowances

Transfer Orders

Late Payment Charges (interest on overdue receivables)

Customer-Owned Material

and at least one Sales Category must be established for each of the following transaction types:

C Customer-Owned

D Direct Shipments

I Inventory Sales

T Transfer Sales

4. Sales and Costing Information Page 180


Sales Category

1. Sales Allocation.... BS

2. Description......... BUYOUT SALES ADMIN COSTS

3. Sale Type........... 1

4. Prt Itm on Work Ord. N

5. Allocation Type..... I


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Sales Category screen


Sales Allocation Sales

Allocation

reference

Enter the Sales Allocation code.

Description Enter the Description.

Sale Type 1, 2, 3 Used to identify the type of sale for management

classification of different aspects of operation.

The type affects how the orders are handled

internally and is used to summarize sales and cost

of sales in various reports.

Prt Itm on Work Ord Y N, Y Determines if items are printed on Work Orders.

Valid codes are:

N The item is not printed on the Work Order.

Y The item is printed on the Work Order.

Allocation Type C, D, I, T Used to indicate the type of allocation on

specified transactions. The code is verified in

Order Entry, Transfer Order Entry and in Invoicing

to ensure its validity for those transactions.

Valid codes are:

C Customer-Owned Material Sale

D Direct Shipment

I Inventory Sale

T Transfer Order

Access to the Allocation Type field is restricted

once the eSTELPLAN application is live. This

prevents Orders and Invoices from being processed

with an incorrect Sales Allocation Type.



SALES ALLOCATIONS

For operational and financial management purposes, businesses often find it necessary to distinguish their

different types of sales.

The Sales Allocation codes serve two purposes:

They direct the financial accounting for sales and cost of sales to the appropriate General Ledger

accounts, so that revenue and expense statements reflect the operations of the service center.

They control the General Ledger accounts to be used for the recording of Processing and Freight

Costs added to inter-Branch Transfer Orders.

You must enter at least one Sales Allocation code per Sales Order, Transfer Order or Invoice Entry. For

Sales Orders and Invoice Entries, you can have a different Sales Allocation code per item on the

transaction.

External costs can be set up with Debit to Cost of Goods Sold. The Credit account defaults to Unpaid

accounts.

For further details, see the examples at the end of this section.

NOTE: If you make a Credit Note (e.g., for returns and allowances), the Invoice Update reverses the

General Ledger account distribution automatically, so that Accounts Receivable are credited

for returns.

At least one Sales Allocation code with Charge Numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4 must exist.

Sales Categories are entered first. The Allocation Type of the Sales Category determines the information

that should be entered in the Sales Allocation codes. In addition, the Sales Order Entry, Transfer Order

Entry and Invoicing functions use this field to determine how internal and external attributions are

created.



Sales Allocations

1. Sales Allocation.... BS

2. Charge Number....... 2

3. Charge Type......... P

4. Billing Description. PROCESSING

5. Default Charge...... N

6. Default PWC......... Y BRN


* * * G/L Accounts * * *

8. Sls Credit G/L acct. 4302

- Internal Costs -

9. Int Cst G/L Required Y

10. Int Cst DR G/L Acct. 5302

11. Int Cst CR G/L Acct. 5960

- External Costs -

12. Ext Cst DR G/L Acct. 5302

13. Ext Cst CR G/L Acct. 2030

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Sales Allocations screen


Sales Allocation Sales

Category

reference

Used to differentiate Service Center Sales

according to major classifications of revenue,

individual Branch and detailed product line.

Used also to direct the financial accounting for

sales and cost of sales to the appropriate General

Ledger accounts so that revenue and expense

statements reflect the operations of the service

center.

Charge Number A number used to charge different types of items

to customers. The Charges are created for each

Sales Allocation code. Up to 99 numbers can be

used.

Charge numbers 1-9 are reserved for specific

charges within eSTELPLAN.

1 Material Charges and Costs

2 Processing Charges and Costs

3 Freight Charges and Costs

4 Administrative Costs

5 Late Payment Charges

6 Breakout of Inventory Tag Processing Costs

7 Breakout of Inventory Tag Freight Costs

8 Breakout of Inventory Tag Other Costs

9 Purchase Order Direct Shipment Other Costs

Charge numbers 10-99 can be used within a Sales

Allocation code to specify Charges of another

type.

Examples: Scrap Credit, Restocking Charge,

Fabrication






Charge Type M, P, F, O This field indicates the type of Charge associated

with a Charge Number. It is used to compute the

Sales Tax in the distribution of revenue and cost

in the Sales Journal Totals. Valid types are:

M Material

P Processing

F Freight

O Other

Billing Description The default description for a Charge code within a

Sales Allocation code. This is used on Orders and

Invoices as the default description on the Charge

table. It can be overridden as required. The

overridden description is printed on Order and

Invoice forms that show the billing charges as

well as on internal screens and reports pertaining

to the Order or Invoice.

Default Charge N, Y A code used to identify the default Charge code

for a specified Sales Allocation code. You can

only have one Default Charge per Sales Allocation

code.

Valid Codes are:

N No

Y Yes. The Default Charge associated with a

Sales Allocation code is automatically

defaulted to the Charge Table when adding a

new Item to an Order or Invoice.

Default PWC N, Y Specifies whether a Processing Work Center should

default when the Sales Allocation Charge number is

used. Only accessible for Charge Type P-

Processing.

Options are:

N No PWC defaults when entering a Processing

Charge line.

Y You must specify the PWC that will default

when this Sales Allocation Charge number is

used.

Sls Credit G/L acct GL

Accounts

reference

Enter the Sales Credit GL Account.

Int Cst G/L Required Y N, Y Used to prevent Internal Costs on Invoices and

Credit Note transactions from being passed to the

General Ledger.

Valid codes are:

Y Yes

N No

Int Cst DR G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

The General Ledger Basic Account to be used to

record Internal debit Costs.

Int Cst CR G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

The General Ledger Basic Account to be used to

record Internal Credit Costs.




Ext Cst DR G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

The General Ledger Basic Account to be used in

Invoice and Credit Note Update for recording the

Cost of goods sold for External Cost Attributions,

that is, out of pocket expenses incurred in the

purchase of material or services required to

fulfill a customer’s order requirements.

Ext Cst CR G/L Acct GL

Accounts

reference

The General Ledger Basic Account to be used in

Invoice and Credit Note Update for recording the

Cost of goods sold for External Cost Attributions,

that is, out of pocket expenses incurred in the

purchase of material or services required to

fulfill a customer’s order requirements.

Specific Charge numbers are reserved for system use. They are:

Charge Number Charge Type

1 M (Material revenue & Inventory cost)

2 P (Processing revenue and cost)

3 F (Freight revenue and cost)

4 O (Other revenue and cost)

5 O (Late Charges) – optional

6 P (Breakout Processing) – optional

7 F (Breakout Freight) – optional

8 O (Breakout Other) – optional

9 O (Purchase Order Direct Ship – Other costs)

Charge codes 10-99 can be used for any other miscellaneous revenue and cost accounts that may be

required for your business.

Coding Requirements for Sales Orders and Invoices Entries

Only one Charge Number per Sales Allocation can have the ‘Default Charge’ set to Y-Yes.

In a multi-Branch environment, to distribute the sales according to the Selling Branch, you must code the

Basic GL Account as a ‘Branch Required’ account. Then, when an Invoice is Updated, the General

Ledger Distribution for the Sales Allocation is automatically generated under the appropriate Branch.

For External Cost Credit accounts, the appropriate Unpaid Material, Processing, Freight or Other GL

account is defaulted and cannot be overridden. You must enter a Debit account.

If the Internal Cost General Ledger Required = N-No (No update to GL required for this Charge) then,

when an Invoice for an item is updated, no General Ledger amounts for this cost are generated. However,

the costs are recorded on the Sales Journal for the Invoice Item.

The following details the account entries that should be made for this type of sales.



Inventory or Customer-Owned Sale

If the Sales Category Type is I or C, the following fields are used and defaulted as noted:

Charge Account Used Defaulted Data Required

1 Sales Credit Y N User entered Account

Int Cst Reqd Y Y Must be set to Yes

Int Cst Dr Y N User entered Account (such as Cost of Goods

Sold - Material)

Int Cst Cr Y N Use eSTELPLAN Company Inventory Control

Account

Ext Cst Dr Y N User entered Account (such as Cost of Goods

Sold - Material)

Ext Cst Cr Y Y Defaults to the eSTELPLAN Company Unpaid

Material Account

2 Sales Credit Y Y User entered Account

Int Cst Reqd Y Y Should be set to Yes if General Ledger

Distribution is required

Int Cst Dr Y N User entered Account

Ext Cst Dr Y N User entered Account


Processing Account





Int Cst Cr Y N User entered Account



Freight Account








Other Account

5 Should not be entered for Inventory Sales

6 Sales Credit N N User entered Account

Int Cst Reqd Y Y Must be set to Yes if used


Sold - Processing or Material if you do not want

to see Processing Costs broken out)

Int Cst Cr Y N Use the eSTELPLAN Company Inventory

Control Account

Ext Cst Dr N N User entered Account

Ext Cst Cr N Y Defaults to the eSTELPLAN Company Unpaid

Processing Account







Sold - Freight or Material if you do not want to

see Freight Costs broken out)


Control Account

Ext Cst DR N N User entered Account


Freight Account




Sold - Other or Material if you do not want to

see Other Costs broken out)


Control Account



Other Account

9 Should not be entered for this type



Coding Requirements for Sales Returns Allocations

It is recommended, though not required, that you create a separate Sales Allocation code for Returns from

customers. The determining factor is whether you want to handle the material returns to inventory via the

Customer Returns receipt type of Shop receipts or whether you simply create a Credit Note and return the

material to inventory via an allocation on a Credit Note.

If you do not use Customer Return receipts, then you do not need to create a special Sales Returns

allocation. The Credit Note must be entered using the same Sales Allocation code as the original sale.

If you use Customer Return receipts to enter the material before the Credit Note is done, then the General

Ledger distribution of the receipt is made to Debit Inventory and Credit Unapplied Returns. You then

create a Sales Return allocation code and related Charge codes with the following accounts:

Sls Credit GL Acct User entered Account

Int Cst GL Required Y-Yes or N-No depending on whether the original Charge code costs were

sent to General Ledger.

Int Cst DR GL Acct Cost of Goods Sold (if General Ledger Distribution Required)

Int Cst CR GL Acct Unapplied Returns (if General Ledger Distribution Required)

Ext Cst DR GL Acct Cost of Goods Sold.

Ext Cst CR GL Acct Unpaid Material, Processing, Freight, Other depending on the Charge code.

Coding Requirements for Transfer Orders

No Sales Credit General Ledger Account is used for Transfers since the transfer involves only inventory

and add on transfer costs. You must enter a valid General Ledger number in this field.

If the Sales Category Type is T, the following fields are used and defaulted as noted.



Int Cst Reqd Y Y Must be set to Yes

Int Cst Dr N N Use the eSTELPLAN Company Transfer

Material Cost Account

Int Cst Cr N N Use the eSTELPLAN Company Inventory

Control Account

Ext Cst Dr Y N Use the eSTELPLAN Company Transfer



Material Account




Int Cst DR N N Use the eSTELPLAN Company Transfer

Processing Cost Account




Int Cst Cr N N User entered Account

Ext Cst DR Y N Use the eSTELPLAN Company Transfer

Processing Cost Account


Processing Account




Int Cst Dr N N Use the eSTELPLAN Company Transfer

Freight Cost Account


Ext Cst Dr Y N Use the eSTELPLAN Company Transfer

Freight Cost Account Default


Freight Account


Int Cst Reqd Y Y Should be set to Yes if used

Int Cst Dr N N Use the eSTELPLAN Company Transfer Other

Cost Account


Ext Cst Dr Y N Use the eSTELPLAN Company Transfer Other

Cost Account


Other Account

5 Should not be used for this type


Int Cst Reqd Y Y Should be set to Yes

Int Cst Dr Y N Use the eSTELPLAN Company Transfer



Control Account


Ext Cst Cr N N Defaults to the eSTELPLAN Company Unpaid

Processing Account






Control Account



Freight Account






Control Account






Other Account

9 Should not be entered for this type

For Charge codes 2, 3 and 10-99 (if used), you must code the ‘Int Cst GL Required’ account as Y-Yes

(Update to GL required) since a General Ledger account is required for recording the added Processing,

Freight or Other costs. See the General Ledger Interface chapter in General Ledger for a full discussion

of the interface requirements.

Coding Requirements for Late Payment Charges

Late Payment Charges are an optional function. If you plan to use it, you must create a Sales Category

code with the code LC. The Sales Category Type for this code is I. This code is used automatically in the

program that generates the Invoice Entries for the charges. If the code does not exist, the calculation is

aborted.

The General Ledger distribution for Late Payment Charges is determined by the General Ledger Accounts

entered in the Accounts Receivable Company table.

The General Ledger Cost Accounts are by-passed for the Sales Allocation code LC.

Coding Requirements for Direct Shipments

Direct Shipment:

If the Sales Category Type is D, then the following fields are used and defaulted as noted.



Int Cst Reqd N Y Must be set to No

Int Cst Dr N N Field is skipped

Int Cst Cr N N Field is skipped



Material Account



Int Cst DR Y N User entered Account


Ext Cst DR Y N User entered Account


Processing Account










Processing Account







Other Account






Int Cst Reqd N N Should be set to No

Int Cost Dr N N This field is skipped

Int Cst Cr N N This field is skipped



Other Acct



Sales Allocations for ABC Metals Inc.

ABC Metals Inc. is a service center that makes the bulk of their sales from their own inventory. When

they cannot meet sales from their own inventory, they also handle direct shipments from other service

centers.

ABC’s General Ledger Chart of Accounts is set up as follows:

Assets

1050 Accounts Receivable

1200 Inventory

1210 Inventory in Transit

1053 Mill Claims Receivable

Liabilities

2000 Accounts Payable - Trade

2010 Unpaid Material

2020 Unpaid Processing

2030 Unpaid Freight

2040 Unpaid Miscellaneous

2060 Unapplied Returns

Sales

4101 Warehouse Sales – Material

4102 Warehouse Sales – Processing

4103 Warehouse Sales – Freight

4110 Warehouse Sales – Miscellaneous

4301 Direct Shipment – Material

4302 Direct Shipment – Processing

4303 Direct Shipment – Freight

4310 Direct Shipment – Miscellaneous

4401 Sales Returns and Allowances – Material

4402 Sales Returns and Allowances – Processing

4403 Sales Returns and Allowances – Freight

4410 Sales Returns and Allowances – Miscellaneous

Misc Revenue

7060 Miscellaneous Interest

Cost of Goods Sold

5101 Cost of Goods Sold – Warehouse Sales – Material

5102 Cost of Goods Sold – Warehouse Sales – Processing

5103 Cost of Goods Sold – Warehouse Sales – Freight

5110 Cost of Goods Sold – Warehouse Sales – Miscellaneous

5301 Cost of Goods Sold – Direct Shipment – Material

5302 Cost of Goods Sold – Direct Shipment – Processing

5303 Cost of Goods Sold – Direct Shipment – Freight



5309 Cost of Goods Sold – Direct Shipment – Miscellaneous

5401 Cost of Goods Sold – Returns and Allowances – Material

5402 Cost of Goods Sold – Returns and Allowances – Processing

5403 Cost of Goods Sold – Returns and Allowances – Freight

5410 Cost of Goods Sold – Returns and Allowances – Miscellaneous

6302 Processing Cost Recovery – Expense Account

6303 Freight Cost Recovery – Expense Account

6309 Miscellaneous Cost Recovery – Expense Account

Assets and Liabilities are corporate accounts. Sales and Cost of Goods Sold are Branch-related accounts.

Separate warehouse expense accounts are kept for each machine used by ABC because they want to use

the actual warehouse expense costs for Warehouse Costing. They want eSTELPLAN Processing Work

Center costs to be passed to the General Ledger, to an expense recovery analysis account, regardless of

the type of sale.

ABC maintains their own fleet of trucks to deliver customer orders. They have separate General Ledger

expense accounts for each truck and driver. The internal cost of delivering orders, computed from the

Outbound Freight Tables, is passed to the General Ledger for expense recovery analysis.

ABC wants to analyze the amount of sales, and the costs attributed to total revenue, by Warehouse Sales

and Direct Shipment so they can monitor contributions of each type to the company’s profitability. They

have also a ‘Sales Return’ allocation, so that the value of returns can be analyzed.

Four Sales Category codes are required:

WS - Warehouse Sales

DS - Direct Shipment

RA - Returns and Allowances

LC - Late Charges

For each Sales Allocation code, ABC uses the four types of revenue (except for Late Charges). No

Administration cost is calculated so Charge code 4 is not used.

For simplicity, ABC uses the Miscellaneous category to accumulate all customer revenue other than

Material, Processing and Freight. This includes any charge for packaging, storage and handling.

The Sales Allocation codes are set up as follows:

Sales Allocation WS Charge Number 1 - Material Sales, Warehouse

2 - Processing Sales, Warehouse

11 - Misc Sales, Warehouse



Sales Allocation DS Charge Number 1 - Material Sales, Direct Shipment

2 - Processing Sales, Direct Shipment

3 - Freight Sales, Direct Shipment

11 - Misc Sales, Direct Shipment

Sales Allocation RA Charge Number 1 - Material Returns

2 - Processing Credits

3 - Freight Credits

11 - Misc Credits

Sales Allocation LC Charge Number 5 - Misc Interest

For each Sales Order or Sales Order Item, the salesperson specifies that the sale is attributed to either the

WS or DS Sales Allocation code. If any miscellaneous charges must be added to the invoice, the

salesperson enters Charge Number 11 on the Invoice Entry, together with a description of the charge.

The General Ledger allocation for each Charge Number is detailed on the following pages:

Allocation Code WS – Warehouse Sales

NOTE: ABC Company adds costs for outside processing and freight to the order items sold, so

External Cost accounts are used.

CHARGE NUMBER 1 Material Sales

Charge Type M (Material)

GL Accounts:

Sales Credit 4101 Warehouse Sales Material

Internal Cost Debit 5101 Cost of Goods Sold - Warehouse Sales -

Material

Credit 1200 Inventory

External Cost Debit 5101 Cost of Goods Sold - Warehouse Sales -

Material

Credit 2010 Unpaid Material

CHARGE NUMBER 2 Processing Sales

Charge Type P (Processing)

GL Accounts:

Sales Credit 4102 Warehouse Sales - Processing


Processing

Credit 6302 Processing Cost Recovery


Processing

Credit 2020 Unpaid Processing



CHARGE NUMBER 3 Freight Sales

Charge Type F (Freight)

GL Accounts:

Sales Credit 4103 Warehouse Sales - Freight

Internal Cost Debit 5103 Cost of Goods Sold - Warehouse Sales - Freight

Credit 6303 Freight Cost Recovery

External Cost Debit 5103 Cost of Goods Sold - Warehouse Sales -Freight

Credit 2030 Unpaid Freight

CHARGE NUMBER 11 Miscellaneous Sales

Charge Type O (Other)

GL Accounts:

Sales Credit 4110 Warehouse Sales - Miscellaneous


Miscellaneous

Credit 6309 Miscellaneous Cost Recovery


Miscellaneous

Credit 2040 Unpaid Miscellaneous

Allocation Code DS – Direct Shipment

CHARGE NUMBER 1 Material Sales


GL Accounts:

Sales Credit 4301 Direct Shipment - Material

Internal Cost There is no Internal Cost of material for Direct Shipment.

External Cost DEBIT 5301 Cost of Goods Sold - Direct Shipment Material

CREDIT 2010 Unpaid Material



CHARGE NUMBER 2 Processing Sales


GL Accounts:

Sales Credit 4302 Direct Shipment - Processing

Internal Cost Debit 5302 Cost of Goods Sold - Direct Shipment -

Processing


External Cost Debit 5302 Cost of Goods Sold - Direct Shipment -

Processing


CHARGE NUMBER 3 Freight Sales, Direct Shipments


GL Accounts:

Sales Credit 4303 Direct Shipment - Freight

Internal Cost Debit 5303 Cost of Goods Sold - Direct Shipment - Freight


External Cost Debit 5303 Cost of Goods Sold - Direct Shipment -Freight


CHARGE NUMBER 9 Direct Shipment - Miscellaneous Costs


GL Accounts

Sales Credit 4310 Direct Shipment - Miscellaneous

Internal Cost Not used

External Cost Debit 5309 Cost of Goods Sold - Direct Shipment -

Miscellaneous


Allocation Code RA – Returns and Allowances

CHARGE NUMBER 1 Material Returns


GL Accounts:

Sales Credit 4401 Sales Returns and Allowances - Material

Internal Cost If material has already been returned to stock using Inventory Receipts

Type R, then the distribution is to Unapplied Returns.

Debit 5401 Cost of Goods Sold - Returns and Allowances -

Material



Credit 2060 Unapplied Returns

External Cost Debit 5401 Cost of Goods Sold - Returns and Allowances -

Material

Credit 2010 Unpaid Material

CHARGE NUMBER 2 Returns and Allowances - Processing


GL Accounts:

Sales Credit 4402 Sales Returns and Allowances - Processing

Internal Cost Debit 5402 Cost of Goods Sold - Returns and Allowances -

Processing



Processing


CHARGE NUMBER 3 Returns and Allowances - Freight


GL Accounts:

Sales Credit 4403 Sales Returns and Allowances - Freight


Freight



Freight


CHARGE NUMBER 11 Miscellaneous Credits


GL Accounts:

Sales Credit 4410 Sales Returns and Allowances - Miscellaneous


Miscellaneous

Credit 6309 Miscellaneous Cost Recovery


Miscellaneous




Allocation Code LC – Late Payment Income

CHARGE NUMBER 5 Late Charges


Sales 7060 Miscellaneous Interest

GL Accounts: No General Ledger Accounts need be set up since the Accounts

Receivable Company table contains both the Accounts Receivable

account and the Late Payment account.

Internal Cost No GL Accounts required.

External Cost No GL Accounts required.

NOTE: If ABC had a more detailed breakdown of Miscellaneous Charge Numbers, then each one

would be set up with a specific Sales and Cost of Sales account instead of being combined

under Miscellaneous Sales.

Depending on your company and its operations, the number and distribution of Sales and Cost of Sales

accounts using the Sales Allocation codes can be established in many different ways. You can use as few

or as many General Ledger accounts as required to get the kind of detailed financial analysis appropriate

for your company.



OUTBOUND FREIGHT RATES

This table is used as an optional eSTELPLAN costing tool that enables you to calculate Freight Costs

based upon shipping and destination points. These internal Freight Costs are displayed in the Cost

Attributions screens of Order and Invoice Entry and are finalized at the time of Invoice Update. For a

detailed explanation of the Freight Charge/Cost calculations, please refer to the Freight Charges and

Costing chapter in the Sales Order manual.

If eSTELprice is installed, this table is used to calculate freight charges and costs in quote entry.

The following fields are only accessible if eSTELprice is installed:

Min Freight Charge

Max Freight Charge

Charge Rate UM

Charge Profit %

Whether used to calculate Freight Costs or Charges, this table can be tailored to the specific needs of each

service center. You may wish to establish records for some Shipping Warehouses and destination points

and not for others.

An integral part of the Freight Cost and Charge calculations is the Weight table. In this table, you

establish up to and including Cost/Charge weight limits.

Example: The Weight Limits for a specific warehouse and destination are set up as 1000 LBS and 2000

LBS. When an order for 1500 LBS is shipped, the Freight Cost is calculated based upon the

information associated with the 2000 LB entry in the Weight Limit table.

Outbound Freight Rates

1. Shipping Whs........ PFS


3. Min Frt Cost Amt.... 15.00 6. Min Frt Charge Amt.. 25.00

4. Max Frt Cost Amt.... 500.00 7. Max Frt Charge Amt.. 750.00

5. Freight Cost U/M.... CWT 8. Frt Charge U/M...... CWT


10. Freight Weight Cost Rate Cost Rate Charge

Weight Limit Our Truck Com Carrier Profit %

1000 2.0000 2.5000

10000 1.0000 1.5000

250000 .7500 1.0000

999999 .5000 .7500

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Outbound Freight Rates screen



PROCESSING WORK CENTERS

Processing Work Centers are used to capture the amount of in-house processing needed to prepare

material for shipment. These codes usually represent a piece of equipment (e.g., slitters) that you want to

analyze for utilization and cost of operation. They can also include commonly used third party services

such as galvanizing, heat treating or pickling.

The Processing Work Center and costs are applied in the Inventory Allocation and Costing function of

Invoicing (see the Order Processing manual).

The costs are shown on the Sales Journal, and are included in the Cost of Sale for sales statistics. These

figures are passed on to the General Ledger as Internal Costs.

Processing Work Centers are also a required costing feature in Inventory Processing and other Production

modules. The figures established in this table can be used to calculate processing costs.

Processing Work Centers

1. Prs Work Center..... BR1

2. Description......... 120" FLAME CUTTER

3. Set-Up Cost Amount..

4. Cost Rate/UM........ 10.0000 CWT

5. Min Charge Amt...... 200.00

6. Charge Rate/UM...... 12.5000 CWT

7. Capacity Minutes.... 420

8. Capacity Weight..... 35500

9. Inv Costing Req'd... N

10. PWC Ticket Printer.. LP9

11. Activity Required... N

12. Activity Opr Time Nbr Opr Opr Cst Rate/UM

13. Production Weight UM LBS 17. Charge Type......... E

14. Production Time UM.. HRS 18. Default Chg/Cst..... P

15. Source of Costing... C 19. Usage Status........ D

16. Cost per Theo Wgt...

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Processing Work Centers screen


Description PWC description.

Set-Up Cost Amount The minimum cost for setting up the equipment to

process material. This cost is applied to any

Quotations, Orders or Invoices that use the

Processing Work Center unless the Cost Rate X

Quantity processed is larger.

Cost Rate The Cost Rate is applied over and above the Setup

Cost for any quantity processed.




U/M The Unit of Measure associated with the Cost Rate

for Cost calculation purposes.

For Processing Work Centers, special Units of

Measure are also provided such as CUT (pieces

cut), HRS (hours or processing), THW (theoretical

weight per Unit of Measure).

Min Charge Amt This field is only accessible if eSTELprice is

installed. Represents the minimum amount to be

charged to a customer for this type of processing.

Charge Rate Only accessible if eSTELprice is installed.

U/M Defaults from the Cost Rate UM

Capacity Minutes In eSTELmill, this represents the production

capacity time. This figure defaults from the

Processing Work Center table (PWC). You can

override this figure if the equipment is expected

to run for longer or shorter intervals than usual

on a given date.

Capacity Weight For production related transactions, this is the

capacity in weight of the Processing Work Center

(PWC) for a date and shift. It defaults from the

PWC table and can be overridden.

For delivery transactions, this is the capacity in

weight of the vehicle to be used for the shipment.

This must be entered manually as required.

For sites having an Imperial Base Measure, the

weight is entered in LBS.

For Metric Measure based sites the weight is

entered in KGS.

For the Mill Line, this is the total weight in

tons that the Mill Line is capable of handling

during each turn. The Tons Unit of Measure

defaults, based upon your system installation

options (Imperial or Metric).

Inv Costing Req’d N, Y Y Used in the Processing Work Center information.

Valid codes are:

N No cost is computed in invoicing.

Y Cost is computed in invoicing.

PWC Ticket Printer Optional. The default printer that will be used

to print the eSTELman PWC Tickets and Sales Order

Work Order Forms.

Activity Required N, Y Y Only accessible if eSTELman is installed.

Used to indicate whether the Activity time for a

PWC must be recorded or not.

If the field is N-No, the Activity information is

then entered as required in the MPO Entry and

Daily Shift Entry functions, i.e. the Activity

fields are not forced automatically and you only

complete them if you have a specific Activity to

add.

Activity Only accessible if eSTELman is installed.

Identifies the activity to be performed on any

Process or PWC in the warehouse, such as, Head

Setup, Operation, Packaging, Tear-Down,

Lubrication, Electrical maintenance. There must

be a code for every activity whether it is to be




used for order costing purposes or for only

scheduling and reporting purposes.

NOTE: The same code can be used for any Process

or PWC as the cost rates are identified

only in relation to a Process or PWC.

Opr Time The standard time for performing an Activity,

expressed in minutes. When added to the time

given to perform other Activities for the Process,

this is used to estimate the total processing

time.

Nbr Opr This is the number of people normally assigned to

the Activity on this Processing Word Center. This

number can be different from the number of

operators actually assigned to the task as the

order is processed.

Opr Cst Rate The standard cost of labor for the activity on the

Process. If a Part Specifications record exists

for this Customer/Product combination, the field

defaults from that record.

Cst Rate/UM The Unit of Measure for the standard cost. This

must be a valid Unit of Measure.

Production Weight UM Only accessible if eSTELman is installed.

Weight based Unit of Measure only.

Production Time UM Only accessible if eSTELman is installed.

Time based Unit of Measure only.

Source of Costing C C, P Determines how quantities are costed.

Options are:

C Consumption

P Production

NOTE: This code is not applicable when the

Production Costing Method is S-Standard

Costing

Cost per Theo Wgt Used to calculate the Theoretical Processing Cost

per Unit. The Theoretical Processing Cost per

Unit is then compared to the Cost Rate on the PWC

to determine the PWC Processing Cost Rate.

Charge Type E E, I Determines the default Charge Type for the entered

Processing Charge with this Processing Work

Center. Not applicable in Transfer Order Entry.

Options are:

E Excluded. The Processing Charge entered using

this PWC is defaulted as an Excluded Charge.

I Included. The Processing Charge entered using

this PWC is defaulted as an Included Charge.

Default Chg/Cst P B, L, O or

P

Determines the method to be used when computing

the default Processing Charge and Cost Rates in

eSTELquote.

Options are:

B Burning. Only applicable in eSTELquote:

When entering a Processing Charge, you

enter the parameters for the Burning job

and a Processing Charge Rate and Cost

Attribution are defaulted based on the




Burning Cost Table table.

In Sales Order and Invoice Entry, you can

change the Burning Processing Charge that

was initially created in eSTELquote.

However, the Burning Cost Attribution

remains constant. This means that any

change to the Burning Processing Charge in

Sales Order or Invoice Entry affects the

burning processing profit margin.

In Sales Order and Invoice Entry, if you

add a Burning Processing Charge or cost

line, the existing PWC Charge and Cost

Rate defaulting methods apply.

L Processing Length. Only applicable in

eSTELquote:

When entering a Processing Charge, the

Processing Length pop-up window is

displayed if the Inventory Organization of

the ordered product is not L or LT. For

PWCs with Default Chg/Cst L-Processing

Length, you can only enter a length based

Charge Rate Unit of Measure. A Charge and

Cost rate per LOT are computed and

defaulted to the eSTELquote Item, based on

the processing length. This feature can

be used to charge for plate chamfer

processing.

In Sales Order and Invoice Entry, the

Processing Length pop-up window is not

displayed. Therefore, you cannot add a

PWC Charge that has a length based Charge

UM for products with Inventory

Organizations other than L or LT.

O Outside Processing. Only applicable in

eSTELquote:

When entering a Processing Charge, the

Outside Processing Cost pop-up window is

displayed allowing you to specify the cost

of Outside Processing, the applicable

Profit percentage, the Vendor and the

Exchange Rate information for foreign

Vendors. This feature can be used to

charge for Outside Processing such as

machining or drilling.

In Sales Order and Invoice Entry, you can

change the Outside Processing Charge that

was initially created in eSTELquote.

However, the corresponding Cost

Attribution remains constant. This means

that any change to the Outside Processing

Charge in Sales Order or Invoice Entry

affects the Outside Processing profit

margin.

In Sales Order and Invoice Entry, if you

add an Outside Processing Charge or Cost

line, the existing PWC Charge and Cost

defaulting methods apply.

P - Processing. The PWC record is used to default

the PWC Charge and Cost to the eSTELQuote

item.




Burning Type O L, O, P Specifies the type of Burning to be done. This

field is only accessible when you enter B-Burning

in the Default Chg/Cst field. For non-Burning

Processing Work Centers, this field is blank.

It is used when adding Burning Processing Charges

on eSTELquote Items.

Options are:

L Laser. Laser burning will be done.

O Oxygen. Oxygen fuel burning will be done.

P Plasma. Plasma fuel burning will be done.

eSTELman Usage

The following fields are only available if eSTELman is installed:

PWC Ticket Printer

Activity Required

Activity Table

Production Weight UM

Production Time UM

Source of Costing

These fields are used in the Customer Part Specification/Processing Instructions section to default the

specific activities and costs for the Processing Work Centers assigned to a Step. These can then be

overridden on the Part Specifications.

The Material Processing Order uses the PWC Activities and Costs from the Part Specification table to

create the MPO, or if there are no PWCs assigned to the Part Specification, they are accessed directly

from the MPO Entry. Refer to the MPO Costing chapter for details on their use.

The Production Work Center Setup Cost Amount is always a LOT charge and for eSTELman should be

left as zero. Please review the chapter on MPO Costing to determine if the Setup Cost is appropriate for

your applications.

NOTE: You can enter spaces as a valid Processing Work Center. This facilitates the entry of

information on the External Attributions screen of the Sales Order and Invoice entry

programs where you are required to enter a Processing Work Center code when entering

Processing Costs.

By creating a blank Processing Work Center code, you can then press <Enter> through the

Processing Work Center field thereby streamlining the entry of External Attribution

information.



WORK CENTERS PROCESSES

This table is used to help manage the search for compatible PWCs when booking jobs to the Production

Schedule.

There is a link between a Process Type and a Processing Work Center (PWC) so that different work

centers which perform the same functions can be considered compatible. Each Process Type can have

multiple compatible PWCs and each PWC can perform multiple Process Types. This table is used so that

the proper Order Item Bookings will be found and de-booked when Booking/Scheduling a Production

Job.

Work Centers Processes

Accessing By PRS/PWC

1. Process............. SLT

2. Process Work Center. SL1

3. PRO RmkTmplt........ SLT


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Work Center Processes screen

eSTELpro

You can configure various remarks to automatically default to an eSTELpro Job Header by entering the

name of a remark template in the PRO RmkTmplt field.

The remarks default as job header remarks Type B to the eSTELpro Job Header based the job PRS/PWC

code.



SCHEDULING OPTIONS

A reference table is used to control the way Schedule Bookings are handled by branch. The variables in

this table are to be used by the Schedule Booking function to control the flow of PWC Capacity

Reservation.

NOTE: A Scheduling Options record MUST be created for every Branch in the Branch table.

Scheduling Options

1. Ref Branch..........

2. Min Shift Variance..

3. Nbr of Shifts Early.

4. Nbr of Shifts Late..

5. Shipping Shift......

6. Lead Time in Shifts.

7. Over Capacity %.....

8. Max Book %..........

9. Delete Schd Item....

10. Use Alt PWC.........

11. Auto Cd.............

12. Usage Status........

Scheduling Options Table


Ref Branch none Branch

reference

This is the branch for which the options will be

set. When booking from Order Item Entry, this

branch is matched to the Shipping Branch to

determine the Booking logic.

This Branch must be a valid branch.

You can also create a record for the Corporate

Branch which will be the default for branches which

have no scheduling options set up.

Min Shift Variance 0 0-9 Number of shifts to skip when booking sequential

processes. This is based on the existing PWC

Schedules already created by Production Managers.

If the Shift Variance is 0, try to schedule all

processes on the same Date/Shift.

If the Shift Variance is 1, try to schedule/book

each preceding process on the next preceding

date/shift.

If the Shift Variance is 2, try to schedule/book

each preceding process on the next preceding




date/shift with at least one PWC Schedule between

the one last used and the current one.

I.e.

Process 3 is scheduled on 29Mar/Shift 1

When booking Process 2, skip 29Mar/Shift 1, skip

28Mar/Shift 3 and try booking to 28Mar/Shift 2.

If 28Mar/Shift 2 is not available, try each previous

date/shift combination.

Nbr of Shifts Early 0 0-99 Maximum number of shifts that each processing step

can be completed in advance of the next sequential

process.

Example:

Shipping Shift = 2

Min Shift Variance = 1

Due Date = February 20th, 19XX

No. Shifts Early = 20

PWC Schedules exist for Five days a week & 2 shifts

per day.

When the Schedule Booking Function attempts to book

the last sequential process, it will look for

availability on February 20th, Shift 1 and begin

searching backwards. It will continue searching

backwards through 20 PWC Schedules (10 working

days), or until it reaches the ‘Lead Time in Shifts’

(whichever comes first). Each sequential process

cannot be booked more than 20 existing shifts apart.

If no capacity is found, the Schedule Booking

function begins a new search (see No. Shifts Late).

Nbr of Shifts Late 0 0-99 Maximum number of shifts that the last process can

be completed after the Due/Ship Shift.

Example:

Shipping Shift = 2



No. Shifts Late = 6

PWC Schedules exist for Five days a week & 2 shifts

per day.

If the Schedule Booking Function failed to Book on

the first search, it attempts to book the last

sequential process on February 20th, Shift 2 and

begin searching forwards. It continues searching

forward through 6 PWC Schedules (3 working days)

until it reaches February 23rd, Shift 2.

If no capacity is found again, the Schedule Booking

function fails and an error is returned to the

calling program.

Shipping Shift 1 1, 2 or 3 The Shift the Order Item will be shipped on.

This is the shift the final process must be finished

before, with consideration given for the Min Shift

Variance.

Example:

Shipping Shift = 2






When the Schedule Booking Function attempts to book

the last sequential process, it looks for

availability on February 20th, Shift 1 and begins

searching backward through the existing PWC

Schedules.

Lead Time in Shifts 0 0 - 99 The number of existing shifts between the last shift

of the system date that an Order Item is entered and

the booking of the first sequential process required

for that Order Item.

Example:

If Lead Time in Shifts = 4;

Order Date = Fri, Feb 7th

Production Lead Shift = Wed, Feb 11th , Shift 1

Assuming there are 2 shifts per day, no shifts

Saturday or Sunday, an order taken Friday morning,

could not book a PWC Schedule earlier than Shift 1

on Wednesday.

Over Capacity % 0% 0% - 100% The percent of PWC capacity weight that a user may

over book on a single PWC schedule.

Example:

An item is required to be booked for 12,000lbs on

PWC EX1

EX1 has Gross capacity of 20,000lbs, Booked Items

totaling 11,000 &, therefor, has available capacity

of 9,000lbs

If Overbook = 10%, the order could not be booked.

20,000lbs * 110% = 22,000lbs Max Capacity

22,000lbs - 11,000lbs = 11,000lbs Max Available

The maximum available capacity is less than the

capacity required so the Order Item cannot be

booked.

Max Book % 100 0 - 100% The largest Order Item/Job, measured in percent of

PWC capacity weight, which can be booked to any

given PWC schedule, at one time.

Max Capacity % = 75%

Order Item Balance = 10,000lbs

PWC Schedule Capacity = 12,000lbs

Max Capacity Weight = 9,000lbs

(75% * 12,000 = 9,000lbs)

Because the Max Capacity Weight is less than the

capacity required, the Order Item will not be

booked.

Delete Schd Items N N, Y Used when re-booking an Order Item or deleting an

Order Item to determine whether or not the sequenced

schedule items can be deleted through the Schedule

Booking Function.

N Do not delete schedule items which have been

assigned a sequence number.

Y Automatically delete schedule items which have




been assigned a sequence number.

This applies when de-booking Order Items in either

Change mode or Delete mode.

Use Alt PWC N N, Y Used only in eSTELpro.

N Require you to change the PWC if the Primary PWC

cannot be booked.

Y Automatically tries to book the Alternate PWC if

the Primary PWC cannot be booked.

Auto CD M A, M The Scheduling Options Auto Code has two settings;

M Manual (default). Does not de-book Order Items

when booking/scheduling jobs.

A Automatic. De-books Order Items on the Specs of

the eSTELpro/eSTELman Job being booked or

scheduled, for a compatible PWC.

NOTE: When this code is set to automatic, you are

restricted to entering an eSTELpro job or

eSTELman Step only once on the Production

Schedule. This applies to Booking or

Scheduling manually.

For Production Costing, this is used to indicate how

the processing costs have been applied to jobs.

A Automatic (default)

M Manual

The automatic costing is based on the Process or PWC

code, the Setup and

Run times entered on the Production Job information,

and/or the quantities consumed in the production.

When you enter the Production Costing window, the

default costs are shown.

To override the default costs, change the Costing

method from ‘A’ (Automatic) to ‘M’ (Manual) and then

enter the new costs.

In eSTELman, when the Production Costing window is

called from the Header screen, the default is A-

Automatic and it cannot be changed whereas, if the

same window is called from the MPO Step screen, the

default is M-Manual.



SCHEDULING OPTIONS – BY PWC

Allows you to specify a different Lead Time in Shifts for each Branch/PWC. This is required for

automatic scheduling.

Scheduling Options - by PWC

1. Ref Branch.......... PHI

2. Prs Work Center..... ANN

3. Lead Time in Shifts. 1


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Scheduling Options – by PWC



BRANCH ADMINISTRATIVE COST

This table stores the Administrative Cost requirements by Branch.

Branch Administrative Cost

1. Branch.............. PHI

2. Admin Cost Reqd..... A

3. Admin Cost.......... 5.00

4. Admin Cost U/M...... CWT


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Branch Administrative Cost screen


Branch Branch

reference

Enter the Selling Branch for which specific

Administrative Cost requirements apply.

Admin Cost Reqd N Determines whether Administrative Costs are

required or not.

Options are:

A Administrative Costs are computed as an Amount

per Weight shipped,

R % Rate. Administrative Costs are computed as

a Percentage of the Item Total Cost.

V % Rate. Administrative Costs are computed as

a Percentage of the Item Total Sale.

N (Default.) No Administrative Costs are

required.

Admin Cost Rate If you select the options A, R, or V, you must

enter an Amount or a Percentage to be used to

compute the Administrative Costs.

Admin Cost U/M Units of

Measure

reference

Enter a valid Administrative Cost UM or use the

Reference Table Look-Up.

Only weight based or LOT Units of Measure are

allowed in this field. These are the only Units of

Measure that can always be computed regardless of

the ILC codes of the products on an order.




If the Admin Cost Reqd field is ‘A’, the

Administrative Cost UM must be a valid weight

based UM.

If the Admin Cost Reqd field is ‘R’ or ‘V’, the

Administrative Cost UM must be LOT. This is the UM

displayed in the Cost Attribution screen, after

the Administrative Costs have been computed as a

percentage of the Total Item Cost or Total Item

Revenue.

How the Quotation, Order and Invoice Costing Programs Use This Table

The Branch Administrative Cost table is always verified regardless of the Admin Cost Reqd field in

the eSTELPLAN Company Maintenance table.

Branch Administrative Cost records need to be set up only for the Branches that require specific

Administrative Cost treatments, either because:

o No Administrative Costs should be computed, or

o Administrative Costs should be computed, or

o Specific Cost Amounts or Percentage Rates should apply

Otherwise, the Administrative Cost Type, Rate and UM from the eSTELPLAN Company

Maintenance table are used and applied to all Branches.

Restriction

The computation of Administrative Costs does not apply to Transfer Orders and Tax Adjustments.



INVOICING COMMODITY

The Invoicing Commodity table is used to record Commodity codes that group products by Group and

Size or by Group and Gauge. The Commodity code prints as an Item Remark on the European Invoice

Form, i.e., when the Product Installation Option EIS=X is set (see the Product Installation Options Guide

for details).

Invoicing Commodity Code


2. Size................

3. Gauge............... 0.0478

4. Gauge Type.......... N

5. Commodity Code...... Coil Commodity

6. Usage status........ A

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Invoicing Commodity Code screen


5. ORDER PROCESSING INFORMATION

ORDER STATUS

These Status codes are used throughout eSTELPLAN by various applications.

In Purchase and Sales Order Entry, they are used to describe the current status of an order. The order

status is displayed on inquiries and reports.

We recommend that you create an Order Status for each major production step.

Examples:

Entered

Job Scheduled

In Production

Material Scaled

Material Staged

As the Sales Order and Production Job paperwork is transferred from step to step, you can enter a revised

Status to indicate to Sales and Customer Service personnel that the order is proceeding through the

production process.

At least one code must exist. This code can be blank (spaces).

5. Order Processing Information Page 214


Order Status Codes

1. Order Status........ BRK

2. Description......... SLITTER BREAKDOWN


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Order Status Codes screen



STANDARD MESSAGES

Standard Messages are used in Sales and Purchase Order Processing to create pre-formatted messages for

specific forms. These messages are automatically printed on each and every form of the type selected.

There are two types of standard messages:

Standard Forms Printing messages

Customer/Vendor Remarks messages

Standard Forms Printing Messages

You can preset messages for the following forms:

ACK Acknowledgment

AFI Auto Fax/Email Invoice. These print on the Fax Cover page or are included in the

body of the Email sent for Archived Invoices (after the Remark from the Cus/Ven

Document Distribution)

BLB Bar-coded Bill of Lading

BOL Bill of Lading (L-Load and S-Ship) and Shipping Order. These do not print on the BL

Summary (see MCC/MCP and MOT).

CRD Counter Receipt – Header (Counter Sales)

CRH Counter Receipt – Detail (Counter Sales)

CRN Credit Note

CRS Counter Receipt – Summary (Counter Sales)

GPQ Request for Quote form (future implementation)

INV Invoice

JOB eSTELpro Job Work Order

MCC Manifest and BL Summary – Common Carrier

MCF Mill Claim

MCP Manifest and BL Summary – Customer Pick-up

MOT Manifest and BL Summary – Our Truck

MPO eSTELman forms

MTC Mill Test Certificate

ORD Sales Order and Transfer Order

PKD Pick Ticket – Detail (Counter Sales)

PKG eSTELfab Shipping Form

PKH Pick Ticket – Header (Counter Sales)

PKS Pick Ticket – Summary (Counter Sales)

POR Purchase Order

QTE Quote

RCR Receiver

RMD Return Material Authorization – Detail

RMH Return Material Authorization – Header

RMS Return Material Authorization – Summary

STM Customer Statement

TBL Toll Bill of Lading

TIV Toll Invoice

TOD Toll Order



TRC Toll Receiver

WKO Work Order and Production Work Order

The remarks must be entered exactly the way they are to be printed on the form.

Examples:

“No Returns Accepted After 10 Days”

“Receiving Hours 8:00 – 5:00”

“Received by: ____________________”

Standard Message

1. Standard Message.... ACK

2. Branch.............. ***

3. Message Number...... 1

4. Remark Description.. Thank you for your business.


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy 3-Delete

Standard Message screen

Corporate and Branch Standard Messages

The Standard Message program enables you to have different messages printed on the forms based on the

Branch of their transaction. In addition, you can also have company-wide messages that can be printed in

addition to any Branch specific messages.

The printing and positioning of the Standard Messages depend on whether they are messages for a

Corporate Branch, specific Branch or both.

General Rules

Corporate Standard Messages are printed, regardless of the transaction Branch.

Branch specific Standard Messages are printed if the Standard Message Branch matches the

transaction Branch for the form being printed.



Exceptions

The following forms print the Standard Messages based on the Shipping Branch of the first Order

Item on the form:

o Work Order

o Shipping Order

o Transfer Work Order

o Transfer Shipping Order

o Production Work Order

If the same Standard Message with the same Type and Number exists for both a specific Branch and

the Corporate (***) Branch, the message for the specific Branch is printed first, followed by the

Corporate one, subject to the other conditions noted above.

The following Forms printing programs read the Branch field in the Standard Message file:

Customer Statements (arfrcd)

Bill of Lading Summary (blfbls)

Bill of Lading (blfbol)

eSTELbuy Request for Quotation (byfgpq)

Mill Test Cert (infmtc)

Mill Test Cert with multiple items (inftce)

Receiver (infrcr)

Credit Note (ivfsiv)

Invoice (ivfsiv)

eSTELmill Invoice (mlfsiv)

eSTELman Material Processing Order (mnfpwo)

Order Acknowledgement (orfack)

Delivery Manifest (orfmfs)

Order Form (orford)

Production Work Order (orfpwk)

Quote Form (pefqfp)

eSTELpro Job Work Order (pnfjwo)

Modified Purchase Order (pofpom)

Purchase Order Form (pofpoo)

eSTELtoll Bill of Lading (tpftbd)

eSTELtoll Receiver (tpftrc)

eSTELtoll Order Form (tpftso)

eSTELtoll Invoice Edit (tpftve)

eSTELtoll Invoice (tpftvf)



REMARKS TEMPLATES

You can group, under a template, remarks intended to serve as general guidelines for various operations

such as the handling, packing or shipping of merchandise.

The following screens demonstrate how templates are defined and how remarks are entered.

Remark Templates

1. Remark Template..... SHIPPING

Remark Templates screen



Remark Templates

1. Remark Template..... SHIPPING

Remark

* * S H I P P I N G I N S T R U C T I O N S * *

Ship with: __________________________________

Ship complete only: Y [ ] N [ ]

Call B-4 Delivery: Y [ ] N [ ] Tel:

Unload By: [ ] Mansaver [ ] Forklift [ ] Crane

[ ] Hand [ ] Other _____________

Truck Loc: [ ] Rear [ ] L-Side [ ] R-Side

1 / 99

Remark Templates window

Special Prompting Characters

The Remarks Templates can include a string of special prompting characters. This string, a series of

^^^^^^, is used when the weight, dimensions or quantity of the material could be different from one

transaction to another. This feature allows you to replace the character string by information (such as the

product weight) specific to a transaction. In this way, the same remark can be used in numerous

applications, requiring only the replacement of the ^^^^^^ as needed.

The number of ^ entered should correspond to the maximum length of the field. For example, if a field

accepts a maximum of 5 characters, enter ^^^^^. If it accepts only 2, enter ^^.



SKID TYPES

Skid Types are used to identify the different types of skids, their weight and the cost of each skid.

The Skid Type and the Skid Weight are generally needed whenever Specifications are requested and the

information is printed on any form where the Specifications are printed.

NOTE: Skid Costing is not used in the current revision. However, fields 4 and 5 (Cost and Cost Unit

of Measure) can be completed for reference. The Skid Costing function will be implemented

in a future revision and will be used for Tag Master Required Products that are created using

eSTELbarcodes, eSTELpro or any other production related function.

Skid Types

1. Skid Type........... CFL

2. Description......... COIL FORKLIFT SKID

3. Skid Weight......... 25

4. Cost................ 25.0000

5. Cost U/M............ LOT


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Skid Types screen



PACKAGING COSTS

Packaging Codes are used in eSTELbarcodes and eSTELpro to identify different types of packaging.

Examples:

Paper/Plastic Wrap

Crate

Tube

Box

If you want to enter a Packaging code in the Order Specifications window of Order Entry, you must

create at least one code.

The Packaging code is printed on any form where the Specifications are printed.

Packaging Costs

1. Packaging Code...... PC

2. Description......... PLASTI-COAT

3. Packaging Cost Basis G

4. Cost U/M............ SFT

5. Cost................


*** COST PER GAUGE TABLE ***

From Gauge To Gauge Cost Rate

7. 0.0000 0.0000

8. 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

9. 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

10. 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

11. 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Packaging Costs screen

NOTE: The Packaging Costs Gauge Table is not used at this time. It is for future implementation.



PROCESS CODES

Process codes are used to identify different types of Processing that must be performed on material to get

it ready for shipment to the customer. These codes are used in different production programs to

determine processing costs. These codes differ from the Production Work Center codes in that they

reflect different processes that can be performed on a machine at a lesser cost.

Example: A 60" slitter is normally used for full slitting jobs. However, it could be used for coil edging,

recoiling or flattening, all of which are done at a lesser cost than slitting.

Once all of the Process codes have been established, you can group up to three of them under a

Production Sequence code.

Process codes are displayed on the Order Entry Item screen when a Production Sequence is entered.

Process Codes

1. Process.............

2. Description.........

3. Daily Max Wgt.......

4. Set-Up Cost Rate....

5. Set-Up Cost Rate U/M

6. Run Cost Rate.......

7. Run Cost Rate U/M...

8. Operation Code......

9. OPS Process Code....

10. Activity Opr Time Nbr Opr Opr Cst Rate/UM

11. Source of Costing... 12. Process Mode.......


Process Codes screen


Description Enter the Process code description.

Daily Max Wgt The maximum daily capacity in weight for the

production process.

Set-Up Cost Rate The Cost rate per Unit of Measure used for the

processing such as hours of processing or number

of pieces cut.




Set-Up Cost Rate U/M The Unit of Measure used in conjunction with the

cost rate to calculate the cost including any

valid inventory control Unit of Measure as well as

the following:

HRS Hours or processing

CUT Pieces cut

THW Theoretical weight per UM

Run Cost Rate The Processing Cost Rate per Unit of Measure for a

production job.

Run Cost Rate U/M The Unit of Measure used to calculate the

Processing Run Cost on a production job.

Operation Code Used in the eSTELpro Job entry procedure, to

determine the type of operation and activate the

necessary program functions.

Options are:

SLT Slitting/Flow through

LEV Leveling/Cut-to-length

SHR Shearing

OPS Process Code OPS Codes

<oprcds>

Used in eSTELtoll. Represents the processing done

on the material. The code is required for

production transactions, as per table 66 defined

in OPS.

Activity Only accessible if eSTELman is installed.

The Activity code identifies the activity to be

performed on any Process or PWC in the warehouse,

such as, Head Setup, Operation, Packaging, Tear-

Down, Lubrication, Electrical maintenance. There

must be a code for every activity whether it is to

be used for order costing purposes or for

scheduling and reporting purposes only.

NOTE: The same code can be used for any Process

or PWC as the cost rates are identified

only in relation to a Process or PWC.

Opr Time The standard time for performing an Activity,

expressed in minutes. When added to the time

given to perform other Activities for the Process,

this is used to estimate the total processing

time.

Nbr Opr The number of people normally assigned to the

Activity on this Process. This number can be

different from the number of operators actually

assigned to the task as the order is processed.

Opr Cost Rate The standard cost of labor for the Activity on the

Process. If a Part Specifications record exists

for this Customer/Product combination, the field

defaults from that record.

UM The Unit of Measure for the standard cost. This

must be a valid Unit of Measure.

Source of Costing C C, P Determines how quantities are costed.

Options are:

C Consumption

P Production

NOTE: This code is not applicable when the

Production Costing Method is S-Standard

Costing




Process Mode Spaces F, P, T Used to control production entry in eSTELman. If

eSTELman is not installed on your system, this

field can be left blank.

Once a value (P, F or T) has been assigned to this

field, it cannot be changed.

Options are:

F - Flow Through step

P - Production Tag (manual eSTELman mode. A

Production Process creates a brand new

Product Item. Both Consumption and

Production products must be entered for the

Job Step. For Tag Master Required

products, new tag numbers must be assigned

to the Production Items. You must use a

Production Process when you need to change

the quantity, dimension, gauge or product

coding (Grp/Size/Grade).

T - Time only step. The Time Process is used

for scheduling and recording job statistics

only. No Weights or inventory items are

affected. It allows you to schedule

activities, track Process Work Center

efficiency, and record the total time spent

in the performance of various tasks without

having to enter actual production and

consumption of inventory. Costs associated

with Time Steps are memo items. They can

be reviewed while the job is open, but they

are not directly added to any Production

Items or General Ledger accounts.

Spaces When this field is spaces, the Process

cannot be used on an eSTELman job.



PRODUCTION SEQUENCE

The Production Sequence code is a user-defined code representing a combination of up to three

Production Process codes. The Production Sequence codes are validated against the Process code file.

For convenience, a look-up is provided in this field.

A Product Installation Option is available to default a Production Sequence code during Sales Order

Entry.

Production Sequence

1. Production Sequence. CTL

2. Processes.......... CUT CTL

3. Default Allocation. Y

4. Default WKO Print.. S


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Production Sequence screen


Default Allocation Y N, Y Controls the creation of the default Allocation

during Sales Order and Quote entry.

Options are:

N A default inventory allocation is not created

for the item.

Y (Default.) A default inventory allocation is

created once the item is committed.

Refer to the Sales Order manual for a detailed

discussion of default allocations.

Default WKO Print S N, S, Y Determines the default value of the Work Order

Required field on the Sales Order and Quote Item.

Options are:

N An ‘N’ is copied to the Order Item Work Order

Required field. Denotes that a Work Order

Form is not required for the Order Item.

S (Default.) The Order Item Work Order Required




field is defaulted based on the Sales Category

of the item.

Y A ‘Y’ is copied to the Order Item Work Order

Required field. Denotes that a Work Order

Form is required for the Order Item.



SOURCE

The Source code is used in Sales and Purchase Order Entry to identify the origin of material. In this way,

you can retain statistical information about products that have been purchased and sold. Each Source can

include a Statement of Origin and specify if Origin Verification is required.

Example: Sources are commonly used to distinguish foreign from domestic material, or stock from

buyout material.

At least one Source code must exist. It can be a blank (spaces) code.

Source

1. Source.............. D

2. Description......... DOMESTIC

3. Origin Verification. N

4. Statement of Origin.


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Source screen


Source Source Code. Use the <F9> look-up function to

view a list of available Source codes.

Description Source Code description.

Origin Verification N N or Y Distinction of Material Origin flag.

N-No (default). Verification of Material Origin

is not required.

Y-Yes. The Source code is verified for tags

reserved to a Quote/SO/ BL or Invoice. The

material’s Mill/Heat source code must match the

sales order item source code.

Statement of Origin Statement of Origin (50 Char). If entered the

statement, always prints on Test Certificate,

Bill of Lading and Invoice forms when Mill/Heat

and Chemistry are printed.




Example: ‘Smelted and Manufactured in the USA’.

Usage Status A A, D or I Usage Status.

Warning

Changing the Source code Origin Verification flag from N to Y affects all open Orders, Bills of Lading,

Invoices and Production Jobs that are currently referencing the Source code.

Invera recommends running the Material Source Exception report for a listing of reservation records that

have been made invalid when the flag is changed.

Source Code Look-Up

Source code Look-Up screen:

Source Code Lookup

Src Desc O Statement of Origin

__ _______________ _ __________________________________________________

D DOMESTIC N Smelted and Manufactured in USA

DS DIRECT SHIPMENT N

F FOREIGN N

N NOT APPLICABLE N

ST STOCK N

US USA Y Smelted and Manufactured in the USA

1-Search

Source Code Look-Up fields:

Field Name Description

Src Source Code

Desc Description (truncated where required - always displays at least first 20

characters)

O Origin Verification flag.

Statement of Origin Statement of Origin (displays at least first 40 characters).



PRODUCT END USE

Product End Use is an optional field on the Sales Order Item screen. It is used to denote the End Use of a

customer's purchase. A Product Installation Option, EUS=XXX is used to default an End Use code

during Sales Order Entry. The End Use code is printed on the Order Forms. It can be used in quality

control to verify that the material shipped meets the customer's requirements.

Product End Use

1. Product End Use..... OFF

2. End Use Desc........ OFFICE FURNITURE AND FIXTURES

3. End Use Quality..... 1


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product End Use screen

Field Restrictions

The following field is only accessible if eSTELmill is installed:

End Use Quality



CASH PAYMENT METHOD TYPE

The Cash Payment Method Types table allows you to define the various payment methods used during

cashier processing, such as cash, Visa or Master Card.

NOTE: This table is used for the Counter Sales Procedure only. Refer to the Sales Order manual for

more details.

Cash Payment Method Type

1. Cash Payment Method. AMX

2. Description......... AMERICAN EXPRESS

3. Payment Method Type. C


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Cash Payment Method Type screen


Cash Payment Method Identifies the method of cash payment.

Example:

CSH Cash payment

VIS Visa

MC Master Card

Description Optional Cash Payment Method Description.

Payment Method Type C, D, K, S For each Cash Payment Method, you must enter a

Payment Method Type.

Valid options are:

C Credit card

D Debit card

K Check

S Cash



LOCATION/DELIVERY PRINTER

This table defines the Pick List printer location based on a Warehouse, Location and Delivery Method

combination. The intention of this table is to print the Pick List based on the default Location field

defined in the Standard Location table. This corresponds to the area of the warehouse where the material

is located.

NOTE: This table is used for the Counter Sales Procedure only. Refer to the Sales Order manual for

more details.

Location / Delivery Method Printer

1. Warehouse........... SPR

2. Location............ 3S1

3. Delivery Method..... CP

4. Branch.............. SAN

5. Printer............. LP17


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Location/Delivery Printer screen


Warehouse Warehouse

reference

Enter the Warehouse.

Location Enter the default location as defined in the

Standard Location table.

Delivery Method CP, CB Enter the Delivery Method

Valid options are:

CP Counter Pick up

CB Common Carrier with Auto BL

Branch Branch

reference

Enter the Branch code.

Printer Printer

reference

Enter a valid printer.



PRODUCT PICKING TICKET

The Product Picking Ticket reference file program is used to specify the Branch and Product

combinations for which you require a Product Picking Ticket.

Product Picking Ticket

1. Selling Branch......

2. Group.......

3. Size................

4. Grade...............

5. Imm. Ship Printer...


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy


Selling Branch User

Branch

Branch

reference

file

Verified against the Order Selling Branch when

printing the Product Picking Ticket.

Group Group

reference

Verified against the Order Item Group when


Size Verified against the Order item Size when printing

the Product Picking Ticket.

Grade Grade

reference

Verified against the Order Item Grade when


The Group, Size, Grade combination must be a valid

Product Master.

Imm Ship Printer Printer

reference

file

Printer used to print the Product Picking Ticket.

Must be a valid Printer for the Branch and it must

have a ZEBMULT Printer Type.



SALES CATEGORY WORK ORDER PRINTING

The Sales Category Work Order Printing table is used to define printers for the combinations of Sales

Categories and Shipping Branches. It is used by the Order printing program. This table provides you

with the ability to send items to different printers based on their Sales Categories and Shipping branches.

Sales Category Work Order Printing

1. Item Sales Category.... WS

2. Item Shipping Branch.. PHI

3. Printer............. ILP5


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Sales Category Work Order Printing screen



MANAGER OPTIONS

The Manager Options table is an extension of the Branch Options table. It is used to record Printer

defaults by Branch for specific functions like the Profit verification, Counter Sales, Bill of Lading

gateway and Bill of Lading User Defaults.

Manager Options

1. Branch.............. PHI

Printer Defaults

2. Manager Printer...... ILP4N2E

3. Counter Receipt Prtr.

4. Loading Prtr ........ ILP2

5. Shipping Prtr ....... ILP3005W

6. BL Summary Prtr ..... ILP3005W

7. Certificate Prtr .... ILP3005W

8. Label Prtr .......... ILP3005W

9. Usage Status ........ A

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Manager Options screen


Branch Branch

Reference

Enter the Branch where the printers are located.

Manager Printer Brh Prtr Used when the Profit Verification function is on.

This is the printer on which the Profit Hold Log

is printed when an Order is profit held and the

Product Installation Option PLG=X (Print Log) is

set to Y-Yes.

Counter Receipt Prtr Brh Prtr Used when the Counter Sales function is on. This

field is only accessible when the CSH=X Product

Installation Option is set to Y-Yes.

This is the alternate Counter Receipt printer. It

is used when the Customer’s Terms are on Account

(non-cash).

Loading Prtr Brh Prtr Used by the BL Gateway to automatically print the

Load Bill of Lading form after a BL is created.

Also defaults to the BL User Defaults pop-up

window when a User accesses the Bill of Lading

program for the first time.

Shipping Prtr Brh Prtr Used by the BL Gateway to automatically print the

Ship Bill of Lading form after a BL is created.







BL Summary Prtr Brh Prtr Used by the BL Gateway to automatically print the

BL Summary form after a BL is created (Print

Summary flag must be set to Y in the BL Header).




Certificate Prtr Brh Prtr Used by the BL Gateway to automatically print the

Test Certificate type S or T after a Bill of

Lading is created.




Label Prtr Brh Prtr Used by the BL Gateway to automatically print

Shipping Labels after a Bill of Lading is created.




Usage Status A A, D, I Usage Status.




6. PURCHASING INFORMATION

BUYERS

The Buyer code is used in purchasing functions to identify the person responsible for a product or Purchase

Order. The Buyer is printed at the bottom of the Purchase Order form and can be used as a selection criterion

for some purchasing reports.


Buyers

1. Buyer............... AB

2. Name................ ALLAN BATES

3. Buyer Branch........


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Buyers screen

NOTE: The Buyer Branch field is accessible in Add and Change modes. Entries in this field are

validated against the Branch table. This field is for future implementation.

6. Purchasing Information Page 238


PURCHASE ORDER CATEGORIES

Purchase Order Categories are used to analyze and classify purchases according to user-defined groupings.

For example, purchases can be categorized as Mill or Buyout orders, or they can be grouped along the lines

of Domestic/Foreign.

If you are using the non-steel purchasing function, you must establish a non-steel purchase order category to

be used in the required Product Installation Options set of the Receiver Entry, Purchase Order Entry and

Purchase Cost Reconciliation functions.

A Purchase Order Category is entered on the Purchase Order Header so that reports and inquiries on open

purchases can be run by category.

At least one Purchase Order Category must be created. It can be a blank (spaces) code.

P.O. Categories

1. P/O Category........ DO

2. Description......... Dock Storage


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Purchase Order Categories screen



ORDER STATUS

Order Status codes are used in Sales Order and Purchasing functions. In Sales Order Entry, these codes

reflect the status of the order in the production/shipping cycle.

These codes provide a similar function in purchasing. They enable you to identify the different stages of the

order.

At least one code must exist. It can be spaces (blank).

Order Status Codes

1. Order Status........ ENT

2. Description......... ENTRY IN PROCESS


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Order Status Codes screen



CONDITION CODES

Condition codes are used to describe the condition of inventory. In Purchase Order entry, they can serve

as either ‘pre-conditions’ to be verified at the time of receiving, or as conditions that describe the material

being purchased.

Conditions codes are also used in numerous eSTELPLAN inventory applications to place a predefined

code or series of codes on a particular product in inventory. They are entered by means of a pop-up

window in such functions as Inventory Receipts and Inventory Processing. The codes are then stored as

part of the Product Item and are displayed in different Inventory screens including the Stock Available

and Tag Inquiries.

These codes can be used as additional selection criteria for inventory reporting and Stock Inquiry

purposes.

In setting up the Inventory Conditions, we suggest that you use easy-to-remember mnemonic codes.

Examples: CLN Clean RST Rusty

DRY Dry WVY Wavy

BNT Bent Edges OIL Oily Surface

Condition Codes

1. Condition Code...... CLN

2. Condition Desc...... Clean


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Condition Codes screen

NOTE: Conditions codes are optional but it is recommended that at least one code exists.



The system stores the Inventory Conditions in a compressed format separated by slashes (e.g.

BNT/RST/WVY), up to a maximum of 50 characters. Therefore, if you intend to use more than 12

conditions at one time, you must set them up as 2-character codes.



STANDARD MESSAGES

Standard Messages are used in Sales Order Processing and Purchase to create preformatted messages for

specific forms. These messages are automatically printed on each and every form of the type selected in

the window:

There are two types of standard messages:

Standard Forms Printing messages

Customer/Vendor Remarks messages

Standard Forms Printing Messages

You can preset messages for the following forms:

ACK Acknowledgments

BLB Barcoded Bill of Lading

BOL Bill of Lading Print

GPQ Request for Quote form (future implementation)

INV Invoices

JOB eSTELpro Job Work Order

MCC Manifest Form – Common Carrier

MCP Manifest Form Customer Pick-up

MOT Manifest Form – Our Truck

MPO eSTELman forms

MTC Mill Test Certificates

ORD Sales and Transfer Order Forms

POR Purchase Orders

QTE Quote

RCR Receiver Form

STM Customer Statements

TBL Toll Bill of Lading

TIV Toll Invoices

TOD Toll Orders

TRC Toll Receivers

WKO Work Order forms

The remarks must be entered exactly the way they are to be printed on the form.

Examples: “No Returns Accepted After 10 Days”

“Receiving Hours 8:00 - 5:00”

“Purchase Order Confirmation Required”

“Received by: ____________________”



Standard Message

1. Standard Message.... POR

2. Message Number...... 4

3. Remark Description.. Our order number must appear on all Invoices.


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Standard Messages screen



REMARK TEMPLATES

You can group, under a template, remarks intended to serve as general guidelines for various operations

such as the handling, packing or shipping of merchandise.

The following screens demonstrate how templates are defined and how remarks are entered.

Remark Templates

1. Remark Template..... HANDLING

Remarks Templates screen



Remark Templates

1. Remark Template..... HANDLING

Remark

**** CUSTOMER MATERIAL HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS ****

[̂ ] FORKLIFT Capacity: ̂ ^̂ ^̂ LBS

[̂ ] CRANE Capacity: ̂ ^̂ ^̂ LBS Type: ̂ ^̂ ^̂ ̂

[̂ ] HAND TRUCK Capacity: ̂ ^̂ ^̂ LBS

**** UNLOADING INFORMATION ****

[̂ ] Side [̂ ] Rear [̂ ] Overhead

Maximum Skid Wgt: ̂ ^̂ ^̂ Maximum Skid Height: ̂ ^̂ ^̂

3 / 99

Remark Templates window

Special Prompting Characters

The Remarks Templates can include a string of special prompting characters. This string, a series of

^^^^^^, is used when the weight, dimensions or quantity of the material could be different from one

transaction to another. This feature allows you to replace the character string by information (such as the

product weight) specific to a transaction. In this way, the same remark can be used in numerous

applications, requiring only the replacement of the ^^^^^^ for each as required.

The number of ^ entered should correspond to the maximum length of the field. For example, if a field

accepts a maximum of 5 characters, enter ^^^^^. If it accepts only 2, enter ^^.




7. CUSTOMER ACCOUNT MAINTENANCE

OVERVIEW

Customer Accounts contain information used by the Accounts Receivable module to capture and store each

transaction for accounting and reporting purposes.

Regular customers should have their own accounts, so that you can analyze their transactions and compile

sales statistics for your sales personnel.

Many companies also open one or more Customer Accounts for cash sales or miscellaneous transactions.

You can then use the Invoicing and Accounts Receivable functions without having to set up a new account

for every individual or company that makes only one purchase. Miscellaneous Customer Accounts are also

useful for posting rebates or sales of assets.

At least one ‘miscellaneous’ customer account should be added.

7. Customer Account Maintenance Page 248


CUSTOMER ACCOUNTS

The Customer table contains static information pertaining to the customers who buy from your company.

Some data, such as Name and Address, appear on packing slips, invoices and other eSTELPLAN

documents. Other data in these records is used for tax calculations and sales reporting.

Each Customer is identified by a number. Depending on the way your system is installed, the Customer

number is assigned automatically or it can be manually entered.

The Customer table is required for any Accounts Receivable, Sales Order Entry or Invoicing functions.

Adding Customer Accounts

Manual Procedure

1. Collect all customer information required to establish credit.

2. Perform credit analysis and approve or reject credit.

3. Establish Credit Limit and Terms of Payment.

4. Fill out a Customer Account input form.

5. For multiple shipping addresses, fill out Ship-To Information input forms (refer to the next section for

details).

6. After you have added Customer Accounts, date and initial the input forms and file them in

chronological order in a Customer maintenance table.

7. Print an updated list of Customer Accounts.



Customer Information

Accessing By Customer Number

1. Customer.. 1010

2. Branch PHI 15. Route 142 Stop 2

3. Name ACME FABRICATION INC 16. Dlvry Mtd CC Prf Ven 1020

4. Address 17. Ship Via OLIN

1305 INDUSTRIAL BLVD. 18. Frt Resp CG

SUITE 101 19. FOB Point

CHARGE TO DESTINATION

PHILADELPHIA, PA 20. Ack Req Y

5. Pos/Zip Cd 19021 21. Chem Req Y Phys Req N

6. Lkup Name ACME FAB 22. Cert Type O

7. Country 1 State PA 23. Nbr Cert Shp 2 Inv 1

8. Tel Number 215 639 3265 24. P/O Reqd Y

9. Fax Number 215 639 9760 25. Shpg Dtl Y

10. Language E 26. Temp Acct N Cash Acct N

11. Job Req Y 27. Acc Opn Dt 08/28/97

12. Slp Inside JG Outside SH 28. Pymt Trm 1

13. Sales Ter PA 29. SIC Code 2514

14. Bill-To 30. ABC Code A Mail Code A

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy 3-Others

Customer Information – first screen


Accessing By Customer Number

1. Customer.. 1010 ACME FABRICATION INC

31. Tax Rgn Apl License Number Review Dt

PA E 3211211 05/25/99

NT2 E

NT3 E

PAPH A

32. Lte Chg N Type 1 Rate Grc Min

33. Pur Cntc FRED STEPHENS

34. AP Cntc STEVE HENDERSON

35. Dun No 52635245 Rate Cd Rate Dt 03/31/99

36. Cus Cat FF

37. Nbr Inv 1 44. Cr Limit 100000 Pcnt 5

38. Stmt Cycl A 45. % Rcv Alw 10.00

39. Paydex 75 Dt 03/31/99 46. Cr Dy Alw 60

40. Cr Auth 3 47. Currency US

41. Cr Ctrl AA 48. Ins Amt

42. Cr Rvw Dt 08/21/95 49. Odue Inv Gr

43. Cr Exp Dt 50. Remit-to Add 51.Usg Sts A

Item No :


Customer Information – second screen




Customer Enter the Customer number. You can use the

automatic or manual number assignment (manual

assignment requires the setting of a User Menu

Option).

Branch Branch

reference

A physical location at which the company

operates. It is used to identify and sort all

operational transactions, products, customers,

vendors, and financial transactions, by

location where the activity takes place.

Name Enter the Customer Name.

Address Enter the Customer address. The fourth line

of the address is reserved for the Customer’s

Postal City and State. The information must

be entered and formatted according to local

postal regulations. E.g., Philadelphia PA

Pos/Zip Cd Enter the Customer Postal/Zip code.

Lkup Name A commonly used but meaningful abbreviation of

the Customer Name, to cross-reference

customers to their account number in the

Customer Look-Up and the Accounts Receivable

functions. Also used to sort customers in

alphabetical order for Accounts Receivable

reports. The Customer Look-Up Name must be

unique.

Country Country

reference

Enter the Customer’s Country code.

State State/Province

reference

Enter the Customer’s State (USA) or Province

(Canada) code.

NOTE: The field is used in reports and

inquiries only. It is NOT USED in the

Customer mailing address.

Tel number Enter the Customer’s Telephone number.

Fax number Enter the Customer’s Fax number. If eSTELfax

is installed, there are specific fax number

requirements. Refer to the eSTELfax manual

for details.

Language The Language Code is a user-defined code

indicating the language of a Customer or

Vendor. It defaults to the Base Language Code

entered in the Installation Options table.

Job Req N N, Y Used if the customer typically has orders

processed, which are job-related.

This triggers order entry to request entry of

a Job number.

Slp Inside/Outside Salesperson

reference

Used to identify the salespersons responsible

for the Customer Account.

Sales Ter Sales Territory

reference

Used to assign individual customer accounts to

a geographic area to help sales management to

prepare reports.

Bill-To Customer

reference

Used to specify the Customer Number for the

central region (Bill-To Number) when a central

billing account is required to group the

accounts receivable for several accounts. The

Invoice Update functions then creates all Open

Items under the Bill-To Number although it

updates sales information based on the Sold-To




Customer Number. Note that it is recommended

that you set up the Sold-To and Bill-To

customers with the same Credit Control codes

and Terms.

The default is 0. The field is optional at

all times. However, if a Customer Number is

entered, any Customer Number can be used

except the current one.

Route Used to indicate the normal delivery sequence

for a Customer or a Vendor.

Stop Used to indicate the normal stops on the

normal delivery route sequence for a Customer

or a Vendor.

Dlvry Mtd CC, CP,OT Works in conjunction with the Freight

Responsibility field information. It is used

to indicate which Delivery Method is to be

used by default to ship the material to a

Customer or to receive material from Vendor.

Valid codes are:

CC Common Carrier

CP Customer Pick up (Not applicable in

Purchase Order Entry)

OT Our Truck

If the Delivery Method is ‘CP’, then the

Freight Responsibility Charge code must be

‘CPU’ and vice versa.

Prf Ven Vendor

reference



Carrier.

Ship Via Used to specify the preferred method for

shipments to a Customer or from a Vendor.

Frt Resp Freight

Responsibility

reference

The Freight Responsibility code is used to

indicate which party is responsible for paying

freight for a Purchase Order or Sales Order

transaction. The code is validated against

the Freight Responsibility table. The

Description is printed on forms for customer

and vendor reference.

Each Freight Responsibility code is user-

defined. It includes a Freight Charge code

(for example, PPD-Prepaid, CHG-Charge, COL-

Collect, CPU-Customer Pick Up or INC-included)

that is used to determine the type and cost of

freight to be applied to the transaction

within eSTELPLAN.

FOB Point Free on board. Used to designate the delivery

point for material purchases.

Ack Reqd N N, Y This field indicates whether or not the

Customer requires acknowledgement for each

order.

Valid codes are:

Y Yes

N No

Chem Req N N, Y Used in Order Processing, Purchasing, Bill Of

Lading and Invoicing functions to control the

printing of a Certificate of Chemical Tests.

It indicates that the customer requires




material chemical certification with each

order.

Valid codes are:

Y Required

N Not required

Phys Reqd N N, Y Used in Order Processing, Purchasing, Bill of

Lading and Invoicing functions to control the

printing of a Certificate of Physical Tests

for the order. It indicates that the customer

requires material physical certification with

each order.

Valid codes are:

Y Required

N Not Required

Cert Type O O, C, S, T Used to specify the type of Certificate

required when Physical or Chemical Tests are

required.

Valid codes are:

O Original Certificate

C Certificate of Compliance. The Chemistry

and Physical Analysis required with the

shipment are printed on a separate

Certificate Form generated from the Test

Certificate Entry program.

S Separate Certificate of Compliance. This

Certificate of Compliance is automatically

generated from the Bill of Lading Item.

One certificate is created per Bill of

Lading Item. It is printed along with the

Bill of Lading Form when you exit the Bill

of Lading program.

T Tag Certificate of Compliance. This

Certificate of Compliance is automatically

generated from the Bill of Lading Item for

Tag Master required products only. One

Certificate is created per Bill of Lading

Item Reservation that has a unique

Group/Size/Grade/Mill/Heat and Physical

information. There is no Total Weight and

Pieces information on the Certificate. The

Certificate is printed along with the Bill

of Lading Form when you exit the Bill of

Lading program.

Nbr Cert Shp Number of copies of certificates sent with the

shipment.

When the Cert Type is S or T, determines

the number of copies of Test Certificates

that print along with the Bill of Lading

form.

When the Cert Type is O and IMG=Y on the

Bill of Lading Entry program, defaults to

the Cpy field of the Print Certificates

window and determines the number of copies

of images (Original Mill Test Certificates)

that print.

When the Cert Type is C, used for

information only.




Nbr Cert Inv Number of copies of certificates to be mailed

to the customer with the invoice.

P/O Reqd N N, Y Used to force the entry of a customer Purchase

Order Number in Order Entry and Invoice Entry

for the customer.

Shpg Dtl N N, Y Used for Tag Master Required Products to show

on Invoice the details of the Tags.

Temp Acct N N, Y The Temporary Account allows the use of a new

account for quotation purposes. Created by

the Salesperson during the Quotation, the

temporary account is then finalized by the

Credit Department before the processing of the

first order.

Cash Acct N N, Y A code in the Customer reference table that is

used to identify a customer record as a cash

account. Cash accounts can be set up for

customers that make one time purchases and for

whom you do not want to keep statistics.

Valid options are:

N (Default). No change is allowed to the

Customer Name and Address, or the Ship-To

Name and Address fields in the eSTELquote,

Sales Order, Invoice and Cash Receipts

Entry programs.

Y Changes are allowed to the Customer Name

and Address or the Ship-To Name and Address

fields in the eSTELquote, Sales Order,

Invoice and Cash Receipts Entry programs.

NOTE: Cash Customers set for the Counter

Sales Procedure must have the Cash Acct

field set to Y-Yes.

Acct Opn Dt System

Date

Valid Date It is the date the Account was first opened.

Used for collection or credit review purposes.

Pymt Trm Terms of

Payment

reference

Used to identify the rate of discounts, the

number of days granted to take advantage of a

discount and the number of days until full

payment of the balance of the invoice is due.

SIC Code SIC reference It is a recognized coding system designed by

the U.S. government to identify the type of

business conducted by a company. It is used

in Customer and Vendor accounts for

identification purposes.

ABC Code Used for an ABC rating code, for reference or

selection of specific classes of customers.

The ABC Classification is not linked with

Sales Analysis reports. It is shown on the

Customer Information lists.

Mail Code User-defined code used to segregate groups of

customers for promotional purposes. The Mail

code is not validated.

Tax Rgn Tax Region

reference

Used to represent the taxing authority for

which the Sales Tax is collected. Every

taxing authority is represented by a unique

Tax Region, so that the Sales Tax Report can

be printed and submitted to the authority as

an audit trail of the sales tax collected.




Lte Chg N N, Y This code determines whether or not the

Customer is charged a Late Payment Charge on

overdue transactions.

Valid codes are:

N Late Payments are not charged.

Y Charge Late Payment Charges.

Pur Cntc Identifies the Customer’s buyer or purchasing

agent.

AP Cntc Identifies, at the customer’s location, the

individual responsible for the accounts

payable.

Dun No The Dun and Bradstreet Account Number for a

Company, Customer or Vendor.

Rate Cd Used to indicate the Duns and Bradstreet

rating code for the customer.

Rate Dt The date the Dun & Bradstreet rating code for

the Customer was established or last revised.

The date is entered manually. It defaults to

the System Date.

Cus Cat Customer/Vendor

Categories

A code used to group Customers/Vendors for

Sales and Sales Budgeting reports.

Nbr Inv 1 Used to specify the number of Invoice sets you

want the Invoice Printing function to produce

for this customer.

Stmt Cycl N A, B, C, D or N Determines whether or not the customer

receives a Statement of Account and at what

frequency the Statement is printed.

Valid codes are:

A, B, C, D or N (No Statement)

NOTE: The only pre-defined Statement Cycle

code is N for No Statement.

Paydex The Paydex code refers to the Dun & Bradstreet

coding method for establishing patterns of

payment. The code is expressed as a numerical

score and gives you an instant overview of how

a firm pays its bills. Furthermore, the score

is available on the firm's Payment Analysis

Report. You may establish your own rating

system.

Dt Indicates the date the Paydex rating was

established or last revised. The date

defaults to the system date.

Cr Auth Credit

Authority

reference

A code set in the Customer reference

information table identifying the credit

person assigned the overall responsibility for

a Customer’s account.

Cr Ctrl Credit Control

reference

Associated with an Action code, the Credit

Control codes are used to determine the credit

ranking of an account and to control the Order

Entry function by warning Order Entry

personnel of credit alert situations, or by

preventing the entry of Sales Orders

altogether.

NOTE: It is recommended that you set up the

Sold-To and Bill-To Customers with the




same Credit Control Codes.

Cr Rvw Dt The date a Customer’s Credit Limit is

established or the date of its last revision.

The Credit Limit must be reviewed on a regular

basis. When the period since the last review

date exceeds that pre-established limit, new

Orders are automatically held for credit

verification.

Cr Exp Dt The date entered to determine the expiry date

of a Customer’s Credit Limit. This Expiry

Date is only used with the Automatic Credit

Hold (optional function). At the Credit Limit

Expiry Date, the Sales Orders are held.

Cr Limit The Customer’s credit limit with your company.

When modified, the Customer’s credit limit is

verified against the Maximum Credit Limit set

in the Accounts Receivable Company table.

Beyond the Maximum Credit Limit, the AR

Company password must be used to enter a

larger amount than the allowed limit.

Pcnt Percentage added to a Customer’s Credit Limit

before an order is rejected because his

Exposure exceeds his Credit Limit. To be used

with the Automatic Credit Hold.

% Rcv Alw This is the percentage of Aged Receivables

allowed before credit is held. Used in

conjunction with the Aging Days Allowed field

to control credit verification. The field can

be accessed only if Automatic Credit hold is

used.

Cr Dy Alw The average number of overdue days allowed

before credit is held.

The field can be accessed only if Automatic

Credit Hold is used.

Enter one of the following values:

0

30

60

90

120

Currency Customer’s Currency. This field cannot be

changed once the application is live.

Ins Amt The amount of Accounts Receivable insurance

coverage for the customer.

Odue Inv Gr This field determines the grace period for

overdue invoices. It specifies the number of

grace days allowed past the regular Accounts

Receivable Open Item Due Date before the

Customer’s Order is put on credit hold.

This information is entered in the Customer

Reference table. All Accounts Receivable Open

Items (including partially paid Open Items)

for the customer are verified against the

Customer’s Overdue Invoice Grace period.

Example: Grace Days = 15

All the Customer’s Orders are put on hold if

ONE invoice, in the Open Accounts Receivable,




is more than 15 days overdue.

Grace Days = 0

The credit check is not applicable to the

customer.

Remit-to Add A number used to identify Alternate Company

Names and Addresses. It is used for specific

forms printing functions where the standard

eSTELPLAN Company Name stored in the eSTELPLAN

Company table and/or the Branch table cannot

be used.

Restrictions

If the Delivery Method used is CP then the Freight Code of the Freight Responsibility must be CPU.

This prevents the accidental charging of freight or freight costs against an Order or Invoice for the

customer.

The Freight Preferred Vendor field is only accessible if the Delivery Method is Common Carrier

(CC).

Others Action Bar Option

When the Others action bar option is selected, the following window is displayed:

Others Information

User Def..... AG

Others Information window


User Def User

Defined

Reference

Customized 2-character code. Enter a valid User

Defined code or leave blank and press <F1>.

Telephone Numbers

Telephone Numbers must be established based on the physical location of the Branch in relation to the

Customer.

Example:

The Branch entering the Customer number is Philadelphia

The Customer is located in New York

The Customer’s Telephone number must include the New York Area code along with the Telephone

number



Overseas Customers

The Telephone number should include the complete Area code and Telephone number.

Fax Numbers

If eSTELfax is installed, Fax numbers must be set up based on the location of the fax modem. Refer to

the eSTELfax manual for details.

Physical Tests

The following fields are used in Order Processing, Bill of Lading and Invoicing functions to control the

printing of a Certificate of Physical Tests (similar to Chemistry) for the order.

Chemical Tests Required

Physical Tests Required

Type of Certificate

Number of Certificates with Shipment

Number of Certificates with Invoice

NOTES: For details on how to establish the customer credit parameters, refer to the Credit

Verification section of the Accounts Receivable manual.

A date should be entered in the Credit Limit Expiry Date field. Otherwise, all orders will be

held for Credit Release by the Automatic Credit Verification program.

Temporary Accounts

In Add mode, you can change it from N-No (default) to Y-Yes.

In Change mode, you can change it from Y-Yes to N-No but you cannot change it back from N-No to

Y-Yes.

Recommendations

As you would need to change the Customer name and Address on the Quote Header when using the

temporary Customer number, we suggest that you set the Temporary Accounts as Cash Accounts.

If you are dealing with multiple currencies and/or customer languages, we suggest setting a temporary

Customer Account for each Currency and/or Language.

Changing Customer Information

Changing information in the tables should be tightly controlled to ensure that existing open Sales Orders,

open Invoice Entries, Sales statistics and open Accounts Receivable transactions are not adversely

affected.

NOTE: When you change information in a Customer Account, you must check all Ship-To records

for that customer, and change the pertinent information there as well. Otherwise, sales

statistics may be stored under incorrect codes.



Manual Procedure

1. Fill out a Customer Account input form for any change to be made so that there is a permanent

record of the change.

Only the Customer number and Currency fields cannot be changed.

2. Obtain approval from the Credit Manager.

3. After you have changed Customer Accounts, date and initial the input forms and file them in


4. Print an updated list of Customer Accounts.



Changes to Credit Information – Workflow Interface

The following business condition integrates workflow messaging when changes are made to a customer’s

credit information:

Business

Condition

Code

Business

Condition

Description

Message

Type

Workflow Message Application / Workflow Linkage Workflow

Organizational

Levels*

Supported - Yes/No

AR-CREDIT-

INFO

Changes to a

Customer’s

Credit Info

N Credit info has been altered

for customer account ######.


Initiator

Customer Branch Inside Salesperson(T)

Outside Salesperson(T)

C – Yes

B – Yes

W – No T – Yes

E – Yes

Product Installation Options

Credit Limit Password

An option is provided to control the entry of a password if a customer’s credit limit exceeds the company-

wide limit.

Field Access

An option controls access to the following fields:

Terms of Payment

Credit Authority

Credit Control

Credit Review Date

Percentage Aged Receivable Allowed

Credit Days Allowed

Insurance Amount

Overdue Invoice Grace

Refer to the Product Installation Options Guide for details.



CUSTOMER EXTENDED INFORMATION TABLE

This table is used to determine which customers require the printing of Barcodes on the Bill of Lading

Form.


1. Customer.. 1010

2. B/L Bar Required N

3. Email ..

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Customer Information screen



table

Verified against the Customer number on the

Invoice.

B/L Bar Required N N, Y Controls the printing of Barcoded sheets on the

Bill of Lading Form.

N Barcoding is not enabled.

Y Enables barcoding for specific customers.

Email N Stores the email address used to send a Workflow

Message to the Customer.



CUSTOMER BL BARCODE SETUP

The Customer BL Barcode entry screen controls some of the information printed on the Bill of Lading

Barcoded sheets. If the record is not set up, this information is printed as spaces on the Bill of Lading.

Customer B/L Barcode Setup


2. Ship-To Number...... 1

3. Supplier Number..... 5268

4. B/L Number Prefix... AC

5. Cus PO No Prefix.... AC

6. Cus Part Number Pfx. AC

7. Pieces Prefix....... AC

8. Measure Prefix...... AC

9. Weight Prefix....... AC

10. Quantity UM Prefix.. AC

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Customer BL Barcode Setup entry screen



Reference

Enter the Customer requiring Barcoded Bill of

Lading Forms

Ship-To Number Customer

Ship-To

Reference

(Optional) Enter the Customer Ship-To if

required.

Supplier Number Enter your Supplier number. This is usually

assigned by your customer to help them identify

your company when shipments are received.

Data Identifier Codes: Data Identifier (DI) codes identify the data

contents of the barcode, E.g., P – Part Number.

B/L Number Prefix Data Identifier code for the Bill of Lading

number. Recommended: 2K

Cus PO No Prefix Data Identifier code for the Customer PO number

Recommended: K

Cus Part Number Pfx Data Identifier code for the Customer Part

number. Recommended: P

Pieces Prefix Data Identifier code for the number of Pieces on

the shipment. Recommended: Q

Measure Prefix Data Identifier code for the quantity shipped

(e.g., feet). Recommended: 1Q




Weight Prefix Data Identifier code for the weight shipped.

Recommended: 2Q

Quantity UM Prefix Data Identifier code for the quantity Unit of

Measure. Recommended: 3Q



CUSTOMER SHIP-TO INFORMATION

This function is used to define shipping information about customers.

The Ship-To information is only required if the Customer has multiple shipping addresses to which you

regularly deliver material.

Example: The Customer’s mailing address is a Post Office Box, and the material is delivered to one of

their warehouses or job sites.

If you always deliver to the address entered in the Customer Account, there is no need to add a Ship-To

address, as the shipping address automatically defaults to that of the Customer Account.

Adding Ship-To Information

Manual Procedure

1. For each new address, fill out a Ship-To Information input form (see Reference Coding Forms

manual).

Some codes in the address record determine calculations performed in Invoice Update, so the record

must be correctly coded and entered.

2. Obtain approval from the Sales or Credit Manager.

3. Every field in the Ship-To Information defaults to the information from the Customer Account and

may be changed as required, but not all fields from the Customer Account are used. For details on

the fields, see the Customer Accounts section.

4. Ship-To numbers should start at 1 for each customer, so that Order Entry personnel do not have to

look up the address code for each customer.

5. Print an updated Ship-To listing.

6. File the input forms in chronological order in a Customer maintenance table.

NOTE: Before adding new addresses, you can use the Customer Inquiry to display the Ship-To

Information for each customer.



Customer Ship-to Information

Accessing By Customer/Ship-To

1. Customer Number..... 1010 ACME FABRICATION INC


3. Name................ ACME FABRICATION

4. Address - Line 1.... 1254 ROUTE 1

5. Address - Line 2.... SUITE 3423


7. City................ PHILADELPHIA, PA


9. Country............. 1 State... PA

10. Telephone Number.... 215 142 5145

11. Fax Number.......... 797 792 9760

12. Language............ E

13. Purchasing Contact.. FRED STEPHENS

14. Inside Salesperson.. JG

15. Outside Salesperson. SH

16. Sales Territory..... IL

Item No :


Customer Ship-To Information – first screen





17. Route............... 142

18. Stop................ 2

19. Delivery Method..... OT

Preferred Vendor....

20. Ship Via............ OUR TRUCK

21. Frt Responsibility.. CG

22. FOB Point...........

23. Chemical Tests Reqd. Y

24. Physical Tests Reqd. N

25. Type of Certificate. O

26. Nbr of Cert by Shp.. 2

27. Nbr of Cert by Inv.. 1

28. Mail Code........... A

Item No :


Customer Ship-to Information – second screen







Sales Tax 1 Sales Tax 3

29. Tax Region..... PA 31. Tax Region..... NT3

Sls Tax Aplc... E Sls Tax Aplc... E

Sls Tax Lic No. 532141-PS Sls Tax Lic No.

Sls Tax Rvw Dt. 05/16/88 Sls Tax Rvw Dt.

Sales Tax 2 Sales Tax 4

30. Tax Region..... NT2 32. Tax Region..... PAPH

Sls Tax Aplc... E Sls Tax Aplc... A

Sls Tax Lic No. Sls Tax Lic No.

Sls Tax Rvw Dt. Sls Tax Rvw Dt.

33. Payables Contact.... STEVE HENDERSON

34. Dun Number.......... 526352458

Email............... [email protected]


Item No :


Customer Ship-To Information – third screen



Others Information

User Def..... AG



User Def User

Defined

Reference



Restrictions

If the Delivery Method is CP, then the Freight code of the Freight Responsibility must be CPU.

The Freight Preferred Vendor field is only accessible if the Delivery Method is Common Carrier

(CC).



Telephone Numbers

Same Country Customers

Telephone numbers must be established based on the physical location of the Branch in relation to the

Customer.

Example:

The Branch entering the Customer number is Philadelphia

The Customer is located in New York

The Customer's Telephone number must include the New York Area code along with the Telephone

number

Overseas Customers


Fax Numbers


If eSTELfax is installed, Fax numbers must be set up based upon the location of the fax modem. Refer to

the eSTELfax manual for details.

Overseas Customers

The Fax number should include the complete Area code and Fax number. Refer to the eSTELfax manual

for details.

Changing Ship-To Information

Manual Procedure

Changes to the Ship-To Information do not affect existing transactions in the Open Sales Orders or Open

Sales Order Item tables. However, sales statistics recorded under a former code (such as Salesperson or

Sales Territory) will not be changed to new codes.

If existing transactions need to be changed, you must use the Order Entry function described in the Sales

Orders manual.

1. Fill out a Ship-To Information input form for any change to be made, so there is a permanent record

of the change.

2. Obtain approval from the Sales or Credit Manager.

3. After you have changed Ship-To Information, date and initial the input forms and file them in


4. Print an updated Ship-To listing.



CUSTOMER SHIP-TO OVERRIDE NAME/ADDRESS

The Customer Ship-To Override Name/Address table is provided to enter alternate names and addresses

for Customer/Ship-To numbers.

Customer Ship-To Override Name/Address

Accessing By



3. Name............... AKR STEEL INC

4. Address - Line 1... 2500 INDUSTRIAL BLVD.

5. Address - Line 2...

6. Address - Line 3...

7. City............... PHILADELPHIA, PA

8. Postal/Zip Cd...... 19551

9. Country............ 1

10. State Code......... PA

11. Remit-To Address... 1


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Customer Ship-To Override Name/Address

When a record matching the Customer and Ship-To numbers is found in the Customer Ship-To Override

Name/Address table, the alternate name and address stored in this table default to the ‘Sold-to’ section of

the Quote, Order, Bill of Lading and Invoice Headers.

The alternate name and address are then printed instead of the Customer name and address in the

‘Quoted-To’, ‘Ship-To’ and ‘Sold-To’ sections of the following forms:

Quote

Sales Acknowledgement

Order, Shipping, Work Order

Production Work Order

Bill of Lading

Invoice

NOTE: For Invoices, the Customer Ship-To Override Name/Address table is ignored when the

Product Installation Option PST=X is set to Y on the Invoice Form program <ivfsiv>.



ALTERNATE COMPANY NAME AND ADDRESS

This table is provided to enter company names and addresses to be used for specific forms printing where

the standard Company Name stored in the eSTELPLAN Company table and/or the Branch table cannot

be used.

For each address, a number identifies the name and alternate address to be printed on the form. The

Alternate Address feature is controlled through the use of a Product Installation Option on certain

eSTELPLAN forms.

Example: The Invoice Form supports the use of an Alternate Name and Address. To print the

Alternate Company Name and Address number 1 on the Invoices, you would set the Product

Installation Option PMT=1 for the IVFSIV program.

Alternate Company Name and Address

1. Address Number...... 1

2. Company Name........ eSTELPLAN STEEL SERVICE CENTERS

3. Address – Line 1.... P.O. BOX X5

4. Address – Line 2....

5. Address – Line 3....

6. City................ CHICAGO, IL


8. Country............. 1


10. Fax Number.......... 215-356-4320


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Alternate Company Name and Address

NOTE: A Look-Up is provided for the Alternate Company Address. The program can be called by

pressing <F9> in the Address number field of the Alternate Company Address.

In addition, this Look-Up can also be called from the Remit-To field of the Branch Reference

table maintenance program.



CUSTOMER CREDIT REFERENCE

This function defines various credit references that were contacted for initial credit approval and review

of a customer’s account.

Customer Credit Ref. Information

1. Customer Number..... 1020 AMERICAN APPLIANCE

2. Credit Ref Number... 1

3. Company Name........ HAMMOND STEEL

4. City................ CHICAGO, IL

5. Country............. 1

6. Telephone Number.... 312 671 5400

7. Credit Ref Contact.. PAULA MITCHELL

8. Credit Ref Date..... 05/20/99

9. Account Opened Date. 12/10/97

10. High Balance........ 14000

11. Current Balance..... 3500

12. Past Due Remarks....

13. Last Sale Date...... 03/21/99

14. Average Payment Days 12

15. Standard Terms...... NET 30

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Customer Credit Reference Information – first screen

Customer Credit Ref. Information


2. Credit Ref Number... 1

16. Notes...............

CURRENTLY HAVE A BALANCE


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Customer Credit Reference Information – second screen



CUSTOMER REMARKS

In this table, you establish all Customer/Ship-to related Remarks.

You can enter up to 99 lines per type of remark, per Customer/Ship-to combination.

Customer Remarks 15Dec99



3. Remark Type......... S

Customer Remarks

SHIPPING HOURS BETWEEN 7 AM AND 3 PM

DO NOT SHIP IN RAIN

CALL JOHN ROBERTSON 215-345-8549

ALL LOADS MUST BE TARPED

FORK LIFT - REAR UNLOADING

1 / 99

Customer Remarks screen

Valid Types are:

A Allocation. The Allocation remarks provide global instructions to warehouse personnel about

how to process orders for the customer.

They are printed on the Quotation (Internal copy), Work Order, Sales Order and Production

Work Order forms. They are positioned on the form before any of the Order items are printed.

B Bill of Lading Detail. The Bill of Lading Detail remarks are intended for the Shipping

Department and/or for the Customer.

They are printed on the Load and Ship Bill of Lading forms but not on the Bill of Lading

Summary form. They are positioned after the Shipping Remarks and before the BL Standard

Messages, separated from these remarks and messages by a free line.

C Credit. The Credit remarks provide reference information about the Customer's account for the

Credit Department.

They are applicable only to the Customer Account, not to the Customer Ship-To numbers. They

are displayed on the Open Accounts Receivable Inquiry.



D Description. The Description remarks extend the description of the customer's product for

identification or reference.

They are printed on the following forms: Quotation (Customer and Internal copies), Sales

Order, Shipping Order, Work Order, Production Work Order, Sales Acknowledgment,

Loading/Bill of Lading and Invoice.

E Test Cert. Adds a facility to print a comment/statement in the Test Requirements section of the

Order Forms and, on the Bill of Lading Form, before the S-Shipping Remark. The Remark Type

E can be entered from the Bill of Lading Entry, Quote Entry, Order Entry and Transfer Order

Entry. The Remark Type E can be used, among others, to indicate that a certificate must be

notarized.

F Bill of Lading Summary. The Bill of Lading Summary remarks intended for the truck driver.

They are printed on the Bill of Lading Summary form but not on the Load or Bill of Lading

Detail forms. They are positioned after the Shipping Remarks but before the BL Standard

Messages.

H Header. The Header remarks provide general Customer and Production Sales Order remark

information applicable to all items on the Sales Order.

They are printed on the following forms: Quotation (Customer and Internal copies), Sales

Order, Sales Acknowledgment, Shipping Order, Work Order, and Production Work Order. They

are positioned prior to any Order items being printed.

I Invoice. The Invoice remarks are used to add a reference note on some forms.

These remarks are printed on the Quotation (Customer and Internal copies), Sales Order, Sales

Acknowledgment and Invoice forms.

O Order. The Order remarks provide additional information about a Sales Order Item that needs

to be referenced by the customer, as well as, the company.

They are printed in the Customer Order Information section of the Sales Order, Sales

Acknowledgment, Shipping Order, Work Order, Production Work Order forms, and, if the

RMK Product Installation Option is set, the Quotation forms (both Customer and Internal

copies).

M Marketing. The Marketing remarks are used by Salespeople to maintain reference information

about the customer that may help in making the sale (e.g. type of business, products used,

family information, birth dates).

These remarks are displayed in the Quote Entry screen. They are only printed on the Customer

Remarks List.

P Production. The Production remarks provide detailed production specification related remarks

to be used to prepare/process the order in the warehouse.

They are printed on the Quotation (both Customer and Internal copies), the Sales Order, Sales



Acknowledgment, Work Order, and Production Work Order forms.

Q Quotation. The Quotation remarks are used to provide salespeople with remarks they can enter

on a Pricing Inquiry.

They are printed on the Internal Quotation form.

R Pricing. The Pricing remarks can only be entered if eSTELprice is installed. They are only

applicable at the Customer number level. No Ship-To address number can be entered.

In eSTELprice Customer Pricing entry, the Customer Remarks entry program is called

whenever the Pricing Remark field is accessed. The Pricing Remarks are defaulted and can be

overridden as required.

The Pricing Remarks are NOT printed on any forms.

S Shipping. The Shipping remarks are used to provide permanent shipping and handling

reference information to the warehouse regarding packaging and shipping of material.

They are printed on the Quotation (both Customer and Internal copies), Sales Order, Sales

Acknowledgment, Shipping Order, Work Order, Production Work Order and Loading/Bill of

Lading forms.

W Work Order. The Work Order remarks provide messages to Warehouse personnel on how to

process/prepare a customer's order.

They are printed on the Internal Quotation, Transfer/Sales Order, Work Order, Transfer Work

Order and Production Work Order.

They are positioned in the Inventory Reservations section of the forms.

Relative Printing Sequence of the Different Remarks Types

No forms have all of these remarks printed at the same time. However, the example is provided for

reference as to which remarks print before or after others and where on the form they print.

Remarks printing applies to the following eSTELPLAN forms:

eSTELquote Quotation

Sales Acknowledgement

Small Work Order

Large Work Order

Bill of Lading

Invoice

eSTELpro Production Order

For details on the placement of each remark type on each form, see below.

1) Immediately after the Sales Order Header, prior to Sales Order Items.

(On Small Work Order)



X- Sales Order Header ‘H’ Remarks --X

----- Allocation Remarks ----

X- Sales Order Allocation ‘A’ rmks--X

2) On the Order Item Customer Information section/side

X----- Product Description Line 1 ----X


X----- Customer’s Part Number --------X

X- Customer/Ship-to Remark type ‘D’ --X

X- Customer/Ship-to Remark Type ‘O’ --X

X- Customer/Ship-to Remark type ‘I’ --X

X- Customer/Ship-to Remark type ‘P’ --X

X-----Product End Use Description-----X

X-- Sales Order Item Production Specs-X



3) On the Order Item Allocation section/side of form

X- Non-Specific Inventory Allocations X

X--- Purchase Order Reservations -----X

X--- Allocated product Detail info ---X

X Manually entered Allocation Remarks X

X- Customer/Ship-to Remark Type ‘W’ --X

4) Order Item Customer Information section/side – after last Sales Order Item is printed:

X- Customer/Ship-to Remark Type ‘S’ --X

Quotation







X---- Product End Use Description-----X

X- Customer/Ship-to Remark Type ‘Q’ --X

X- Customer/Ship-to Remark Type ‘I’ --X




Sales Acknowledgments










Sales Order Forms

On Customer Sales Order section/side of form


X- Sales Order Header ‘A’ Remarks --X







X- Customer/Ship-to Remark Type ‘P’ --X





On Allocation Section/side of form

X--- Allocated product Detail info ---X

X Manually entered Allocation Remarks X

X- Customer/Ship-to Remark Type ‘W’ --X


Production Work Order Forms

Sales Order number and Item number







X----- Order header Remarks type ‘H’--X

X Order global allocation remarks ‘A’-X




X- Customer/Ship-to Remark Type ‘P’ --X

X- Customer/ship-to remark type ‘W’---X




Bill of Lading Forms






X-- Customer/Ship-to Remarks Type ‘S’-X

Invoice Form






Customer Remarks 15Dec99


2. Ship-To Number...... 1 ACME FABRICATION

3. Remark Type......... A

Standard Message Lookup

No Message Sts

1 NO MILL MARKING - NO STICKERS ON COILS A

2 EDGE SEALER A

3 PKG CODE 102M A

4 EDGE PROTECTORS A

5 SEAL PROTECTORS A

6 3 ID AND 1 OD 1-1/4 IN BANDS A

7 TRK: FLATBED A

8 EYE PARALLEL CARRIER LGTH A

9 PKG SEP: 14 IN SPACING LENGTHWISE BETWEEN COILS A

10 CRANE OVERHEAD UNLOAD - COIL GRABBER A

1-Search

Standard Messages Look-up window



CUSTOMER LOOK-UP

The Customer Look-up provides a listing of valid customers and allows you to rapidly identify and select

the customer you want. It is called by pressing the function key <F9> from every field where you must

enter a Customer number, a Customer Name, or a Customer Look-Up Name.

Customer Lookup

Look-Up Name Cus Name City Cus No Brh

ABC LIGHTING FI ABC LIGHTING FIXTURES CO. CHARLOTTE, NC 4030 PHI

ACME ATELIER DE FABRICATION ACME MONTREAL, QC 1015 PHI

ACME FAB ACME FABRICATION INC. PHILADELPHIA, PA 1010 PHI

ADVANCED ADVANCED METALS & ALUMINUM, INOCEANVIEW, N.Y. 1060 PHI

ADVANCED TEXAS ADVANCED METALS & ALUMINUM, HOHOUSTON, TEXAS 4065 HOU

ADVENTURE ADVENTURE STEEL COMPANY OCEANVIEW, N.Y. 4054 LM

AMERICAN AIRCRA AMERICAN AIRCRAFT CHICAGO, IL 1080 CHI

AMERICAN APPLIA AMERICAN APPLIANCE PITTSBURGH, PA 1020 PHI

AMERICAN STEEL AMERICAN STEEL PROCESSORS PHILADELPHIA, PA 1040 CHI

1-Lkp Nm 2-Pos/Zip Cd 3-Tel Num

Customer Look-Up (Default)

Customer Lookup

Postal Code Cus Name City Cus No Brh

15222 NATIONAL STEEL CORP. 4013 PHI

17106 AMP INCORPORATED HARRISBURG, PA 4035 PHI

18001 TOLL SERVICE & SUPPLY ALLENTOWN, PA 3000 PHI

19001 EASTERN METAL WORKING PHILADELPHIA, PA 2060 PHI

19004 INDUSTRIAL STEEL & SUPPLY LTD PHILADELPHIA, PA 2050 PHI

19007 TRANSFER WAREHOUSE PFS PHILADELPHIA, PA 2010 PHI

19014 JOHNSTON TOOLING PHILADELPHIA, PA 1090 PHI

19021 ACME FABRICATION INC. PHILADELPHIA, PA 1010 PHI

19021 AMERICAN STEEL PROCESSORS PHILADELPHIA, PA 1040 CHI

19021 ASTR0 METALLURGICAL PHILADELPHIA, PA 1001 PHI


Customer Look-Up by Postal Code

Customer Lookup

Telephone NO Cus Name City Cus No Brh

860 639 3265 ACME FABRICATION INC. PHILADELPHIA, PA 1010 PHI

215 639 3265 ASTR0 METALLURGICAL PHILADELPHIA, PA 1001 PHI

215 639 3265 GENERAL SHEET METAL AUBURN, MA 4018 PHI

312 558 4465 AMERICAN AIRCRAFT CHICAGO, IL 1080 CHI

602 246 6565 PHOENIX METAL FABRICATORS INC PHOENIX, AZ 1400 PHI

216 622 5495 LTV CLEVELAND PLANT CLEVELAND, OH 3020 PHI

216 622 5495 LTV CORPORATE CLEVELAND, OH 3010 PHI

216 622 5492 LTV INDIANA HARBOR PLANT CLEVELAND, OH 3030 PHI

216 622 5493 LTV HENNEPIN PLANT CLEVELAND, OH 3040 PHI

505-232-7895 WALTER KIDDE 4008 PHI


Customer Look-Up by Phone Number



You can select a Customer using the Up () or Down () arrows, and then return that customer to the

field of the calling program.

Action Bar Action

Lkp Nm Calls the Look-Up Name pop-up window. Used to display the Customer Look-Up by Look-

Up Name.

Pos/ Zip Cd Calls the Postal/ Zip Code pop-up window. Used to display the Customer Look-Up by

Postal Code.

Tel Num Calls the Phone Number pop-up window. Used to display the Customer Look-Up by Phone

Number.

When you select the Lkp Nm action bar option, the Look-Up Name pop-up window is displayed:

Brh * Lkp Name

Look-Up Name window

When you select the Pos/Zip Cd action bar option, the Postal Code pop-up window is displayed:

Brh * Pos/Zip Cd

Postal/ Zip Code window

When you select the Tel Num action bar option, the Phone Number pop-up window is displayed:

Brh * Tel No

Phone Number window


Branch ‘*’ or

User

Branch

Branch

reference

The Default to this field and its access are

controlled by the BRH=X and ACC=X Product

Installation Options and by your User Access

Rights. They determine whether the Look-Up

displays Customers for a single Branch or all

Branches. Refer to the Product Installation Guide

for more details.

Lkp Name Enter a specific Look-Up Name or a few characters

to get a starting Look-Up Name.

Leave blank to get all Customers displayed by

Look-Up Name.




Postal/Zip Cd Enter a specific Postal Code or the first few

characters to get the Customers that have a Postal

Code starting with these characters.


Postal Code.

The Look-Up ignores the formatting (dashes and

spaces) to ensure that more matches can be

obtained.

Tel Num Enter a specific Phone Number or the first few

digits to get the Customers that have a phone

number starting with these digits.


Phone Number.

The phone number can be entered with or without

the area code and the Look-Up ignores the

formatting (dashes and spaces) to ensure that more

matches can be obtained.


8. VENDOR MAINTENANCE

OVERVIEW

A Vendor Account must be opened before any transaction related to that Vendor can be entered into the

system. The Vendor Account contains information used by the Accounts Payable and Purchasing

modules to capture and store each transaction for accounting and reporting purposes.

Regular Vendors (suppliers with whom you do business on a regular basis) should have their own

accounts, so that you can analyze your transactions with them and compile purchasing statistics.

You should also open one or more accounts for the Vendors you deal with on a one-time or temporary

basis. You can then use the Voucher and Cash Disbursement functions without having to set up a new

account for every individual or company from whom you buy only once or twice.

8. Vendor Maintenance Page 280


VENDOR ACCOUNTS

The Vendor table contains information concerning the Suppliers providing goods and services to your

company.

Add Vendor Accounts

Manual Procedure

1. Collect all vendor information required to establish credit.

2. Fill out a Vendor Account input form (see Appendix A).

3. For multiple shipping addresses, fill out Ship-From information input forms (refer to the next section

for details).

4. After you have added Vendor Accounts, date and initial the input forms and file them in

chronological order in a Vendor maintenance table.

5. Print an updated list of Vendor accounts.

Address

The Vendor address is entered in the Address Lines 1 to 3, City and Postal/Zip Code fields. The Country

field is also used to default the Vendor country in the mailing address. Note that the State field next to the

Country is only used in reports and inquiries. It is NOT USED in the Vendor mailing address. The

Vendor state must be entered and formatted in the City field, according to local postal regulations.

Example: ‘City................ Philadelphia, PA’

Telephone Numbers

Same Country Vendors


Vendor.

Example:

The Branch entering the Vendor number is Philadelphia

The Vendor is located in New York

The Vendor’s Telephone number must include the New York Area code along with the Telephone

number

Overseas Vendors




Fax Numbers


If eSTELfax is installed, Fax numbers must be set up based upon the location of the fax modem. Refer to the

eSTELfax manual for details.

If eSTELfax is not installed, the Fax number entry is based on the physical location of the Branch in

relation to the Vendor.

Overseas Customers


for details.

Vendor Information

Accessing By Vendor Number

1. Vendor Number....... 1010

2. Branch.............. PHI

3. Name................ ARMCO

4. Address - Line 1.... 703 CURTIS STREET



7. City................ MIDDLETOWN, OH


9. Look-Up Name........ ARMCO

10. Country............. 1 State... PA


12. Fax Number.......... 513-425-4779

13. Language............ E

14. Sales Contact....... FRANK SMITH

Item No :


Vendor Information – first screen



Vendor Information



15. Route............... 1

16. Stop................ 1

17. Delivery Method..... CC

18. Ship Via............ Common Carrier


20. Acknowledgment Reqd Y

21. Chemical Tests Reqd. N





26. Vendor Class........ R

Item No :


Vendor Information – second screen

Vendor Information



27. Pay-To Name......... ARMCO

28. Address - Line 1.... 703 CURTIS STREET



31. City................ MIDDLEBURY, OH


33. Country............. 1

34. A/R Contact......... NORMAN SINCLAIR

35. Rel Cust No.........

36. A/P Ctrl G/L Acct... 2000

37. Def Exp G/L Acct.... 2010

Item No :


Vendor Information – third screen



Vendor Information



38. Terms of Payment.... 5

39. Purchasing Terms.... 5

40. Account Opened Date. 04/01/97

41. Customer/Vendor Cat. SM

42. Vendor Hold Code.... N

43. SIC Code............ 3300

44. 1099 Category.......

45. Tax ID Number.......

46. Currency............ US

47. Tag Prefix.......... AR

48. Tax Rgn Apl

NT1 E

NT2 E

49. Transaction Type.... R


Item No :


Vendor Information – fourth screen

Notes/Restrictions

27. Pay-To Name.

o The Pay-To Name cannot be spaces for Regular (Vendor Class R) Vendors.

o The Pay-To Name is not accessible for Temporary (Vendor Class T) Vendors.

36. A/P Ctrl G/L Acct.

The GLC=X Product Installation Option allows you to default the AP Control GL Account from the

Accounts Payable Company to the Vendor Information when you enter a new vendor. Refer to the

Product Installation Options Guide for more details.

Action Bar Options

Action Bar Action

Alter Used to modify non-key fields.

Copy Used to copy a record.

Others Provides access to the Others Information window and allows entry of a User defined

code. See below.

Others Information Window


Others Information

User Def..... AG





User Def User

Defined

Reference



Change Vendor Information

Changing information in the files should be tightly controlled to ensure that existing open Purchase

Orders, Purchasing Statistics and open Accounts Payable transactions are not adversely affected.

Field Restrictions

The following fields cannot be changed once the application is live:

Vendor number

Vendor Class

Currency

Accounts Payable Control Account number

NOTE: When you change information in a Vendor Account, you must check all Ship-From records

for that vendor, and change the pertinent information there as well. Otherwise, purchasing

statistics may be stored under incorrect codes.



SHIP-FROM INFORMATION

This information is only needed if the eSTELPLAN Purchasing module is integrated with eSTEL/AP.

Ship-From information is required if the Vendor has multiple Ship-From addresses from which you

regularly receive material. You can have up to 999 Ship-From addresses for any Vendor Account. The

Vendor Account must be created before entering the Ship-From Information.

This file contains one record for each Vendor shipping address that is different from the address in the

Vendor file. For example, a Vendor’s mailing address may be a head office, but shipments arrive from

any of several different locations. Each of these locations should have its own Ship-From record.

If the material you receive is always shipped from the address entered in the Vendor Account, there is no

need to add a Ship-From address, as the Ship-From address and every field in the Ship-From Information

automatically default from the Vendor Account.

Ship-From numbers should start at 1 for each Vendor, so that Purchasing and Accounting personnel do

not have to look up the address codes for each Vendor.

NOTE: If the Vendor's mailing address is also a Ship-From, and if there is more than one Ship-From,

we recommend that you enter the Vendor's mailing address as Ship-From number 1.

NOTE 2: In the Ship From information table, the State field next to the Country field is only used in

reports and inquiries. It is NOT USED in the Ship-From mailing address. The Vendor state

must be entered and formatted in the City field, according to local postal regulations. E.g.:

‘City................ Philadelphia PA’

Telephone Numbers



Vendor.

Example:

The Branch entering the Vendor number is Philadelphia

The Vendor is located in New York

The Vendor’s Telephone number must include the New York Area code along with the Telephone

number

Overseas Vendors




Fax Numbers


If eSTELfax is installed, Fax numbers must be set up based upon the location of the fax modem.

Example:

You have 2 branches, one in Philadelphia and one in Chicago

The fax machine resides in Philadelphia

In Chicago, you create a Vendor record for Vendor 1010 that is located in Philadelphia. The Fax

number in the Vendor file should not contain an area code.

When you transmit a fax to Vendor 1010 from your Chicago Branch, no area code is required as the

Vendor and the point of transmission are located in the same calling area (Philadelphia).

In the Chicago branch, when you enter Fax numbers for a Vendor that is located in the Chicago area,

you must include an area code. As the point of fax transmission is Philadelphia, transmissions to the

Chicago area are long distance calls.

If eSTELfax is not installed, the Fax number entry is based on the physical location of the Branch in

relation to the Customer.

Refer to the eSTELfax manual for details.

Overseas Customers


for details.



Others Information

User Def..... AG



User Def User

Defined

Reference





Ship From Information

Accessing By Vendor No/Ship-From No

1. Vendor Number....... 1010 ARMCO

2. Ship-From Number.... 1

3. Name................ ARMCO

4. Address - Line 1.... 1525 W VAN BUREN

5. Address - Line 2.... BLDG A-3


7. City................ PHOENIX, AZ___

8. Postal/ZipCode...... 85043

9. Country............. 1 State... PA


11. Fax Number.......... 602-425-4779

12. Language............ E

13. Sales Contract...... GEORGE HERNANDEZ

14. Route............... 1

15. Stop................ 1

Item No :


Ship-From Information – first screen

Ship From Information

Accessing By Vendor No/Ship-From No

1. Vendor Number....... 1010 ARMCO

2. Ship-From Number.... 1

16. Delivery Method..... CC

17. Ship Via............ Common Carrier


19. Acknowledgment Reqd Y

20. Chemical Tests Reqd. Y





25. A/R Contact......... FRANCES SCOTT__


Item No :


Ship-From Information – second screen



VENDOR REMARKS

This file contains all Vendor/Ship-From related Remarks that are used in eSTELPLAN.

There can be up to 99 lines per type of remark, per Vendor/Ship-From combination.

Vendor Remarks 15Dec99

1. Vendor Number......... 1010 ARMCO

2. Ship-From Number...... 0

3. Type.................. E

Vendor Remarks

Pack with protective interleaving.

NO MILL MARKING - NO STICKERS ON COILS

EDGE SEALER - PKG CODE 102M - EDGE PROTECTORS -

SEAL PROTECTORS - 3 ID & 1 OD 1-1/4 INCH BANDS

TRUCK: FLATBED

1 / 99

Vendor Remarks screen

Valid Types are:

A Header (External). These are used to provide instructions to the vendor on how to process our

Purchase Orders.

Header remarks are printed on the first page (Header) of the Purchase Order Form. Header

Remarks apply to the total Purchase Order rather than to individual items.

B Header (Internal). These are used to inform the front office and Warehouse of any special handling

instructions for Purchase Orders sent to this Vendor.

Internal Header remarks are printed on the internal copy of the Purchase Order Form.

C Trailer (External). These are used to provide instructions to the Vendor on how to process your

Purchase Orders.

Trailer remarks are printed on the last page (Trailer) of the Vendor and Internal copies of the

Purchase Order Form. Trailer Remarks apply to the total Purchase Order rather than to individual

items.



D Trailer (Internal). These are used to inform the front office and Warehouse of any special handling

instructions for Purchase Orders sent to this Vendor.

Internal Trailer remarks are printed on the internal copy of the Purchase Order Form. These are

used in-house, and not sent to the Vendor.

E Item (External). These remarks are applied at the transaction item level. They provide additional

specifications, product descriptions or processing information about the product purchased from the

Vendor.

Item Remarks print immediately below the Product Description lines on the vendor and internal

copies of the Purchase Order Form.

F Item (Internal). Internal Item Remarks are used to provide messages to Warehouse personnel on

how to process the material as it is received.

Internal Item Remarks are printed on the internal copy of the Purchase Order Form.

G For future use.




9. PRODUCT ENTERPRISE PARAMETERS

OVERVIEW

Product Enterprise Parameters, used only by the INVEX functions, provide a business or product

management oriented view of your Products to track performance and manage the business.

The PEP code is a combination of up to 5 different levels of classification codes:

Product Division

Product Group

Product Line

Product Category

Product Type

The five individual elements of the PEP code: Product Divisions, Groups, Lines, Categories and Types

are defined first according to the business needs.

Then, the allowable combinations of elements are defined in a hierarchical fashion in four different tables:

PEP Line table defines valid Division and Line combinations

PEP Group Table defines valid Division, Line and Group Combinations

PEP Category Table defines valid Division, Line, Group and Category combinations

PEP Table defines valid combinations of all 5 levels

Example:

Product Division could indicate Aluminum Products

Product Line could indicate the alloys of Aluminum (6061, 5053 etc.)

Product Group could indicate the general class of product (flat rolled, extrusions, tube, rod)

For this Company since only 3 levels are required, the Product Category and Type are not used. In this

case, it is necessary to set up only a default Category (e.g., XXX) and a default Type (e.g., blank) which

are connected with each set of PEP identification.

9. Product Enterprise Parameters Page 292


Inventory – Product Enterprise Parameters

Inventory – Product Enterprise Parameters Table Relations

Inventory - Product Enterprise Parameters Last Updated:04/08/03

Product Division

Product Division 2C

Description, 15C

Product Line

Product Line 2C

Description, 15C

Product Group

Product Group 2C

Description, 15C

Product Category

Product Category 2C

Description, 15C

Product Type

Product Type 2C

Description, 15C

Product Enterprise

Parameters

Identification

Product Entr Parm 10C

Info

Product Division, 2C

Product Line, 2C

Product Group, 2C

Product Category, 2C

Product Type, 2C

Description

Extended Desc, 50C

Description, 25C

PEP Line

Product Division 2C

Product Line 2C

Description, 25C

PEP Group

Product Division 2C

Product Line 2C

Product Group 2C

Description, 25C

PEP Category

Product Division 2C

Product Line 2C

Product Group 2C

Product Category 2C

Description, 25C

Product Master

Enterprise

Parameters

Identification

Group

Size

Grade

Info

Product Entr Parm , 2C

Prod. Mgmt. Seq NoC

Inventory - Product Enterprise Parameters Table Relations Last Updated:21/03/03

Product Division

Product Line

Product Group

Product Category

Product Type

Product Enterprise

Parameters

Identification

Product Entr Parm 10C

Info

Product Division, 2C

Product Line, 2C

Product Group, 2C

Product Category, 2C

Product Type, 2C

PEP Line

Product Division 2C

Product Line 2C

PEP Group

Product Division 2C

Product Line 2C

Product Group 2C

PEP Category

Product Division 2C

Product Line 2C

Product Group 2C

Product Category 2C

Product Master

Enterprise

Parameters

Identification

Group

Size

Grade

Info

Product Entr Parm , 2C

Prod. Mgmt. Seq NoC



SAMPLES OF PEP CODE USE

The number of levels in the PEP hierarchy that a given company will use depends on the nature of their

business, and the types of classifications which are required in reporting. The samples given below

reflect the general types of classifications used in the Metal industry. A company may choose to adopt

the five-level structure as described below or to use a scheme with fewer levels.

Product Division

Product Division is the highest level of PEP code. It is used to segregate products into the major business

units under which they are tracked.

Possible uses of Product Division are to classify products by one of the following:

Type of metal; Aluminum, Brass, Copper, Stainless Steel, High Strength Carbon, etc.

Overall shape characteristics; Flat Rolled, Tubing, Structural Shapes, Wire, etc.

Manufacturing process: Hot Rolled, Cold Rolled, Galvanized, Extrusion, Drawn Over Mandrel, etc.

End use application: Structural Beams, Abrasion Resistant, Pressure Vessel Quality, etc.

Product Line

Product Line is usually used to manage products by factors related to their marketing identification.

Possible uses of Product Line are the following:

Trademarked products

Lines of business; Structural, Fabrication, Aeronautical, etc.

End use application; Structural Beams, Abrasion Resistant, Pressure Vessel Quality, etc.

Product Group

Product Group is usually used to manage products by common physical characteristics of the product or

its application.

Some possible uses of Product Group are the following:

Product Shape: Flats, Plate, Angles, Sheet

End use application: Structural Beams, Abrasion Resistant, Pressure Vessel Quality, etc.



Product Category

Product Category is frequently associated with the type of process or production facility used to produce

the material for inventory management or purchasing purposes.

Possible uses of Product Category are the following:

Manufacturing process: Hot Rolled, Cold Formed, Electrogalvanized, etc.

Quality: High Strength, Pressure Vessel Quality, Commercial, etc.

(Refer to the Inventory Information Chapter for more details.)

Product Type

Product Type is the lowest level of product classification. It is usually used to identify fairly specific

mechanical or usage characteristics of products.

Possible uses of the Product Type are:

Mechanical or coating properties: Annealed, Pickled and Oiled, Galvanized etc.

Color properties: Brown, Green Red

Texture finishes: Embossed, Rolled, Painted, Texture finish, Coated

Size or Gauge ranges for marketing purposes (.00-.50”)

Sample PEP Structure

Stainless Steel

Non-CorrosiveHeat Resistant Standard

Hot Rolled BrightCold Drawn

RoundTubing Angles

.

.

.

..

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Division

Line

Group

Category

Type

Small

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.Medium

Large



Use of PEPs in Product Setup

A single, valid Product Enterprise Parameter (PEP) code is associated with each Product that the company

carries. The PEP is intended to be used as an alternate inquiry and reporting access method for Products.



PEP LEVELS USED IN INVEX

INVEX uses the PEP coding structure as a means for summarizing information.

Users have the option to request the data at the different PEP levels:

0 – All levels

1 – Product Division

2 – Product Line

3 – Product Group

4 – Product Category

5 – Product Type



REFERENCE TABLE ENTRY

Product Master – Enterprise Parameters (inamep)

Use this table to link one or more Product Masters to a specific Product Enterprise Parameter.

Product Master - Enterprise Parameters


1. Product Group......

2. Size...............

3. Grade..............

4. Pep................

5. Prod. Mgmt. Seq No.

6. Usage Status.......

Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Master – Enterprise Parameters screen


Group

Size

Grade

Product

Master Ref

Enter a valid Product Master record.

PEP PEP Ref Enter a valid PEP code.

Prod. Mgmt. Seq No. Product Management Sequence Number.

The Product Management Sequence number is used in

conjunction with the Product Enterprise Parameters

(PEP) to sequence Products within a PEP category.

Typically, it is used to sequence Products by

ascending Size and Grade Quality irrespective of

the coding of the Size and Grade fields.

The Sequence number is manually assigned. It does

not need to be contiguous within the Product

Division/Line/Group/Category/Type combinations.

Sufficient numbers should be left between

Size/Grade combinations to allow the addition of

supplemental items

NOTE: Sequence numbers must be assigned in

ascending sequence

Example:




Grade Size Sequence

36 2214 1000

44W 2214 1500

36 22316 1500

44W 22316 2500

36 22516 3000

The Product Management Sequence number does not

need to be unique within a Product

Division/Line/Group/Category/Type combination, the

same sequence number may be used more than once.

Usage Status A A, D or I Enter the Usage Status.

Product Enterprise Parameters (inapep)

Product Enterprise Parameters

Accessing By Pep

1. Prod. Ent. Param... SPCLTY CL

2. Product Division... FE

3. Product Line....... FR

4. Product Group...... CL

5. Product Category... SF

6. Product Type....... GA

7. Description........ Ferrous Flat Rolled Coil

8. Extended Desc...... Ferrous Flat Rolled Coil SEMI-FINSIHED Gauge Req’d


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Enterprise Parameter Entry screen


Prod. Ent. Param Enter the PEP Code.

Product Division Prod Div

Ref

Enter a valid Product Division

Product Line Prod Line

Ref

Enter a valid Product Line

Product Group Prod Group

Ref

Enter a valid Product Group

Product Category Prod Cat

Ref

Enter a valid Product Category




Product Type Prod Type

Ref

Enter a valid Product Type

Description Enter the short description of the PEP

Extended Desc. Enter the long description of the PEP

Usage Status A A, D or I Enter Usage Status.

Product Type (inapti)

Product Type

Accessing By

1. Product Type ...... GA

2. Description........ Gauge Req’d Fe


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Type Entry screen


Product Type Enter the Type code.

Description Enter the Type description.

Usage Status A A, D or I Enter Usage Status.



Product Enterprise Category Parameters (inadct)

Product Enterprise Category Parameters

Accessing By


2. Product Line ...... FR

3. Product Group ..... CL

4. Product Category... MI



Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Enterprise Category Parameters Entry screen



Ref



Ref



Ref


Product Category Prod Cat

Ref

Enter a valid Product Category

Description Enter the description for the Product Enterprise

Category.

Usage Status A A, D or I Enter Usage Status Code.



Product Enterprise Group Parameters (inapgr)

Product Enterprise Group Parameters

Accessing By






Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Enterprise Group Parameters Entry screen



Ref



Ref



Ref



Group.




Product Group (inapgp)

Product Group

Accessing By


2. Description........ Coil


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Group Entry screen


Product Group Enter the Product Group code.

Description Enter the Product Group description.




Product Enterprise Line Parameters (inaplp)

Product Enterprise Line Parameters

Accessing By



3. Description........ Ferrous Flat Rolled


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Enterprise Line Parameters Entry screen



Ref



Ref



Line.




Product Division (inapdv)

Product Division

Accessing By


2. Description........ Ferrous


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Division Entry screen


Product Division Enter the Product Division code.

Description Enter the Product Division description.




Product Line (inaprl)

Product Line

Accessing By

1. Product Line....... FR

2. Description........ Flat Rolled


Item No :

1-Alter 2-Copy

Product Line


Product Line Enter the Product Line code.

Description Enter the Product Line description.





APPENDIX A

USER MENU OPTIONS

Customer Accounts

m Provides for manual assignment of the Customer Account Number.

Product Master INAPRM

t Provides access to the Theoretical Weight Factor (TMW) field after the eSTELPLAN

application is live. The function MUST NOT be generally accessible, as inadvertent changes

to TMW factors without following the proper procedures could cause serious data integrity

problems. Refer to Changing the TMW Factor in the Inventory Information chapter of the

Reference Manual for the details.

Product Group INAPRG






Product Group/Grade INAGRG






Appendix A Page 308



INDEX

1099 Category ....................................................... 283

10th - 25th Discount .......................................... 65, 66

2nd Month Due Day .......................................... 65, 67

ABC Classification ....................................... 167, 253

Access Rights ........................................................ 277

Account Class ......................................... 2, 20, 25, 26

Account Opened Date ................................... 269, 283

Account Type .......................................... 2, 25, 26, 34

Accounting Period ......... 29, 30, 31, 34, 35, 38, 44, 47

Activity ............ 50, 133, 199, 200, 201, 203, 222, 223

Activity code ......................................................... 223

Actual Weight ......................................................... 91

Address - Line 1 ... 11, 27, 80, 264, 267, 281, 282, 287

Address - Line 2 ... 11, 27, 80, 264, 267, 281, 282, 287

Address - Line 3 ... 11, 27, 80, 264, 267, 281, 282, 287

Address number .................................................... 268

Aging Days Allowed ............................................. 255

Allocation code179, 180, 181, 182, 183, 187, 189,

192, 193, 197

Allocation Remarks ...................................... 273, 274

Allocation Type ............................................ 180, 181

Alternate Language ................111, 118, 173, 174, 175

Alternate PWC ...................................................... 208

Alternate Replacement Cost .................. 164, 165, 168

Alternate Vendor ................................................... 168

Amount ............................................... 43, 48, 91, 210

Automatic Credit Hold .................................... 38, 255

Average Cost ................................................. 162, 164

Average Payment Days ................................... 47, 269

Backorder Allowed ........................................... 40, 44

Balance ........................................ 25, 35, 82, 169, 207

Bank ........................... 7, 36, 37, 46, 47, 63, 78, 79, 80

Base Country ................................................. 109, 111

Base Currency ......................................... 63, 109, 111

Base Language .............................. 109, 111, 173, 250

Base Measure ................. 104, 106, 109, 111, 113, 200

Basic G/L Account ...................................... 25, 73, 74

Beginning Date ................................................. 29, 30

Bill of Lading form ............ 90, 91, 234, 252, 270, 272

Bill of Lading number ........................................... 261

Billing Description ........................................ 182, 183

Bill-To Customer .................................................. 254

Branch Name .......................................................... 11

Branch Required ........................3, 25, 26, 39, 43, 184

Branch Sequence number ........................................ 11

Build-up ............................................................ 87, 89

Business Day ............................................... 31, 37, 38

Buyer ............................................... 21, 152, 154, 237

Buying Branch ...................................................... 114

Cash Account ........................................................ 257

Charge number ...................................... 182, 183, 184

Charge Quantity .......................................... 89, 91, 93

Charge Quantity Type ................................. 89, 91, 93

Charge Rate ............................198, 199, 200, 201, 202

Charge Type182, 183, 184, 193, 194, 195, 196, 197,

199, 201

Check Limit ...................................................... 78, 79

Chemical Element ..................118, 124, 126, 148, 150

Chemical Elements Table ............................. 118, 126

Chemical Tests Required ...................................... 257

City11, 27, 53, 54, 73, 74, 80, 172, 250, 264, 267,

268, 269, 276, 280, 281, 282, 285, 287

Coil Length ............................................... 89, 90, 154

Color code ..................................................... 123, 147

Commodity code ................................................... 212

Common Carrier164, 167, 168, 215, 231, 242, 251,

256, 265, 282, 287

Common Dimension ..................................... 135, 136

Company Name .........................12, 27, 256, 268, 269

Compound on Taxes ......................................... 73, 74

Condition code .............................................. 122, 240

Contact ............................................ 49, 269, 282, 287

Corporate Branch . 59, 60, 85, 110, 114, 176, 205, 216

Cost Amount ................................................. 203, 211

Cost Center .......................... 1, 3, 4, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26

Cost Center Origin ............................................ 21, 23

Cost Center Type .............................. 3, 21, 23, 25, 26

Cost Rate ........ 198, 199, 200, 201, 202, 210, 221, 223

Cost Reconciliation ..................................... 42, 50, 52

Cost Table ..................................................... 154, 202

Cost Type .............................................................. 211

Cost U/M .... 40, 44, 110, 114, 162, 164, 210, 220, 221

Costing Method ............................................. 201, 223

Country8, 9, 11, 12, 27, 94, 111, 249, 250, 264, 266,

267, 268, 269, 280, 281, 282, 285, 286, 287

Credit Action ........................................................... 70

Credit Authority ................................ 38, 69, 254, 259

Credit Control ..........................70, 251, 254, 255, 259

Credit Hold Reason ................................................. 82

Credit Limit Expiry Date .............................. 255, 257

Credit Limit Password .................................... 38, 259

Credit Log Printer ............................................. 16, 17

Index Page 310


Credit Note49, 50, 51, 86, 133, 181, 183, 184, 187,

215, 217

Credit Review Date ............................................... 259

Credit Status ............................................................ 81

Currency code ....................................................... 111

Currency Description .............................................. 63

Currency Symbol .................................................... 63

Current A/R Period ........................................... 36, 37

Current Balance ..................................................... 269

Current G/L Period ............................................ 34, 35

Customer Bank ........................................................ 80

Customer Branch ................................................... 259

Customer Look-Up Name ............................. 250, 276

Customer Name ..................................... 250, 253, 276

Customer number89, 248, 250, 256, 257, 258, 260,

266, 272, 276

Customer Part number ........................................... 261

Customer/Vendor Category ..................................... 72

Cut Basis Print U/M ...................................... 110, 113

Date Format ....................................................... 27, 28

Day .......................... 31, 32, 33, 37, 38, 43, 50, 52, 67

Default Location .................................................... 171

Delivery Manifest .................................................. 217

Delivery Method164, 167, 168, 231, 251, 256, 264,

265, 282, 287

Destination .................................................. 12, 41, 51

Destination Branch ...................................... 12, 41, 51

Direct Invoice .......................................................... 86

Direct Shipment179, 180, 182, 189, 191, 192, 193,

194, 195

Discount Date .......................................................... 66

Discount Days ................................................... 65, 66

Discount Rate .................................................... 65, 66

Due 10th - 25th .................................................. 65, 67

Due Date ................................................. 66, 206, 207

Due Day ...................................................... 65, 66, 67

Element ................................................. 125, 148, 150

Employer ID ...................................................... 46, 48

End of Month Following ................................... 66, 68

End Use ................................................. 229, 273, 274

End Use Description...................................... 273, 274

Ending Date ....................................................... 29, 30

Equivalent Product ................ 118, 135, 136, 152, 154

Exchange Rate ................................... 63, 64, 111, 202

Expiry Date ........................................................... 255

F.O.B. ................................................................ 53, 54

Fax number................ 11, 27, 250, 257, 266, 281, 286

First Sale Date ......................................................... 82

Forms27, 92, 173, 200, 215, 217, 229, 242, 261, 263,

271, 274, 275

Freight Charge ........................... 74, 77, 182, 198, 251

Freight Class.................................................. 152, 154

Freight Cost48, 162, 164, 168, 181, 182, 186, 188,

192, 194, 195, 196, 198

Freight Rate ........................................................... 198

Freight Responsibility ..................... 77, 251, 256, 265

Freight Weight ...................................................... 198

G/L Branch .......................................................... 4, 16

Gauge Required100, 115, 116, 117, 138, 139, 140,

143, 147, 149, 153, 158, 159, 160

Gauge Type ........................................................... 212

General Ledger Distribution .......... 184, 185, 187, 188

Grade Description ......................................... 145, 174

Header Remarks .................................................... 288

Heat ............87, 91, 119, 120, 124, 126, 153, 227, 252

Heat Information ................................................... 124

Heat number ............................................................ 91

High Balance ......................................................... 269

Hold Reason .................................................... 82, 133

Holiday ........................................................ 31, 32, 33

Holiday Date ........................................................... 33

ILC code .......................................... 44, 106, 109, 210

Imperial Conversion Factor ........................... 111, 112

Index Objective ............................................. 162, 163

Inside Salesperson ......................................... 259, 264

Insurance Amount ................................................. 259

Inventory Adjustment .......... 50, 51, 52, 101, 118, 121

Inventory Adjustment Reason ....................... 118, 121

Inventory Allocation ............................... 17, 199, 273

Inventory Conditions ..................... 118, 122, 240, 241

Inventory Control Method ..................................... 136

Inventory Index ..................................... 163, 164, 167

Inventory Organization99, 115, 151, 153, 154, 155,

202

Invoice Date ................................................ 40, 43, 67

Invoice Date Type ............................................. 40, 43

Invoice form .......................................... 183, 227, 271

Invoice item ........................................................... 179

Invoice Type............................................................ 90

Item Due Date ....................................................... 255

Item number .......................................................... 274

Job number ............................................................ 250

Jominy ........................................................... 127, 128

Key code ................................................................. 34

Language code ...................................................... 173

Last Closed Period .................................................. 34

Last Sale Date ....................................................... 269

Lead Time ..................... 166, 168, 205, 206, 207, 209

Login ID .................................................................. 60

Look-Up Name ...................................... 276, 277, 281

Look-Up screen ..................................................... 228

Lot U/M ......................................................... 110, 113

Mail code ............................................................... 253

Management Summary Group ...... 102, 118, 132, 140

Markup .............................................. 39, 41, 132, 176

Material Cost ................................... 48, 168, 187, 188

Material Replacement Cost ................... 164, 165, 168

Material Specifications .................................... 86, 134

Maximum Credit Limit ................................... 38, 255

Measure44, 92, 100, 103, 104, 105, 106, 109, 114,

117, 137, 138, 165, 167, 168, 173, 200, 201, 210,

223, 261

Metric code.............................................................. 89

Mill code ....................................................... 119, 120

Index Page 311


Mill Line ............................................................... 200

Minimum Weight ...................................... 40, 45, 139

Month-End Date .................................... 37, 38, 46, 47

Mult Tag ........................ 13, 14, 16, 18, 87, 88, 89, 91

Mult Tag Copies ............................................... 87, 89

Next Cost ...................................................... 163, 165

Next Cost Date .............................................. 163, 165

Nominal Gauge ............................................. 158, 159

Normal Debit/Credit ......................................... 25, 26

Number of Days ................................................ 65, 66

Number of Weeks ............................................. 29, 30

Order Date ............................................................. 207

Order number .......................................................... 90

Order Status .......................................... 213, 214, 239

Order Type ............................................................ 176

Other Cost ..................................44, 48, 182, 186, 188

Outside Salesperson ................................ 76, 259, 264

Overdue Invoice Grace ................................. 255, 259

P/O Category ......................................................... 238

Packaging .............................................. 200, 221, 223

Packaging Cost...................................................... 221

Packaging Cost Basis ............................................ 221

Past Due Remarks ................................................. 269

Payables Contact ................................................... 265

Paydex ........................................................... 249, 254

Pay-To Name ................................................ 282, 283

Physical Inventory Update ................................ 41, 52

Physical Tests Required ........................................ 257

Piece Control Required ..........104, 107, 108, 116, 139

Postal/Zip code................................................ 11, 250

Preferred Carrier ........................................... 162, 164

Preferred Vendor ............ 162, 164, 168, 256, 264, 265

Price Variance ......................................................... 76

Price Variance Allowed .......................................... 76

Pricing Branch ........................................................ 16

Pricing Remarks .................................................... 272

Printer Type ........................................ 13, 14, 15, 232

Process17, 49, 50, 51, 153, 200, 201, 204, 206, 208,

222, 223, 224, 225

Process code .................................................. 222, 225

Processing Cost48, 182, 185, 187, 188, 192, 193,

195, 196, 201, 202, 203, 223

Processing Cost Rate ..................................... 201, 223

Processing Work Center4, 183, 192, 199, 200, 201,

203, 204

Product Category102, 118, 129, 152, 154, 291, 294,

296, 298, 300

Product coding ................................................ 98, 115

Product Description ......... 86, 173, 273, 274, 275, 289

Product Grade .. 98, 118, 145, 146, 149, 163, 166, 178

Product Group98, 100, 101, 102, 106, 115, 116, 118,

128, 131, 132, 137, 138, 139, 140, 141, 142, 143,

144, 146, 147, 148, 149, 151, 152, 153, 155, 157,

158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 166, 167, 170,

171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 178, 212, 291, 293,

296, 297, 298, 300, 301, 302, 307

Product Group Description ................................... 138

Product Item ..................... 91, 101, 153, 164, 224, 240

Product Line177, 178, 291, 293, 296, 298, 300, 301,

303, 305

Product Shape ....................................................... 293

Product Size .................................... 98, 163, 166, 178

Product Tax Status ........................................ 118, 172

Production Item ............................................... 17, 224

Production Sequence ..................................... 222, 225

Production Work Order form ................ 270, 271, 272

Prox Terms ........................................................ 65, 66

Purchase Analysis ................................................... 43

Purchase Cost .............................. 42, 50, 52, 121, 238

Purchase Cost Adjustment .................. 42, 50, 52, 121

Purchasing Contact ............................................... 264

Purchasing Terms .................................................. 283

PWC Ticket ........................................... 199, 200, 203

PWC Ticket Printer ............................... 199, 200, 203

Quantity Available .................................................. 45

Quarter .............................................................. 29, 30

Quotation form .............................................. 271, 272

Quote Item ............................................................ 225

Reason code .......................................................... 133

Reason Type.................................................. 133, 134

Reference number ................................................... 49

Reference Prefix ................................................ 49, 52

Region code ............................................................ 55

Remark Template ........... 163, 165, 218, 219, 244, 245

Remark Type .................... 85, 270, 271, 273, 274, 275

Replacement Cost ................................. 164, 165, 168

Reports .................................................................. 129

Return-to-Stock ................................... 17, 51, 53, 133

Route ......................................249, 251, 264, 282, 287

Run Cost Rate ............................................... 222, 223

Run Cost Rate U/M ....................................... 222, 223

Sales Allocations ........................................... 182, 191

Sales Category179, 180, 181, 182, 185, 187, 189,

192, 226, 233

Sales Contact ......................................................... 281

Sales Order form ..................................................... 66

Sales Order Item101, 193, 229, 266, 271, 272, 273,

274

Sales Order number ......................................... 90, 274

Sales Tax Applicable ............................................ 172

Sales Tax Type .................................................. 73, 74

Sales Territory ................................. 75, 250, 264, 266

Scrap Product Group ..................... 143, 148, 149, 155

Scrap Product Size ................................................ 149

Selling Branch ...................... 10, 51, 90, 184, 210, 232

Sequence code ....................................................... 225

Sequence number .......................... 101, 152, 297, 298

Session ID ............................................................... 51

Set-Up Cost Amount ............................................. 199

Set-Up Cost Rate ........................................... 222, 223

Set-Up Cost Rate U/M .................................. 222, 223

Shearing ................................................................ 223

Ship Via .................................249, 251, 264, 282, 287

Ship-From number ................................................ 285

Index Page 312


Shipping Branch ........................ 10, 51, 205, 217, 233

Shipping Remarks ......................................... 270, 271

Shipping Tag form .................................................. 87

Shipping Warehouse ............................................. 198

Ship-To Name ....................................................... 253

Ship-To number .............................. 88, 263, 267, 270

SIC code .................................................................. 71

Size code ....................................................... 152, 160

Size Description ............................................ 153, 175

Skid Type .............................................................. 220

Skid Weight ........................................................... 220

Slitting ............................................................... 4, 223

Source Journal ................................................... 49, 52

Source Product Group ................................... 138, 139

Specification Template .................. 118, 131, 153, 170

Specifications118, 130, 131, 170, 201, 203, 220, 221,

223

Standard Gauge ..................................... 141, 162, 163

Standard Length .................................... 141, 162, 163

Standard Product ................................................... 164

Standard Terms ..................................................... 269

Standard Width .............................. 140, 141, 162, 163

Statement Cycle .................................................... 254

Station ID .......................................................... 56, 57

Status code ...................................................... 81, 213

Stocking Branch ........................................ 51, 85, 114

Stop ....................................... 249, 251, 264, 282, 287

System Date ............................................ 43, 253, 254

System Printer ................................................... 16, 17

Tag Control ............................................................. 99

Tag Format ........................................................ 87, 88

Tag Information .......................... 87, 88, 93, 131, 133

Tag Master Required99, 115, 116, 117, 131, 139,

152, 153, 155, 170, 220, 224, 253

Tag Master Required Product................ 139, 220, 253

Tag number ....................................................... 88, 99

Tag Prefix .................................................. 87, 88, 283

Tare Weight ....................................................... 87, 89

Tax Region ................................ 73, 74, 172, 253, 265

Telephone number ......... 250, 256, 257, 266, 280, 285

Temporary Account....................................... 253, 257

Terms of Payment ....... 65, 66, 91, 248, 253, 259, 283

Test Certificate .. 19, 51, 173, 215, 227, 235, 242, 252

Theoretical Weight91, 100, 106, 107, 108, 115, 116,

117, 139, 147, 149, 152, 153, 307

TMW Factor100, 101, 116, 138, 139, 148, 149, 153,

307

Toll Order ................................................ 51, 215, 242

Total Cost .............................................................. 210

Total Replacement Cost ........................................ 168

Total Weight.......................................................... 252

Trailer ............................................................ 288, 289

Trailer Remarks ..................................................... 288

Transaction Type ............................................. 85, 283

Transfer Order Item ................................................. 86

Turnover Objective ....................................... 162, 163

Type of Certificate ........................ 257, 264, 282, 287

U/M Type .............................................................. 106

Unit of Measure45, 89, 100, 103, 104, 105, 106, 110,

113, 114, 117, 137, 138, 153, 154, 164, 165, 167,

168, 173, 175, 200, 201, 202, 220, 222, 223, 262

Usage Status8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 15, 16, 18, 19, 20, 21,

22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 31, 32, 33, 53, 55, 56, 57, 61,

62, 63, 65, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 75, 76, 77, 78, 80,

81, 82, 88, 94, 95, 105, 106, 114, 119, 120, 121,

122, 123, 124, 128, 129, 130, 132, 134, 135, 138,

142, 145,147, 148, 152, 155, 158, 159, 163, 170,

171, 172, 174, 175, 176, 178, 180, 182, 198, 199,

204, 205, 209, 210, 214, 216, 220, 221, 222, 225,

227, 228, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 237,

238, 239, 240, 243, 265, 267, 268, 269, 283, 287,

297, 298, 299, 300, 301, 302, 303, 304, 305

Use Base Length Unit ................................... 152, 154

User Branch ............................................. 56, 232, 277

User ID .................................................................... 10

Vendor Class ......................................... 282, 283, 284

Vendor number ...................................... 280, 284, 285

Vendor Ship-From .................................................. 95

Warehouse code ...................................................... 53

Warehouse Type .......................................... 44, 53, 54

Weight Limit ......................................................... 198

Weight Unit of Measure ........................................ 100

Work in Process ................................................ 16, 17

Work Order form ............................................. 82, 242

Work Order Printing.............................................. 233

Year ................................................................... 29, 30

Documents

Reference - Invera